Pioneer DVD-V7300D Operating Instructions
1 En Operating Instructions DVD PLAYER DVD-V7300D
2 En IMPOR T ANT FOR USE IN THE UNITED KINGDOM The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the f ollowing code: blue: neutral bro wn: live If the plug provided is unsuitable for your sock et outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug fitted. The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must not be inser ted into any 13 amp soc ket as this can result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor of the distribution panel should be provided with 13 amp fuse . As the col- ours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance ma y not correspond with coloured marking identifying the ter minals in your plug, proceed as follo ws: The wire which is coloured blue m ust be connected to the terminal which is mar ked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is mar ked with the letter L or coloured red. Do not connect either wire to the earth ter- minal of a three pin plug. NO TE After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cov er in the plug must be replaced with a fuse cov er which corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base of the plug or the word that is embossed on the base of the plug, and the appliance must not be used without a fuse cover . If lost, replacement fuse cov ers can be obtained from your dealer . This appliance is rated approv ed to B.S . 1362 A.S.T .A. should be used. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of suffi- cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION IMPOR T ANT CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilater al triangle is intended to aler t the user to the presence of im- portant operating and maintenance (ser vicing) in- structions in the literature accompanying the appli- ance. Bij dit product zijn batterijen geleverd. W anneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA.
3 En/Fr The stand-by/ ON s witch is secondary connected and therefore,does not separate the unit fr om mains power in standby position. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRàLING VED àBNING UNDGàUDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRàLNING NÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STRàLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT NÃÂKYVàJA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. ÃÂLàKA TSO SÃÂTEESEN. VRW1699 IMPORT ANT CA UTION This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remov e any co vers or at- tempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The follo wing caution label appear on the player . Location: On the bonnet of the player This product complies with the Low V oltage Directiv es (73/ 23/EEC) . EMC Directives (89/336/EEC , 92/31/EEC) and CE Ma rking Directi ve (93/68/EEC). Australian C-Tick W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CONSUL T WITH THE COMP ANY SALES REPRESENT A- TIVE. âÂÂUSE ONL Y SAFETY LICENCED PO WER SUP- PL Y CORD. â A CERTIFIED PO WER SUPPL Y CORD IS T O BE USED WITH THIS EQ UIPMENT . FOR A RA TED CURRENT UP T O 6 A, A TYPE NO T LIGHTER THAN H05VV -F 3G O .75 mm 2 SHALL BE USED . The generation of Acoustial Noise Is Less Than 70 dB. (ISO 7779/DIN 45635) IMPOR T ANT A TTENTION Ce produit renferme une diode àlaser d'une catégorie supérieure à1. Pour garantir une sécurité constante, ne pas retirer les couvercles ni essayer d'accéder àl'intérieur de l'appareil. Pour toute réparation, s'adresser àun personnel qualifié. La note suiv ante se trouve sur v otre lecteur . Emplacement : Sur le couvercle du lecteur Ce produit est conf orme àla directive relative aux appareils basse tension (73/23/CEE), aux directiv es relarives àla compatibilité électromagnétique (89/336/CEE,92/31/CEE) et àla directiv e CE relative aux marquages (93/68/CEE). ATTENTION: AFIN DE PREVENIR TOUT RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE OU DâÂÂINCENDIE, NE P AS EXPOSER CET APP AREIL A L'HUMIDITE NI A LA PLUIE. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS àTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR àPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT N àKYV àJA N àKYM ÃÂTT àMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. àLàKA TSO S àTEESEN. VRW1699 CONSUL TER UN A GENT COMMERCIAL DE LA SOCIETE. âÂÂNâÂÂUTILISER QUâÂÂUN CORDON DâÂÂALIMENT A TION GARANTISSANT LA SECURITEâÂÂ. UN CORDON DâÂÂALIMENT A TION HOMOLOGUE DOIT ETRE UTILISE A VEC CET APP AREIL. POUR UN COURANT NOMINAL DE JUSQUâÂÂA 6 A, IL F A UT UTILISER UN TYPE DE CORDON QUI NE SOIT P AS INFERIEUR A H05VV -F 3G 0,75 mm 2 OU H05VVH2-F 3G 0,75 mm 2. La génération de bruit de fond acoustique est inférieure à70 dB. [ISO 7779/DIN45635] L âÂÂinterrupteur V eille/ON est àraccordement secondaire et il ne coupe donc pas totalement lâÂÂappareil de lâÂÂalimentation secteur sur la position de veille. Français
4 Ge/It WICHTIG V ORSICHT Dieses Gerät enthält eine Laserdiode mit einer höheren Klasse als 1. Um einen stets sicheren Betrieb zu gewährleisten, weder irgendwelche Abdeckungen entf er nen, noch versuchen, sich zum Geräteinneren Zugang zu verschaff en. Alle W ar tungsarbeiten sollten qualifizier tem Kunden- dienstpersonal überlassen werden. Die folgenden W arnungsetiketten sind am D VD-Spieler angebracht. Lage: Auf der Haube des Pla yers Dieses Produkt entspricht den Niederspannungsrichtlinien (73/ 23/EC), EMV -Richtlinien (89/336/EEC , 92/31/EEC) und den CE-Markierungsr ichtlinien (93/68/EEC). W ARNUNG: UM EINEN BRAND ODER STR OMSCHLAG ZU VERMEIDEN, DIESES GERÃÂT NICHT REGEN ODER FEUCHTIGKEIT A USSETZEN. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS ÃÂTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT N ÃÂKYV àJA N ÃÂKYM ÃÂTT ÃÂM ÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. ÃÂL àKA TSO S ÃÂTEESEN. VRW1699 IMPORT ANTE PRECA UZIONE Questo prodotto contiene un diodo al laser di classe superiore alla classe1. P er motivi di sicurezza, non smontare i coperchi e non procedere ad interventi sulle par ti inter ne. P er qualsiasi r iparazione rivolgersi a personale qualificato . La nota seguente si tro va. Ubicazione: Sul comperchio del lettore Questo prodotto è conforme alla direttiva sul basso voltaggio (73/23/CEE), alle direttiv e EMC (89/336/CEE,92/ 31/CEE) e alla direttiva sul marchio CE (93/68/CEE). AVVERTENZA: PER EVIT ARE IL RISCHIO DI FIAMME O SCOSSE ELETTRICHE, NON ESPORRE QUEST O APP ARECCHIO ALLA PIOGGIA O ALL 'UMIDITàCLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS àTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR àPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT N àKYV àJA N àKYM ÃÂTT àMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. àLàKA TSO S àTEESEN. VRW1699 CONSUL T ARE IL RAPPRESENT ANTE DELLA COMP A GNIA. âÂÂUSARE SOL T ANTO IL CA VO DI ALIMENT AZIONE BREVETT A T O PER LA SICUREZZA. â CON QUEST O APP ARECCHIO SI DEVE USARE UN CA V O DI ALIMENT AZIONE CERTIFICA TO . PER UNA CORRENTE NOMINALE FINO A 6 A, DEVE ESSERE USA T O UN TIPO NON PIàLEGGER O DI H05VV -F 3G 0,75 mm 2 O H05VVH2- F 3G 0,75 mm 2 . La generazione di rumore acustico è inferiore a 70 dB. (ISO 7779/DIN45635) L âÂÂinterruttore di attesa/accensione (ON) è collegato in modo secondario e perciò nella posizione di attesa non separa lâÂÂunitàdallâÂÂalimentazione della rete. âÂÂA USSCHLIESSLICH EIN DEN GEL TENDEN SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN ENTSPRECHENDES NETZKABEL VER WENDEN. â DIESES GERÃÂT MUSS ÃÂBER EIN DEN GEL TENDEN SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN ENTSPRECHENDES NETZKABEL AN D AS STROMNETZ ANGESCHLOSSEN WERDEN. BEI EINEM NENNSTROM V ON MAXIMAL 6 A MUSS EINE NETZKABELGARNITUR V ON MINDESTENS H05VV -F 3 G 0,75 mm2 ODER H05VVH2-F 3 G 0,75 mm2 VER WENDET WERDEN. Der Betriebsgeräuschpegel beträgt weniger als 70 dB [ISO 7779/DIN 45635]. Der Bereitschafts-/Ein-Schalter ist sekundär angeschlossen, und trennt das Gerät in der Bereitschaftsstellung nicht v om Stromnetz. Deutsch Italiano
5 Sp/En IMPORT ANTE PRECA UCIÃÂN Este producto contiene un diodo de láser de clase superior a 1. Par a mantener la seguridad apropiada, no quite ninguna tapa ni trate de acceder al interior del aparato . ConfÃÂe todo el mantenimiento a personal técnico cualificado . En su aparato se han aplicado las siguientes etiquetas precautorias: Ubicación: En la cubier ta del reproductor Este producto cumple con la Directiv a de Bajo V oltaje (73/ 23/CEE), Directivas EMC (89/336/CEE, 92/31/CEE) y Directiv a de Marcaci ón CE (93/68/CEE). AD VERTENCIA: P ARA EVIT AR INCENDIOS Y DESCARGAS ELÃÂCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE AP ARA T O A LA LLUVIA NI A LA HUMED AD . CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS àTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR àPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TTAESSA AL TISTUT N àKYV àJA N àKYM ÃÂTT àMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. àLàKA TSO S àTEESEN. VRW1699 CONSUL TE AL REPRESENT ANTE DE VENT AS DE LA COMP AÃÂÃÂA. "UTILICE SOLAMENTE EL CABLE DE ALIMENT ACIÃÂN APR OBADO Y SEGURO". CON ESTE EQUIPO DEBERàUTILIZARSE UN CABLE DE ALIMENT ACIÃÂN CER TIFICADO. P ARA UNA CORRIENTE NOMINAL DE HAST A 6 A DEBERàUTILIZARSE UNO CUY O TIPO NO SEA MÃÂS LIGERO QUE EL H05VV -F3G DE 0,75 mm2 O EL H05VVH2- F3G DE 0,75 mm 2 . La generación de ruido acústico es inf erior a 70 dB. (ISO 7779/DIN45635) El interruptor de alimentación en espera/encendido está conectado en secundario y , por lo tanto, no desconecta la unidad de la toma de alimentación cuando está en la posición de alimentación en espera. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know ho w to oper ate y our model proper ly . After y ou ha v e fin- ished reading the instructions, put them a w a y in a saf e place f or future reference . ⢠This pla yer is not suitab le for commercial use . Bef ore using Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know ho w to operate your model properly . After you hav e finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. Chec k Accessories Audio cord ........................................................................... 1 Video cord ........................................................................... 1 AC cord ............................................................................... 2 (Europian model) (UK model) Remote control unit ............................................................. 1 Batteries (AA/R6P) .............................................................. 2 Laser barcode sheet ........................................................... 1 Operating Instructions ......................................................... 1 Inser ting batteries into the remote contr ol While pressing the bac k cover , pull out in the direction indicated by the arr ow and insert R6P size dry cell batteries. ÷ Make sure to match the plus ( ) and minus (â ) polarity guides in the batteries with the marks inside the batter y compar t- ment. Note ÷ Do not mix old and ne w batter ies. ÷ Ev en batter ies of the same type will differ in v oltage. Do not mix diff erent type of batteries together . ÷ When not using the remote control for a long period of time (over 1 month), remove the batteries to avoid possible dam- age from battery corrosion. If battery leakage occurs, wipe the battery liquid from the battery component, then insert new batteries. Español
6 En 8 . Barcode/Command stac k This pla yer , when segment commands and barcodes that control are input in advance, enables images to be s witched and play ed back one after the other . This is very convenient when used in demonstrations, presen- tations, etc. Furthermore, the RS-232C connection al- lows uploading/downloading of the set content. (See page 59) ÷ Uploading/downloading can be easily performed when dedicated applications are being used. 9 . Interface with external signals (RS-232C, external option s witch) The de vice is fitted with an RS-232C connection so that commands can be given to support D VD , Video CD and CD . The control protocol is , for the most part, compat- ible with that of LD (Laser Disc) equipment, and LD sig- nals can also be easily transf erred. Other than the RS-232C interf ace connector , a terminal for the e xter nal option switch is pro vided. By simply con- necting a s witch to this terminal, operation is possible f or DVD-VIDEO menu selection and barcode/command stack calls as w ell as operation of the remote control unit. ÷ Consult the Userâ s Manual for detailed inf or mation re- garding this ter minal and RS-232C control commands. (See your dealer f or more inf or mation about the Userâ s manual.) 10 . Video blac kboard function Graphics and characters recorded in adv ance at desired positions on the D VD picture screen will appear during pla ybac k. This function enables demonstr ations and presentations to be more eff ectively perf or med. (See page 76) 11. Video T ext Retriev al With this function, you can use the mouse to clic k on buttons sho wn on-screen during playbac k for displa y of indications of the text file corresponding to the selected button. This is possible only with Video T ext Retriev al com- patible discs. (See page 82) 12. External Synchr onizing Function This terminal allows output of video signals linked to an external sync signal. (See page 82) Component Features and Functions 1. High-reliability , high-endurance play er This pla yer f eatures a high-performance brushless spin- dle motor , and the mechanical components have been sealed against heat and dust, giving this unit improv ed reliability . 2. P AL/NTSC dual playbac k D VD discs in either the P AL format or the NTSC format can be played back. (See page 84) 3. Frame search function When the frame search function is used, searching is possible in units smaller than when searching b y chap- ter and time, and an y point can be f ound. (See page 20) When frame segment pla yback is used, it is possible to pla y bac k from an y point to an y point in a video with still playback at the end. (See page 61, 62) ÷ The frame search function cannot be used with a multi PGC disc (time is not displa yed on the TV screen) or with a Video CD , etc. F rame segment playbac k is pos- sible with the DVD barcode, RS-232C control and a Barcode/Command stack. 4 . High-speed searc h With a 1.3X reading speed and improv ed memor y cache and search algorithm, the search speed has been in- creased. (See page 19, 20) 5 . Enhanced special playbac k This pla yer enables the D VD and Video CD pla yback speed to be changed in sev eral w ays . Slo w forw ard and re verse pla yback, scan pla yback and frame f orward/re- verse can be freely selected. (See page 18, 20, 21) ÷ T o perform rev erse slow pla yback, select F rame from the REV STEP/REV PLA Y page of the AD V .SETUP MENU . Slow pla yback is only possib le in the forw ard direction with a Video CD . 6. Mouse contr ol Instead of the remote control unit, a PS/2* pointing de- vice can be used to control the pla yer if desired. This allows selecting specific locations b y the point-and-clic k method. (See page 49) * PS/2 is a registered trademark of IBM corporation. 7 . W eekly timer/ po wer on start function The times for po wer on/off and f or video playback of a disc can be set for each day within one week or within one da y . Combined with the barcode/command stack, program pla ybac k is also possible. This pla yer is limited to a maximum of 24 setting at one time. (See page 50, 58)
7 En Basic Operations Contents Remote Contr ol Operations ................................................................ 16 Pla ying D VDs, CDs, and Video CDs. ................................................... 16 Chapter (T rack) skip f orward/skip bac k ............................................. 18 Stopping playbac k and switching power off ..................................... 18 Searching f or a desired scene (SEARCH) .......................................... 19 Still frame/Frame adv ance/Frame re verse ......................................... 20 Slow motion Pla y .................................................................................. 21 Repeat Play ........................................................................................... 21 Pr ogram Pla y ........................................................................................ 22 Viewing disc inf ormation ..................................................................... 24 Switching the Angle of the Ima ge (Multi-Angle) ................................ 26 Switching the Subtitles during Pla yback ........................................... 26 Switching the A udio during Pla yback ................................................ 27 Switching the stereo/left/right A udio .................................................. 27 Index of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) ....................................... 28 Operating the Initial Setup Menu ........................................................ 29 Selecting the aspect ratio .................................................................... 29 Changing visual setting ....................................................................... 31 Setting the Language ........................................................................... 33 Setting viewing and listening restrictions (P arental Lock) .............. 37 Making the ordinary settings .............................................................. 39 Setting the Digital Output .................................................................... 40 Setting to Optimize the Audio Quality ................................................ 42 Returning to the default settings at the time of shipment ................ 44 Language code list ............................................................................... 44 Adv anced Feature Operations ............................................................ 45 AD V . SETUP MENU settings ................................................................ 47 Pla yer control using a mouse ............................................................. 49 W eekly timer function operation/displa y ........................................... 50 P ower on start function ....................................................................... 57 Barcode/Command stac k function ..................................................... 59 Barcode/Command stac k setting ....................................................... 60 Gr ouping some Barcode/Command Stac ks ...................................... 67 Using a Bar code/Command Stac ks .................................................... 74 Character Input/Output drawing (D VD video blac kboard) ................ 76 Gr ouping video blac kboar ds ............................................................... 80 Video text retrie val ............................................................................... 82 External synchr onizing function ......................................................... 82 How to displa y total hours pla yed and power on time ..................... 83 Connecting the pla yer .......................................................................... 83 Using a Laser Barcode Scanner (Sold Separatel y) ........................... 89 T roub leshooting ................................................................................... 90 T erms ..................................................................................................... 91 Specifications ....................................................................................... 92 Basic Operations Ad v anced Operations Basic Operations Ad v anced Operations Settings Advanced Operations Connection/etc.
8 En Copyright ÷ Unauthorized pub lic preference , broadcasting, or copying is a violation of applicab le laws. ÷ This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected b y method claims of cer tain U .S. patents and other intellectual proper ty rights owned by Macro vision Corporation and other r ights o wners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized b y Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited vie w- ing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macro vision Corporation. Rev erse engineer ing or disassembly is prohib- ited. Handling the discs 7 Handling ÷ Ne ver pla y clacked, scratchesd or w ar ped disc. This ma y damage the pla yer or cause it to malfunction. ÷ Do not damage or dirty the signal surface of the disc. ÷ Do not affix paper and seals to the disc. ÷ T oo much glue will cause a malfunction. Many rental discs, par ticu- larly , hav e labels affix ed to them, and use the disc after confirming that there is no glue. 7 Stac king ÷ Store the discs carefully . If y ou store discs at an angle, or stack ed on top of each other , discs may become warped even when in their jack ets. ÷ Read the operating instructions included in discs . 7 Cleaning ÷ Fingerprints or other dirt on the disc may affect sound and pic- ture quality . T o remove dirt or finger prints, wipe gently from the inside towar d the outer edges. (Do not wipe in a circular direc- tion.) ÷ Discs must not be cleaned with record cleaning spr ays , or static pre- vention spra ys, etc. Also do not use v olatile liquids such as benzine, or thinner , etc. ÷ T o clean your discs, use a soft clean cloth to wipe them. If necessary , moisten a soft cloth with diluted neutral detergent to remo ve hea vy dir t or finger prints. 7 Discs with special shapes Discs with special shapes (heart shaped discs, hexagonal discs, etc.) cannot be pla yed on this set. Attempting to do so ma y damage the set. Do not use such discs. Lens c leaning The pla yerâ s pickup lens should not become dir ty in nor mal use but if for some reason it should malfunction due to soiling, contact your near- est PIONEER authorized service centre. Lens cleaners are commer- cially available but special care should be exercised in their use since some may cause damage to the lens. Condensation Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly . When this happens, pla yerâ s performance will be impaired. T o prev ent this, let the play er stand in its new surroundings f or about an hour before s witching it on, or make sure that the room temperature rises gradually . Condensation may also f or m during the summer if the play er is ex- posed to the breeze from an air conditioner . In such cases , change the location of the pla yer . Installation ÷ Install the player in a level and stable location. Do not use in shaky , unstab le locations, or locations e xposed to much vibration. ÷ Do not impair the pla yerâ s cooling functions. Av oid placing on long- pile carpets, etc.. Also do not wrap or cov er with towels or cloths when in use. Such cov erings can impede the playerâ s cooling func- tion and result in internal damage. ÷ Do not place objects on top of the pla yer . ÷ Install in a location which is not e xposed to heat sources. Av oid in- stalling the play er abov e an amplifier or other heat-emitting compo- nent. If installing the play er in a component rack, select a rac k with good ventilation, located well belo w the amplifier . ÷ If the pla yer is installed in a rac k, care must be taken to av oid inter nal temperature buildup . P osition it so that the v entilation openings in the top and bottom of the pla yer are not obstructed. As a rule, install so that there is no heat from below and lea v e a gap of 10 cm or more at the left and right and abov e so that air can flow around the device b y natural convection at a room temper ature of 35 ð C or less. If installation is necessary in any other circumstances, ensure that the air temperature at a point 5 cm above the center of the play er in a sufficiently warmed up state is no higher than 35 ð C. When necessary , use forced air cooling. ÷ When multiple pla yers are connected in parallel, a high surge cur- rent will be impressed on the units when e xter nal power is first turned on. Please consult your Pioneer dealer regarding ratings f or the power s witch to be used. ÷ Do not install the pla yer in a closed rack. An inter nal temperature builts up and results in internal damage. Operating En vironment Operating en vironment temperature and humidity: 5ðC - 35ðC ; less than 85% RH (cooling vents not blocked) 7 Do Not Install in the Follo wing Locations: ÷ Locations e xposed to direct sunlight or strong ar tificial light ÷ Locations e xposed to dust or smoke ÷ Locations subject to vibration ÷ Locations subject to strong electro-magnetic fields . ÷ Near sources of heat. ÷ Locations e xposed to high lev els of electronic noise ÷ Locations subject to electrostatic noise ÷ Locations e xposed to high humidity , or poorly ventilated locations ÷ A closed rack Mo ving the Play er When transporting this player to a new location, be sure to use the packaging provided and a void subjecting the pla yer to vibration, shock, or dropping. During transpor t, protect the pla yer from e xposure to heat or water . Before pac kaging the pla yer , remove any disc loaded, since mo ving the pla yer with a loaded discs ma y cause damage to the disc or play- erâ s internal par ts. Precaution regar ding use Special Precautions! Never attempt to move the player while a disc is playing. Discs rotate at very high speeds during play , and lifting or moving the player at such times could cause damage to the disc. Also, subjecting the pla yer to strong impact or vibration when a disc is loaded ma y cause damage to disc or pla yer . Be sure the player is stopped and no disc is loaded before moving the pla y er . Also be sure that no disc is loaded when lifting the pla yer . This component is built using precision optical parts. Be sure to take care to control temper ature and dust inside the room where this pla yer is installed.
9 Fr Installation ÷ Installez le lecteur sur une surf ace horizontale et stable . Ne le placez pas sur une surf ace branlante, instab le ou dans un endroit e xposé àtrop de vibrations . ÷ Ne gênez pas le refroidissement du lecteur . Evitez de le placer sur une moquette épaisse, etc. Ne lâÂÂenv eloppez ni le couvrez de ser vi- ettes ou de vêtements pendant quâÂÂil f onctionne. Cela pourrait nuire aux fonctions de refroidissement du lecteur et lâÂÂendommager internement. ÷ Ne placez pas dâÂÂobjet sur le lecteur . ÷ Installez-le dans un endroit qui nâÂÂest pas e xposé àune source de chaleur . Evitez de lâÂÂinstaller au-dessus dâÂÂun amplificateur ou dâÂÂun autre appareil générant de la chaleur . Si vous lâÂÂinstallez dans un meuble , sélectionnez un emplacement a y ant une bonne v entilation, situé bien au-dessous de lâÂÂamplificateur . ÷ Si le lecteur est installé dans un meuble , il f aut prendre des précautions pour éviter une montée de la température interne. P ositionnez-le de sor te que les or ifices de ventilation sur les panneaux inférieur et supérieur du lecteur ne soient pas obstr ués. En règle générale, installez le lecteur de sorte quâÂÂil nâÂÂy ait pas de chaleur depuis le bas et laissez un espace dâÂÂau moins 10 cm sur la gauche, la droite et au-dessus afin que lâÂÂair puisse circuler autour de lâÂÂappareil par conv ection naturelle àune température ambiante de 35 ðC ou moins. SâÂÂil est nécessaire dâÂÂeffectuer lâÂÂinstallation dans dâÂÂautres conditions, assurez-v ous que la température àun point se trouvant 5 cm au-dessus du centre du lecteur , lorsque celui-ci est en état de préchauff age suffisant, ne dépasse pas 35 ðC. Si nécessaire, utilisez une v entilation forcée. ÷ Lorsque plusieurs lecteurs sont raccordés en par allèle, un courant de pointe élevé ser a sor ti aux appareils lorsque la tension externe est tout dâÂÂabord appliquée. Consultez votre distributeur Pioneer pour les caractéristiques nominales de lâÂÂinterrupteur dâÂÂalimentation àutiliser . ÷ NâÂÂinstallez pas le lecteur dans un meub le fermé. Cela provoquerait des dommages internes lorsque la température inter ne sâÂÂélèv e. Ambiance de fonctionnement T empérature et humidité de lâÂÂambiance de f onctionnement : 5 ðC - 35 ðC ; moins de 85% dâÂÂhumidité relative (orifices de refroidissement non obstrués) 7 N â effectuez pas l â installation dans les emplacements suiv ants: ÷ Endroits e xposés aux ray ons directs du soleil ou àune forte lumière ar tificielle ÷ Endroits e xposés àde la poussière ou fumée ÷ Endroits soumis àdes vibrations ÷ Endroits soumis àde f or ts champs électromagnétiques ÷ Près de sources de chaleur ÷ Endroits e xposés àde hauts niv eaux de parasites électroniques ÷ Endroits soumis àdes par asites électrostatiques ÷ Endroits e xposés àune f or te humidité ou mal aérés ÷ Un meuble fermé D é placement du lecteur P our transporter le lecteur, utilisez toujours lâÂÂemballage f our ni et évitez de soumettre le lecteur àdes vibrations, des chocs ou de le laisser tomber . P endant le transpor t, protégez le lecteur pour ne pas lâÂÂexposer àla chaleur ou àlâÂÂeau. A vant dâÂÂemballer le lecteur , retirez tout disque chargé car un déplacement du lecteur lorsquâÂÂun disque est chargé peut endommager le disque ou les pièces internes du lecteur. Dr oits d â auteur ÷ La présentation pub lique, la diffusion ou la copie non autorisées sont une violation des lois applicables . ÷ Ce produit incorpore une technologie àprotection de droits dâÂÂauteur qui est protégée par des titres de méthode de certains brevets américains et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle détenus par Macrovision Corporation et dâÂÂautres a yant droits . L âÂÂutilisation de cette technologie àprotection de droits dâÂÂauteur doit être autorisée par Macrovision Corporation et elle nâÂÂest destinée quâÂÂàdes utilisations privées et autres visionnements limités sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L âÂÂingénierie àrebours ou le désassemblage est interdit. Manipulation des disques 7 Manipulation ÷ NâÂÂutilisez jamais un disque fêlé, ra yé ou déformé. Cela pourrait endommager le lecteur ou pro voquer un f onctionnement défectueux. ÷ NâÂÂendommagez ni ne salissez la surf ace de signal du disque. ÷ NâÂÂapposez pas de papier et dâÂÂautocollant sur un disque . ÷ T rop de colle peut provoquer un f onctionnement défectueux. De nombreux disques de location, en particulier, portent des étiquettes nâÂÂutilisez ces disques quâÂÂaprès av oir vér ifié quâÂÂil nâÂÂy a pas de colle. 7 Empilage ÷ Rangez les disques a vec soin. ÃÂvitez que les disques ne demeurent inclinés ou ne soient empilés, ce qui peut les v oiler, même lorsquâÂÂils sont dans leur coffret. ÷ Lisez les instructions dâÂÂutilisation f our nies av ec les disques. 7 Nettoy age ÷ Les empreintes digitales et les tac hes que peut porter la sur- face du disque peuvent, selon leur importance, Pour enle ver la salet é ou les traces de doigts, essuyez doucement de l âÂÂint érieur vers le bor d ext é rieur . (N âÂÂessuy ez pas dans le sens cir culaire). ÷ NâÂÂutilisez aucun produit de netto yage pour les microsillons . P areillement, ne tentez pas de nettoyer un disque a vec de lâÂÂessence, du diluant pour peinture ou tout autre solv ant volatil. ÷ P our nettoyer un disque , essuyez-le au moyen dâÂÂun chiff on doux. Si le disque est très sale , humectez dâÂÂeau un chiffon et, après lâÂÂav oir bien essoré, éliminez les taches en procédant a vec soin et sans frotter . 7 Disques de f orme sp é ciale Les disques de f orme spéciale (disques en forme de cà Âur, disques he xagonaux, etc.) ne peuvent pas être lus sur cet appareil. NâÂÂessa yez pas dâÂÂutiliser de tels disques car ils pourraient endommager lâÂÂappareil. Netto ya ge de la lentille En principe, il nâÂÂy a aucune raison pour que lâÂÂoptique du capteur se salisse; toutefois, si cela devait se produire et entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement, consultez le centre dâÂÂentretien PIONEER. Des produits et des dispositifs de nettoyage de lâÂÂoptique sont vendus dans le commerce, mais nous ne saurions trop vous conseiller dâÂÂêtre pru- dent dans leur usage car certains peuvent faire plus de mal que de bien. Condensation La vapeur dâÂÂeau peut se condenser àlâÂÂintérieur des parties nobles de lâÂÂappareil si vous le transporter dâÂÂune pièce froide vers une pièce chaude, ou encore si la température de la pièce dans laquelle il se trouve augmente rapidement. La condensation de lâÂÂhumidité a pour eff et dâÂÂaltérer les performances de lâÂÂappareil. P our lâÂÂéviter, conserv ez lâÂÂappareil dans son nouvel environnement pen- dant au moins une heure avant de le mettre sous tension, ou bien veillez àce que la température nâÂÂaugmente que progressivement. L âÂÂété, lâÂÂhumidité peut également se condenser si lâÂÂappareil est placé dans le courant dâÂÂair fr ais dâÂÂun climatiseur . En ce cas , changez la place de lâÂÂappareil. Pr é cautions sp é ciales ! NâÂÂessay ez jamais de déplacer le lecteur pendant quâÂÂun disque est en cours de lecture. Les disques tour nent àtrès grande vitesse pendant la lecture et v ous pouvez endommager le disque si v ous soule vez ou déplacez le lecteur àce moment-là. Un choc impor- tant ou des vibrations pendant quâÂÂun disque est chargé peuv ent également endommager le disque ou le lecteur . Vérifiez toujours que le lecteur est arrêté et quâÂÂaucun disque nâÂÂest chargé av ant de déplacer le lecteur . Assurez-vous aussi quâÂÂaucun disque nâÂÂest chargé av ant de soulev er le lecteur . Cet appareil incorpore des pièces optiques de précision. Contrôlez la température et la poussière àlâÂÂintérieur de la pièce où ce lecteur est installé. Fran çais Précautions àprendre concernant lâÂÂutilisation
10 Ge Hinweise zum Urheber schutz ÷ Eine öff entliche V erbreitung oder ÃÂber tragung sowie das K opieren von urhebergeschütztem Material ohne schriftliche Genehmigung des Inhabers der Urheberrechte ist strafbar . ÷ Dieses Produkt ist mit einer Urheberschutz-V orrichtung ausgestattet, deren T echnologie durch US-P atente und geistige Eigentumsrechte im Besitz von Macro vision Cor poration und anderen Inhabern v on Urheberrechten geschützt ist. Der Gebrauch dieser Urheberschutz- V orrichtung muss durch Macrovision Corporation genehmigt werden und ist ausschlieÃÂlich für die private Nutzung v orgesehen, sofern dem Benutzer k eine w eitergehende Genehmigung von Macro vision Cor poration erteilt worden ist. Untersuchungen dieses Gerätes zum Zweck eines unbefugten Nachbaus so wie Zerlegen sind untersagt. Hinweise zum Umgang mit Discs 7 Handhab ung ÷ A uf keinen F all eine gespr ungene, zerkratzte oder verw ellte Disc in diesem Pla yer abspielen. Derar tige Discs können den Play er beschädigen oder Funktionsstörungen verursachen. ÷ Die Abspielfläche der Disc nicht beschädigen oder Schmutz aussetzen. ÷ K eine Etiketten oder A ufkleber an der Disc befestigen. ÷ Bei V erwendung von Leih-Discs, an denen A ufkleber mit zuviel Klebstoff angebracht worden sind, können Funktionsstörungen auftreten. V or dem Abspielen einer der ar tigen Disc sicherstellen, dass kein Klebstoff unterhalb des A ufklebers ausgetreten ist. 7 A ufbewahrung ÷ Beim A ufbew ahren der Discs vorsichtig v orgehen. W enn die Discs schräg positionier t sind oder gestapelt werden, können sich die Discs verziehen, selbst w enn sie sich in der Hülle befinden. ÷ Die Anweisungen in der Begleitliter atur von Discs bef olgen. 7 Reinigung ÷ Fingerabdr ü cke und andere V erschmutzung auf der Disc kann die Bild- und T onqualit ät nac hteilig beeinflussen.Zum Entfernen von Schm utzflecken und Fingerabdr ü cken die Disc mit einem weichen, troc ken T uch sacht abreiben, das von der Mitte gerade nach au àen gef ührt wird. (Das T uch nicht in einer kreisf ö rmigen Bewegung ü ber die Oberfl ä c he der Disc f ü hren.) ÷ V erwenden Sie k eine Plattenreinigungs-Sprays oder Antistatik-Mittel an diesen Discs. Achten auch darauf, daàflüchtige Chemikalien, wie Benzol, V erdünner usw ., nicht auf die Disc gelangen. ÷ Zur Reinigung einen weichen, troc kenen Lappen v erw enden. W enn erf order lich, kann der Lappen leicht mit neutralem Haushaltsreiniger angef euchtet werden, um starke V erschmutzung zu entf er nen. 7 Nicht normgerechte Discs Mit diesem Play er können keine anderen als kreisförmige Discs (herzför mige, achtec kige Discs usw .) abgespielt werden. Wird versucht, eine nicht kreisförmige Disc abzuspielen, kann der Pla yer dadurch beschädigt werden. AusschlieÃÂlich normgerechte Discs verw enden. Reinigen der Abtasterlinse Eine Reinigung der Pickup-Linse des Geräts dürfte bei normaler V erwendung nicht erf orderlich werden. Sollte aber durch V erschmutzung eine Funktionsstörung auftreten, ziehen Sie eine PIO- NEER-Kundendienstwerkstatt zu Rate. Linsen-Reinigungsmittel sind zwar im Fachhandel erhältlich, doch kann eine unsachgemäÃÂe Anwendung eine Beschädigung der Linse zur Folge haben. K ondensatbildung Wenn das Gerät v on einem kalten Or t in einen war men Raum gebracht wird, oder wenn die T emperatur im Raum innerhalb kurzer Zeit stark ansteigt, kann sich im Betriebsbereich des CD-Spielers Feuchtigk eit abschlagen. In diesem Fall ist ein einw andfreier Betrieb unter Umständen nicht mehr möglich. Um dies zu verhindern, muàdas Gerät in der neuen Umgeb ung vor dem Einschalten etwa eine Stunde stehengelassen werden, oder dar auf achten, daàdie Raumtemperatur nach und nach erhöht wird. K ondensationsbildung kann auch im Sommer auftreten, wenn das Gerät der Kühlluft einer Klimaanlage ausgesetzt ist. In diesem F all muàein anderer A ufstellor t für das Gerät gewählt werden. A ufstellung ÷ Den Pla yer auf einer w aagerechten, stabilen Unterlage aufstellen. Den Play er nicht auf einer schrägen oder unstabilen Unterlage oder an einem Or t aufstellen, der starken mechanischen Schwingungen ausgesetzt ist. ÷ Die Kühlv orrichtungen des Players nicht behindern, z.B. durch Aufstellung auf einem langf asr igen T eppich us w . Den Player beim Betrieb nicht mit einem Handtuch oder einer Decke umwic k eln oder abdeck en. Durch eine derar tige Abdeckung kann die Wärmeabfuhr bloc kiert und eine Beschädigung des Players v er ursacht werden. ÷ K einerlei Gegenstände auf den Play er stellen. ÷ Den Pla yer an einem Or t aufstellen, an dem er keinen Wär mequellen ausgesetzt ist. Eine Aufstellung des Play ers auf einem V erstär ker oder anderen Wärme abgebenden Gerätes vermeiden. Bei Einbau des Play ers in einem HiFi-Schrank ein Regal mit guter Belüftung und möglichst weit unterhalb des V erstär kers aus wählen. ÷ W enn der Play er in einem HiFi-Schrank aufgestellt wird, muss für ausreichende Wärmeabfuhr gesorgt werden. Den Play er so plazieren, dass die Entlüftungsschlitze an der Ober- und Unterseite des Gerätes nicht bloc kier t sind. Dabei darf keine Wärme von oben auf den Play er abgestrahlt werden, und es muss ein F reiraum von mindestens 10 cm über und an beiden Seiten des Play ers eingehalten werden, damit bei einer Zimmer temperatur von weniger als 35 ðC ein natür licher Luftkonv ektionsstrom im Umfeld des Gerätes gewährleistet ist. F alls eine Aufstellung unter anderen Bedingungen unv er meidbar ist, sicherstellen, dass die Lufttemper atur in einem Abstand von 5 cm über der Mitte des betr iebs warmen Players 35 ðC nicht überschreitet. Gegebenenfalls muss eine Zwangskühlung vorgesehen werden. ÷ W enn mehrere Play er parallel angeschlossen sind, werden die Geräte beim erstmaligen Einschalten der e xter nen Stromversorgung einem hohen Stromstoàausgesetzt. Bitte den Pioneer-F achhändler zu den minimalen K ennwerten des zu verwendenden Stromschalters k onsultieren. ÷ Den Pla yer nicht in einem durch Türen verschlossenen HiFi-Schrank aufstellen. Anderenf alls kann es zu einem Wärmestau und somit zu einer Beschädigung von Bauteilen im Geräteinneren k ommen. Betriebsumgebung Betriebstemperatur und -luftfeuchtigk eit: 5 ðC bis 35 ðC , weniger als 85 % rel. Feuchte (Entlüftungsschlitze dürf en nicht bloc kier t werden.) 7 Eine Aufstellung an den folgenden Orten vermeiden: ÷ Orte, die direkter Sonneneinstrahlung oder starkem K unstlicht ausgesetzt sind ÷ Orte, die einer hohen Staubkonzentration oder Rauch ausgesetzt sind ÷ Orte, an denen mechanische Schwingungen auftreten ÷ Orte, die star ken elektromagnetischen F elder n ausgesetzt sind ÷ In der Nähe v on Wärmequellen ÷ Orte, die starken elektronischen Rauscheinstreuungen ausgesetzt sind ÷ Orte, an denen elektrostatisches Rauschen auftritt ÷ Orte, an denen eine hohe Luftfeuchtigk eit herrscht, sowie unzureichend belüftete Orte ÷ In einem geschlossenen HiFi-Schrank T ranspor t des Player s Den Pla yer zum T ranspor t an einen anderen Or t unbedingt wieder in seinem Original-V er packungskarton verpacken. Den Play er vor starken Erschütterungen und StöÃÂen schützen und beim T ransport nicht fallen lassen. Während des T ransports den Player v or Hitze und W asser schützen. V or dem V er pack en des Play ers darauf achten, eine e vtl. eingelegte Disc zu entf er nen. Wird der Pla yer mit eingelegter Disc transportier t, kann dies eine Beschädigung von Disc und Bauteilen im Geräteinneren v er ursachen. V or sichtshinweise zum Gebrauc h Zur besonderen Beachtung! Den Play er auf keinen F all bewegen, während eine Disc abgespielt wird. Da die Disc mit hoher Drehzahl im Geräteinneren rotiert, kann sie durch Anheben oder T ransportieren des Players an einen anderen Ort beschädigt werden. Wird der Play er star ken StöÃÂen oder Erschütterungen ausgesetzt, während eine Disc eingelegt ist, können Disc und Pla yer dadurch beschädigt werden. V or einem T ransport des Players sicherstellen, dass der Pla yer auf Stopp geschaltet und keine Disc eingelegt ist. Auch v or einem Anheben des Play ers nachprüf en, dass k eine Disc eingelegt ist. Bei diesem Gerät finden optische Bauteile Anwendung, die mit höchster Präzision gefertigt wurden. Daher unbedingt darauf achten, dass die Umgebungstemperatur den zulässigen Bereich nicht überschreitet und k eine hohe Staubkonzentr ation am Aufstellungsort vorliegt. Deutsch
11 It Installazione ÷ Installare il lettore in una posizione orizzontale e stabile . Non usarlo in posizioni traballanti e instabili o in posizioni soggette a molta vibrazione. ÷ Non danneggiare le funzioni di raffreddamento del lettore . Evitare di collocarlo su unâÂÂalta pila di tappeti, ecc. Inoltre non avvolgere o coprire con asciugamani o panni durante lâÂÂuso . T ali coper ture possono ostacolare le funzioni di raffreddamento del lettore e pro vocare danni interni. ÷ Non mettere oggetti sopra al lettore . ÷ Installare in una posizione che non è esposta a f onti di calore. Evitare di installare il lettore sopra ad un amplificatore o un altro componente che emette calore. Se si installa il lettore in uno scaffale per componenti, selezionare uno scaff ale con buona ventilazione e collocarlo molto sotto allâÂÂamplificatore. ÷ Se il lettore viene installato in uno scaff ale, prestare attenzione al fine di e vitare lâÂÂaumento della temperatura interna. P osizionar lo in modo che le aper ture di ventilazione sulla parte superiore e sul fondo del lettore non siano ostruite. Come regola, installare in modo che non ci sia calore da sotto e lasciare una distanza di 10 cm o più a sinistra e a destra e sopr a perché lâÂÂaria possa circolare intor no al dispositivo per con vezione naturale ad una temperatur a ambiente di 35 ð C o meno. Se lâÂÂinstallazione è necessaria in qualsiasi altra circostanza, assicurarsi che la temperatura dellâÂÂaria ad un punto pari a 5 cm sopra al centro del lettore in una condizione di sufficiente riscaldamento non sia superiore a 35 ð C. Quando è necessar io, usare il r affreddamento forzato dellâÂÂaria. ÷ Quando più lettori sono collegati in parallelo , una elevata sovracorrente momentanea viene applicata alle unitàquando si attiv a lâÂÂalimentazione esterna la pr ima volta. Consultare il rivenditore Pio- neer riguardo i dati nominali per lâÂÂinterruttore di alimentazione da usarsi. ÷ Non installare il lettore in uno scaff ale chiuso. La temperatura interna aumenta e prov oca danni interni. Ambiente operativ o T emperatura e umiditàdellâÂÂambiente oper ativo: 5 ð C- 35 ð C; inf eriore allâÂÂ85% di umiditàrelativa (aperture di raffreddamento non bloccate) 7 Non installare nei seguenti luoghi: ÷ Luoghi esposti alla luce diretta del sole o a f or te luce ar tificiale ÷ Luoghi esposti alla polv ere o al fumo ÷ Luoghi soggetti a vibrazione ÷ Luoghi soggetti a f or ti campi elettromagnetici ÷ Vicino a f onti di calore ÷ Luoghi esposti ad alti liv elli di r umore elettronico ÷ Luoghi soggetti al rumore elettrostatico ÷ Luoghi esposti ad ele vata umiditào luoghi scarsamente v entilati ÷ Uno scaff ale chiuso Spostamento del lettore Quando si trasporta il lettore in una posizione nuova, assicur arsi di usare lâÂÂimballaggio in dotazione ed e vitare di sottoporre il lettore a vibrazioni, urti o cadute. Durante il trasporto, proteggere il lettore dallâÂÂesposizione al calore o allâÂÂacqua. Prima di imballare il lettore, togliere qualsiasi disco caricato , poiché spostando il lettore con un disco caricato si possono causare danni al disco o alle par ti inter ne del lettore. Diritti d â autore ÷ La tr asmissione o la copiatura non autorizzata di materiale pubb lico di propria preferenza è una violazione delle leggi applicabili. ÷ Questo prodotto incorpora la tecnologia di protezione dei diritti dâÂÂautore che è protetta dai reclami tecnici di cer ti brev etti statunitensi e altri diritti di proprietàintellettuale in possesso della Macrovision Corporation e altri possessori dei dir itti. L âÂÂuso di questa tecnologia di protezione dei diritti dâÂÂautore de ve essere autorizzata dalla Macrovision Corporation ed è destinata allâÂÂuso domestico e di altre visioni limitate salv o autorizzazione contraria della Macrovision Corporation. àvietato eseguire le operazioni in verse e lo smontaggio . Modo di maneggiare i disc hi 7 Modo di maneggiare ÷ Non eseguire mai la lettura di un disco crepato , graffiato o def ormato. Ciò può danneggiare il lettore o causare un malfunzionamento . ÷ Non danneggiare o sporcare la superficie del disco con i segnali. ÷ Non attaccare la carta e gli adesivi al disco. ÷ T roppa colla causa un malfunzionamento. Molti dischi a noleggio , in par ticolare, hanno le etichette attaccate e quindi usare il disco dopo av er confermato che non ci sia la colla. 7 Accatastamento ÷ Conservare i dischi con la do vuta cura. Se vengono conservati ad una certa angolazione o uno sopra lâÂÂaltro, possono def or marsi perfino se contenuti nelle loro custodie . ÷ Leggere le istruzioni per lâÂÂuso incluse nei dischi. 7 Pulizia ÷ Le impr onte digitali e lo sporco sul disco possono influenzare la qualit àdel suono e delle immagini. Per togliere lo sporco o le impr onte digitali, strofinare delicatamente dall âÂÂinterno verso i bor di esterni. (Non str ofinare in direzione circolare.) ÷ I dischi non de v ono venire puliti con spra y per la pulizia di dischi o antistatici. Non usare neppure liquidi volatili come benzina e diluente . ÷ P er pulire i propri dischi, usare un panno soffice e pulito. Se necessario , inumidirlo con detergente neutro diluito con acqua e togliere sporco tenace. 7 Dischi con forme speciali I dischi con f orme speciali (dischi a forma di cuore, dischi esagonali, ecc.) non possono essere letti con questo apparecchio . Se si tenta di leggerli si può danneggiare lâÂÂapparecchio . Non usare tali dischi. Pulizia della lente La lente della testina di lettura del lettore non dovrebbe sporcarsi, ma se per qualche ragione non dovesse funzionare bene a causa di sporco accumulatosi su di essa, entrare in contatto col più vicino centro assistenza PIONEER. I pulitori per lenti sono in vendita, ma devono venire usati con particolare cura, dato che possono danneggiare la lente. Condensa Se il lettore viene portato improvvisamente da una stanza ad una fredda o se la temperatur a ambiente sale velocemente, al suo interno si possono formare gocce di condensa. Se ciò accade, il lettore non può funzionare bene. P er evitare che ciò accada, lasciare che il lettore riposi per circa unâÂÂora prima di tentare di usarlo o far salire la temperatura ambiente in modo graduale . La condensa si può f ormare anche se durante lâÂÂestate il lettore viene esposto ad aria fresca prodotta da un climatizzatore. In tali casi, spostare il lettore. Precauzioni riguar do l â uso Precauzioni speciali! Non tentare mai di spostare il lettore mentre un disco è in corso di lettura. I dischi ruotano a velocitàmolto alta durante la lettura e se si sollev a o si sposta il lettore in quel momento si possono causare danni al disco . Inoltre, se si sottopone il lettore a forti ur ti o vibrazioni quando un disco è caricato si possono causare danni al disco o al lettore. Assicurarsi che il lettore sia in modo di arresto e nessun disco sia caricato prima di spostare il lettore. Assicurarsi anche che nessun disco sia caricato quando si sollev a il lettore. Questo componente è costruito usando par ti ottiche di precisione. Assicurarsi di f are attenzione a controllare la temperatura e la polv ere allâÂÂinter no della stanza in cui il lettore viene installato. Italiano
12 Sp Instalaci ó n ÷ Instale el reproductor en un lugar niv elado y estable . No lo utilice en lugares poco firmes o inestables, ni en lugares expuestos a una vibr ación excesiv a. ÷ No altere las funciones de refrigeración del reproductor . Evite colocarlo encima de alfombras de pelo largo , etc. Y no lo envuelva ni cubra con toallas o paños cuando lo utilice. Si lo cubre con tales cosas se anulará la función de refrigeración del reproductor y se producirán daños en su interior . ÷ No ponga objetos encima del reproductor . ÷ Instálelo en una posición que no esté e xpuesta a fuentes de calor . Evite instalar el reproductor encima de un amplificador u otro componente que emita calor . Si instala el reproductor en un estante de componentes, seleccione uno que esté bien v entilado y coloque el reproductor muy por debajo del amplificador . ÷ Si el reproductor se instala en un estante deberá e vitarse la acumulación interna de calor . Póngalo de forma que las aber turas de ventilación de la parte superior e inferior del reproductor no estén tapadas. P or regla general, instálelo en un lugar a donde no llegue calor procedente de la parte inferior, y deje un espacio libre de 10 cm o más por los costados derecho e izquierdo y por la par te superior , para que el aire pueda circular alrededor del aparato mediante conv ección natural a una temperatura de la sala de 35 ð C o menos. Si resulta necesario hacer la instalación bajo otras circunstancias, asegúrese de que la temperatura del aire a un punto ubicado a 5 cm por encima del centro del reproductor , estando éste calentado lo suficiente, no sea superior a 35 ð C. Cuando sea necesar io , utilice refrigeración de aire f orzada. ÷ Cuando se conecten en paralelo múltiples reproductores , al conectar por primera vez la alimentación e xter na se aplicará a las unidades una corriente inicial alta. Consulte a su concesionario Pioneer en cuanto a los valores nominales par a la conmutación de la alimentación que se v ay a a utilizar . ÷ No instale el reproductor en un estante cerrado . El calor se acumula en el interior del aparato y se producen daños internos. Ambiente de funcionamiento T emperatura y humedad del ambiente de funcionamiento: 5 ð C- 35ð C; menos del 85% de humedad relativa (orificios de ventilación sin b loquear) 7 No instale el aparato en los lugares siguientes: ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a la luz solar directa o a una luz ar tificial intensa. ÷ Lugares e xpuestos al polvo o al humo. ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a la vibración. ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a campos electromagnéticos intensos. ÷ Cerca de fuentes de calor . ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a altos niveles de ruido electrónico. ÷ Lugares expuestos a ruido electrostático. ÷ Lugares expuestos a una humedad alta o mal ventilados. ÷ Un estante cerrado. T raslado del reproductor Cuando transporte este reproductor a un nuev o lugar , asegúrese de utilizar el embalaje suministrado y e vitar someter lo a vibraciones, golpes o caÃÂdas. Dur ante el transpor te, proteja el reproductor contra el calor y el agua. Antes de embalar el reproductor , retire el disco cargado, y a que mover el reproductor con un disco cargado puede estropear el disco y las par tes internas del reproductor. Derechos de autor ÷ La emisión o la copia de programas sin autorización viola las le yes aplicables. ÷ Este producto incorpora tecnologÃÂa de protección de los derechos de autor que a su vez está protegida por reclamaciones de métodos de cier tas patentes de los EE.UU . y otros derechos de propiedad intelectual propiedad de Macrovision Corporation y otros propietarios de derechos. La utilización de esta tecnologÃÂa de protección de los derechos de autor debe contar con la autorización de Macrovision Cor poration, y ha sido propuesta para ser utilizada en el hogar y en otros locales de visión limitada a menos que Macrovision Corpora- tion autorice lo contrario. La inv ersión de ingenierÃÂa o el desmontaje están prohibidos. Manejo de los discos 7 Manejo ÷ Nunca reproduzca discos rajados, r a yados o def or mados. ÃÂstos pueden estropear el reproductor o hacer que funcione mal. ÷ No estropee ni ensucie la superficie de las señales de los discos . ÷ No ponga papel ni pegatinas en los discos . ÷ El e xceso de cola causará problemas en el funcionamiento . Muchos discos de alquiler , en par ticular , tienen pegadas etiquetas, asàque utilÃÂcelos después de confirmar que no tengan cola. 7 Instalaci ón en pila ÷ Siga las instrucciones suministradas con los discos. ÷ Guarde los discos cuidadosamente. Si los guarda inclinados, o apilados uno encima de otro, los discos podrán def or marse aunque estén guardados en sus cajas. 7 Limpieza ÷ Las huellas dactilares o la suciedad en los discos pueden afectar al sonido y a la calidad de la imagen.Para quitar la suciedad o las huellas dactilares, limpie suavemente desde el interior hacia el borde exterior . (No limpie los discos en sentido circular .) ÷ Los discos no deben limpiarse con aerosoles de limpieza de discos de vinilo , con aerosoles que evitan la electricidad estática, etc. No utilice tampoco lÃÂquidos volátiles tales como bencina, diluy ente , etc. ÷ P ara limpiar sus discos, utilice un paño b lando y limpio . De ser necesario, humedezca un paño b lando en detergente neutro diluido para quitar la suciedad o las huellas dactilares difÃÂciles de quitar . 7 Discos con formas especiales Los discos con formas especiales (discos en forma de corazón, dis- cos hexagonales , etc.) no pueden reproducirse en este aparato . Intentar reproducir estos discos puede estropear el aparato . No utilice tales discos. Limpieza de la lente La lente fonocaptora del reproductor no deberá ensuciarse con un uso normal, pero si por alguna razón funcionara mal porque está sucia, póngase en contacto con su centro de servicio PIONEER autorizado más cercano. En el comercio se encuentran a la venta limpiadores de lentes, pero deberá tenerse mucho cuidado al utilizarlos porque algunos podrÃÂan estropear la lente. Condensaci ó n La humedad puede formarse en la sección de funcionamiento del reproductor si éste se pasa de un lugar frÃÂo a otro caliente o si la temperatura de la sala aumenta repentinamente. Cuando pase esto, el rendimiento del reproductor se reducirá. Para impedir esto, deje el reproductor en su nuevo ambiente durante una hora aproximadamente antes de conectar su alimentación, o asegúrese de que la temperatura de la habitación aumente gradualmente. La condensación también puede formarse durante el verano si el reproductor se expone al aire frÃÂo de un acondicionador de aire. En tales casos, cambie la ubicación del reproductor . Precauciones relacionadas con la utilizaci ó n Precauciones especiales Nunca intente trasladar el reproductor mientras se reproduce un disco . Los discos gir an a alta v elocidad durante la reproducción, y lev antar o trasladar el aparato en esos casos puede estropear el disco . Además, someter el reproductor a un impacto o vibr ación fuer te estando un disco cargado puede causar daños en el disco o en el reproductor . Asegúrese de que el reproductor esté parado y no ha ya ningún disco cargado antes de trasladar el reproductor . Asegúrese también de que no hay a ningún disco cargado cuando lev ante el reproductor. Este componente ha sido construido utilizando piezas ópticas de precisión. T enga cuidado para controlar la temperatur a y el polvo en el interior de la sala donde esté instalado este reproductor. Espa ñol
13 En Diameter/Play able sides DVD VIDEO 12 cm /single sided 1 layer 2 la yer 12 cm /double sided 1 layer 2 la yer D VD VIDEO 8 cm /single sided 1 layer 2 la yer 8 cm /double sided 1 layer 2 la yer VIDEO CD 12 cm /single sided VIDEO CD single 8 cm /single sided CD 12 cm /single sided CD single 8 cm /single sided T ypes of play able discs and their marks DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD ÷ The marks shown below are found on disc labels or on disc jackets. ÷ This player can play all discs bearing the marks below with- out the read f or an adaptor . ÷ This pla yer can pla y discs recorded in either P AL or NTSC format. Use those discs which indicates âÂÂNTSCâ or âÂÂP AL â on the jack et. 7 DV D identification markings The f ollowing markings are display ed on D VD discs and pack- aging to indicate the type of video or audio recorded on that disc and the functions that can be used: 7 Disc operation methods The D VD operation method depends on the intention of the disc creator , and there are some discs that prohibit specific operations. For this reason, depending on the disc, the op- eration method diff ers and specific operations ma y not be possible . If a specific operation has been prohibited on the disc, the âÂÂDisc prohibitionâ mark is displayed on the screen of the pla yer . Fur ther more, with a disc that is capable of interac- tive oper ation in the menu and during pla ybac k, some opera- tions such as repeat and program ma y not be not possible . In this case, the âÂÂProhibition due to the pla yerâ mark is displayed on the screen. Disc prohibition mark Prohibition due to the play er mark Disc types compatib le with this unit Mark Meaning The number of the audio The number of the subtitle language The number of angles The picture aspect ratios that can be selected The region number where playback is possible This pla yer can pla y back discs which include region number â 4â and discs on which âÂÂALLâ is inscribed. ÷ Discs indicates belo w cannot pla yed on this pla yer . D VD audio , D VD-ROM, CD-R OM, D VD with regional number (see page 91) other than 2 or ALL. ÷ Do not use an 8cm adaptor . 3 16 : 9 LB 2 2 4 ALL
14 En Names and Functions 7 Remote contr ol unit * When using a wired remote control unit (sold separately: CU-V155), the reading of the names of some of the k e ys needs to be changed. Refer to the home page on bac kcov er of this operation manual f or details. STD-BY (Stand by)/ON b utton REPEA T button DISPLA Y button RPT (Repeat) A-B b utton RECALL button A UDIO button MEMOR Y button ANGLE button SUBTITLE button MENU button T OP MENU button SETUP button Number buttons (0-9, >10) ST OP button ( 7 ) PLA Y button ( 3 ) P AUSE b utton ( 8 ) STEP buttons ( e , E ) SCAN b uttons ( 1 , á ) Chapter skip/Next b utton ( â , NEXT) Chapter skip/Previous b utton ( 4 , PREV) Direction b uttons ( 5 , 3 , â , 2) ENTER b utton RETURN b utton Title/Chapter/Frame/Time Button (TITLE/CHP/FRM/TIME) Frame/Time button (FRM/TIME) SEARCH button CLEAR b utton STD-BY/ON PLAY PAUSE DISPLAY REPEAT MEMORY AUDIO SCAN STEP RECALL RPT A-B ANGLE SUBTITLE PREV NEXT SETUP ENTER RETURN SEARCH CLEAR 12 3 456 7 8 9 01 0 > TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME MENU TOP MENU FRM/TIME STOP
15 En 7 Fr ont panel 7 Rear panel SIGNAL GND Terminal This terminal is the SIGNAL GND ter minal. Under cer tain environmental conditions which create a lot of noise, the mouse, etc., ma y fail to oper ate. The SIGNAL GND terminal is provided in such a case that the ground (GND) connections are link ed among the devices used. It is not a safe grounding terminal. 1 4 á â eE ^ DOLBY D I G I T A L SCAN/SKIP DISPLAY STILL/STEP PROGRAM PLAY/PAUSE KEY LOCK PAL / NTSC STOP OPEN/CLOSE DVD PLA YER DVD-V7300D EXT CONT LEVEL MOUSE /KEY BOARD PHONES DVD / CD àSTANDBY ON MIN MAX ç INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B PR L AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND AC IN TV SYSTEM ST ANDBY Indicator P ower b utton Remote sensor Disc table DISPLA Y button Forward b utton [ áâ ] Reverse b utton [ 41 ] P AL/NTSC indicator Indicates the TV type of the current disc. Lights orange during P AL disc playback, g reen during NTSC disc playback STEP [ e , E ] button KEY LOCK indicator When this indicator is lighted, the unit cannot be operated using the front-panel controls or the remote control unit. Settings can be changed b y RS-232C. PLA Y/P A USE [ ^] button PROGRAM indicator Lights when repeat pla y , prog ram play or command stack function is operated ST OP OPEN/CLOSE button MOUSE/KEYBO ARD connector Disc illumination Lights green during D VD playbac k, orange during CD or video CD pla ybac k. External control jac k (EXT . CONT) Headphone v olume control Headphone jack DIGIT AL OUT connector Noise may result if output setting s are not correct. Set as noted in the abov e table A UDIO OUT jacks INTERF ACE CONNECT OR Video terminator switch External Sync input Component video output Video output connector (BNC) Monaural audio out connector Video output pin-connector S-Video output connector Video output selector TV system selector A C IN power cor d connecton terminal Y our amp Regular A V amp Dolby Digital com- patible amp Settings Select [Dolby Digital 3 PCM] from the SETUP MENU. (See page 40) Select [Dolby Digital] from the SETUP MENU . (See page 40)
16 En Remote Contr ol Operations Wireless Remote Operation When operating the remote control, point it at the remote sen- sor located on the pla yerâ s front panel. The remote control can be used up to 7 m from the player and within a 30ð angle each side of the sensor . ÷ Exposing the remote sensor to direct sunlight or strong light may cause f aulty operation. Wired Operation Wired operation is possible with the separ ately sold remote control. Connect the remote controlâ s supplied cord to the ex- ter nal control jack (EXT .CONT) on the playerâ s front panel. Pla ying D VDs, CDs, and Video CDs DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Press STD-BY/ON . ÷ The pla yer â s standb y indicator changes from orange (stand by) to green (pow er on). Press STOP OPEN/CLOSE ç . ÷ The disc tab le comes out. Load a disc ÷ Load a disc with the label side f acing up , using the disc table guide to align the disc. Press PLAY . ÷ The disc tab le will close and pla yback will begin. ÷ Press ^ PLAY/PAUSE on the front of the pla yer . ÷ Depending on the disc, a men u is display ed. If a menu is display ed, refer to the ne xt page. Note: ÷ D VD discs that do not have the matching region n umber that allows pla yback can not be pla yed (ref er to the â Te r m s â section on page 91). (This unit âÂÂs region n umber is â 2â .) ÷ During operation, the f ollowing mar ks may appear on the TV screen. : Appears when this player cannot perf or m the se- lected function. : Appears when the disc cannot perform the selected function. 1 4 á â eE ^ ç D O L B Y D I G I T A L SCAN/SKIP DISPLAY STILL/STEP PROGR AM PLAY/PAUSE KEY LOCK NTSC/PAL STOP OPEN/CLOSE D V D P L A Y E R D V D - V 7 3 0 0 D EXT CON T LEVEL MOUSE /KEY BOARD PHONES DVD / C D àSTAN DBY ON MIN MAX 30 ð 30 ð 7m 1 4 á â eE ^ ç D O L B Y D I G I T A L SCAN/SKIP DISPLAY STILL/STEP PROGRAM PLAY/PAUSE KEY LOCK NTSC/PAL STOP OPEN/CLOSE D V D P L A Y E R D V D - V 7 3 0 0 D EXT CONT LEVEL MOUSE /KEY BOARD PHONES DVD / CD àSTANDBY ON MIN MAX Basic Operations
17 En Basic Operations DV D . I Video CD . When the menu screen has been displa yed D VDs and Video CDs, depending on the disc, feature se- lection menus. This play er lets you choose a desired title and m usic by selecting from a men u. 7 During D VD playback Press to select the selected item and press ENTER . Example) 7 During Video CD playbac k Select with the number b uttons. ÷ When the menu screen consists of two pages or more , press PREV NEXT to turn the pages. Example) 7 T urning the menu screen display off/on The wa y to display the menu screen diff ers depending on the disc, but menu screen is returned with DVD by pressing MENU or TOP MENU during playbac k, and with Video CD , by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. ÷ Regarding operations on the menu screen, see the opera- tion method accompanying the disc. DV D . I Video CD . Returning to menu displa y during playbac k 7 During D VD playbac k Press TOP MENU . ÷ Press MENU again for a menu of title contents. ÷ Oper ate according to disc menus . 7 During Video CD playbac k Press RETURN . Pressing RETURN during PBC playback will display the menu. Because the pla yerâ s operation method and functions depend on the PBC , playbac k will diff er according to the disc. For details, please ref er to the discâÂÂs instruction man ual. Note ÷ When using a men u f or Video CD pla yback; the repeat Play and T rack/Time Search functions do not oper ate. ÷ Men u details diff er depending on the disc. Play a disc by making menu selections using , ENTER and the number b uttons. ÷ Y ou can also pla y Video CDs without calling up a menu by pressing PREV NEXT or a number b utton dur ing ST OP . For e xample, to start playback from tr ack 1, press 1 1 2 3 4 5 POP TITLE MENU JAZZ COUNTR Y R&B CLASSICAL 1 2 3 4 5 POP JAZZ COUNTR Y R&B CLASSICAL
18 En Chapter (T rac k) skip f orward/skip bac k DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Skipping f orwar d to the ne xt chapter (trac k) Press NEXT . ÷ Press to skip f orward to the ne xt chapter (track). ÷ á â on the front panel has the same function. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Skipping bac k to the previous c hapter (track) Press PREV . ÷ Press once to skip back to the start of the chapter (track) currently pla ying. ÷ Press again to skip back to the start of the previous chapter (trac k). ÷ 1 4 on the front panel has the same function. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . F ast f orward Press and hold SCAN . ÷ Release SCAN when you reach the desired location. Normal playback resumes. ÷ á â on the front panel has the same function. ÷ When the âÂÂScanâ indicator on the screen changes from flash- ing to lit, fast forward will continue even if the button is re- leased. When the desired location has been reached, press SCAN . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . F ast rever se Press and hold SCAN . ÷ Release SCAN when you reach the desired location. Normal playback resumes. ÷ 1 4 on the front panel has the same function. ÷ When the âÂÂScanâ indicator on the screen changes from flash- ing to lit, fast rewind will continue even if the button is re- leased. When the desired location has been reached, press SCAN . Stopping pla yback and s witching power off DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Press STOP . ÷ On the front panel, press STOP OPEN/CLOSE ç . ÷ Pla yback stops . Press STOP OPEN/CLOSE ç . ÷ The disc table comes out. Remove the disc. Press STD-BY/ON . ÷ The disc table goes back in, po w er s witches OFF , and the ST ANDBY indicator changes from green to orange.
19 En Basic Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Sear ching b y chapter/trac k number . 7 Using the TITLE/CHP/FRM/TIME button Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ DVD: Chapter numbers flash on screen when pressed twice. Video CD/CD: T rack n umbers flash on screen when pressed once. Select chapter/trac k n umber s directl y with the number b uttons. Example 1: T o select chapter/track number 31 Press 3 â 1 . Example 2: T o select chapter/track number 117 Press 1 â 1 â 7 . Press SEARCH . ÷ Playback of the selected chapter/track begins. ÷ Pressing NEXT or PLAY is also available except SEARCH . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Chapter/T rack direct sear ch If you press number buttons to select the chapter/track number during playback, playback starts from beginning of the chap- ter/track you selected. Example 1: T o select chapter/trac k number 3 Press 3 . Example 2: T o select chapter/track number 17. Press 10 > â 1 â 7 . Note ÷ If appears when the numbers are entered, it is not pos- sible to search. DV D . Direct search with title numbers during playback Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME during pla yback. Selecting title number s directly with the number b uttons. ÷ When selecting title number 3, press 3 . ÷ When selecting the title number 10, press 1 â 0 . Press SEARCH . ÷ Pressing PLAY is also av ailab le. DV D . Direct sear ch with the title number s in the stop mode If you press n umber buttons to select the title number in the stop mode, playback starts from beginning of the title you se- lected. T o select title number 3 Press 3 . T o select title number 10 Press 10 > â 1 â 0 . Sear ching f or a desired scene (SEARCH) Title : 3 Title : 1
20 En Sear ching f or a desired scene (SEARCH) DV D . I Video CD . Searching by time/frame number (T ime search/Frame search) Press FRM/TIME to select the frame input mode or the time input mode . ÷ With Video CD , only time search is av ailable. Select the desired time/frame number with the number b uttons. Example : T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds 2 â 1 â 4 â 3 ÷ With DVD, search cannot be performed for time/frame numbers which overlap titles. Press SEARCH . ÷ Pressing NEXT or PLAY is also av ailable except SEARCH . ÷ Pla yback star ts from the selected elapsed pla y time. ÷ For fr ame searching, the still frame mode is set at the speci- fied frame. (The accuracy in ter ms of frame may not be achiev ed exactly depending on the disc in use .) Example) Discs in which slideshow is recorded movie D VDs (24 frame). ÷ Time Search/F rame Search are not possib le with discs that do not provide pla yback time indications within a title when you press DISPLAY (see page 25). Po i n t ÷ T o cancel the Title, Chapter/T rack/Time displa y that is flash- ing, press CLEAR twice. ÷ Using a menu to select is also possible f or some titles. In this case, press MENU to displa y the menu screen and select while the display is being displa yed . Note ÷ With D VD , Time search may be impossible with certain ti- tles. In this case, the mark is display ed. ÷ When performing D VD or Video CD Time Search, playbac k may start from a slightly different time than that specified. ÷ On D VD discs, Time search is not possible during the stop mode. ÷ Search using the abov e operation is not possib le during PBC pla ybac k of Video CDs . ÷ An error may occur when a frame search is conducted us- ing several frames before or after the breaks in titles and chapters: this happens because of the way in which DVD are constructed. Still frame/ Frame ad v ance/ Frame re ver se DV D . I Video CD . Frame adv ance/Frame rever se (Playback the picture by 1 frame) Press STEP . : The picture will be advanced b y one frame each time the button is pressed. : The effect diff ers according to the following set- tings. (D VD only) REV STEP/REV PLA Y in AD V . SETUP (see page 48) is set to F rame : The picture will be re versed b y one frame each time the STEP button is pressed. VOBU*:The picture will be reversed in VOBU each time the STEP button is pressed. ÷ The picture may not be advanced/reversed by 1 frame de- pending on such disc as movie DVD (24 frame) for exam- ple. ÷ If still images appear shaky when playing back DVD stop- motion frames, see page 31 and set the Still Picture to âÂÂFieldâÂÂ. (V er tical resolution becomes half but eliminates b urriness of the picture when in the picture.) ÷ If VOBU is selected, each time the STEP is pressed, pla y- back is re versed by 0.4 seconds to 1 second. * V OBU = Video Object Unit: In D VD-VIDEO, it is the smallest unit that f or ms a stream and, at the time of playback of 1 VOBU, is from 0.4 seconds to 1 second. DV D . I Video CD . Still picture Press STEP . Note ÷ There is no sound when viewing still fr ames or when ad- vancing one fr ame at a time. ÷ P ause ma y not be possib le with cer tain discs. In this case, the mark is display ed. ÷ When you press PAUSE , pla yback is paused and bac kground color (for e xample, blue) appears on the TV screen. Frame : 0/219113 Time : 0.00 STEP STEP
21 En Basic Operations Slo w motion Pla y DV D . I Video CD . Forwar d slow pla yback Press and hold STEP during playbac k. T o chang e the speed of slow pla yback During slow pla yback, slow pla yback speed can be adjusted to any one of f our speeds by pressing STEP and STEP . Slow F ast For D VD STEP1 ( 1 / 30 ) â 1 / 16 â 1 / 8 â 1 / 4 â 1 / 2 â 1 / 1 For Video CD 1 / 16 â 1 / 8 â 1 / 4 â 1 / 2 (units: seconds) DV D . Re verse slo w pla ybac k Press and hold STEP during pla yback. T o chang e the speed of slow pla yback The action differs depending on the setting of the REV STEP/ REV PLA Y item of the AD V SETUP menu (page 48). Fast Slow For fr ame: 1 / 1 â 1 / 2 â 1 / 4 â 1 / 8 â 1 / 16 â STEP1 ( 1 / 30 ) (units: seconds) For VOBU*: Rev erse slow playbac k in VOBU units . * V OBU = Video Object Unit: In D VD-VIDEO , it is the smallest unit that f or ms a stream and, at the time of pla yback, is from 0.4 seconds to 1 sec- ond. DV D . I Video CD . T o return to normal playbac k Press PLAY . Note ÷ No sound will be heard during slow motion pla y . Repeat Pla y DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Repeat pla y of a chapter/trac k During playbac k of the chapter or track y ou wish to repeat, press REPEAT so that Repeat Chapter is displayed. ÷ With CDs and Video CDs, Repeat T rack is displa yed. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Repeat pla y of a title During pla yback of the title y ou wish to repeat, press REPEAT so that repeat Title is display ed. ÷ With D VD discs, the title contin ues playing until the end, and then pla yback star ts once more from the begin- ning of that title. ÷ With CDs and Video CDs, the disc is one title, there- fore the entire disc is repeated. DV D . Repeat pla y of all titles During playbac k, press REPEAT so that Repeat All is display ed. ÷ This operation is eff ective only when the men uâ s TITLE PLA Y MODE is set to All (see page 47.) ÷ When pla yback has contin ued until the end of the final title, pla yback begins again from title 1. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Repeat play of a specified section Press RPT A-B at the beginning and end of the section y ou want to repeat. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Return to a specified location Press RPT A-B at the desired location. T o return, press PLAY . ÷ Press CLEAR to clear a specified location. Tips ÷ T o cancel Repeat Play , press CLEAR the button. The Repeat pla y mode will be cancelled, but pla ybac k will continue normally . Note ÷ With some D VD discs, there ma y be times when Repeat pla yback is not possible because of the title . In this case, the mark will appear on the screen. ÷ With Video CDs, Repeat pla y is not possible during play- back with the menu displa yed (PBC pla yback). T o perform Repeat pla y , star t playback without displa ying a menu (see page 17), and press REPEAT . ÷ PROGRAM indicator on the main unit lights during repeat play . STEP STEP STEP STEP
22 En Press MEMORY three times. PROGRAM is displayed on the television screen. Press ENTER . The program screen is displayed. With , select the mode . Program Chapter: When programming with chapter units Program Title: When programming with title units With , the cursor (the place where the color is changed) is moved to the pr ogram input screen. With the number b uttons, the chapters and titles are designated in the desired playbac k sequence. Example) T o program titles or chapters in the sequence 9, 7, 18, press 9 , 7 , 10 > , 1 , 8 . 7 T o input chapter s and titles during playbac k Press ENTER . With , move the cur - sor to the chapter or title where y ou want to start playbac k Press PLAY . Playback starts in the programmed sequence. ÷ When RETURN is pressed, the programming ends with- out playing back. Pr ogram Pla y The contents of one disc can be arranged in the desired order . Pr ogramming is possible up to a maxim um of 24 steps. DV D . Note ÷ If the current title number (upper side) on the display is dif- ferent from the title n umber (low er side), inputting chapters using ENTER is not possible . In such cases, numeric buttons to input chapters. ÷ In case of DVD, program play is not possible depending on disc. In such cases, or mark will appear on the screen. ÷ programming chapter is possib le when those chapters are in the same title only . ÷ When the chapter is being changed to the ne xt chapter dur- ing program pla y , the display of the chapter which is not programmed appears on the TV screen. It is not malfunc- tion. Video CD . I CD . Press MEMORY three times. PROGRAM is displa yed on the television screen. Press ENTER . The program screen is displayed. With the number b uttons, the trac ks are designated in the desired playbac k sequence . Example) T o program tracks in the sequence 9, 7, 18, press 9 , 7 , 10 > , 1 , 8 . With , move the cur - sor to the track where y ou want to star t playbac k. Press PLAY . Pla ybac k starts in the programmed sequence. ÷ When RETURN is pressed, the programming ends with- out pla ying back. Note ÷ During Video CD PBC playbac k, program pla yback is not possible . Program Chapter Pro gra m T itle Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program T rack Current: T rack T otal Time 0.00 1(/10) RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program Chapter Pro gra m T itle Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program input screen
23 En Basic Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Erasing the contents of a pr ogram one b y one With , designate the number s that you want to erase. Press CLEAR . The designated numbers are erased and the ne xt num- bers are mov ed forw ard one by one . ÷ T o star t progr am playback, press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Adding a pr ogram With , designate the place where y ou want to inser t. Press the number b utton. The designated number mov es back and a ne w number is inser ted. ÷ T o star t program playback, mo v e the cursor to the number where you w ant playbac k to star t and press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . ÷ When all of the program (24 steps) has been input, add af- ter erasing with CLEAR . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . T o stop program pla y Press CLEAR during play . Normal playback starts from the chapter/track currently playing. Notes ÷ When the disc table is opened, the program will be com- pletely erased. With D VD , a program that y ou want to sa ve can be recorded in this play er (page 24). ÷ When CLEAR is pressed while stopped, the entire program is erased. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Pr ogramming a pause Press PAUSE in the pr ogram input screen. â 8 â is display ed and a pause is programmed. ÷ When a pause is programmed, it pauses at the star t of the title, chapter/trac k programmed ne xt. T o continue program pla yback, press PLAY . Notes ÷ It is not possible to progr am a pause at the beginning and at the end of a program. ÷ It is not possible to prog ram a pause two or more times in a row . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Chec king a pr ogram Press MEMORY three times. â PROGRAMâ is display ed on the TV screen. Press ENTER . With a DVD, press again and select â Pro- gram Chapter â or â Progr am Title â . ÷ T o star t program pla yback, press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 19 Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 19 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 10 Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 19 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 10 Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 10 19 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 06
24 En Pr ogram Pla y DV D . Recor ding the pr ogram (pr ogram memory) This play er can record D VD programs up to a maximum of 24 discs, e ven if the disc is remov ed. When a progr am is recorded, program pla ybac k star ts when the same disc is played bac k ne xt. When the number of recorded discs exceed 24, the pro- grams are automatically erased starting with the oldest discs. With , select â ONâ of â Program Memoryâ and press ENTER . ÷ T o star t progr am playbac k, mov e the cursor to the number where you w ant playbac k to star t and press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . DV D . Erasing the Pr ogram of the disc which is used Press to select [Off] of [Pro- gram Memory] and press ENTER . ÷ Ho we ver , the numbers remain as the y were on the program input screen, program of the disc is erased. Viewing disc inf ormation while stopped Press DISPLAY while stopped. The disc information screen is display ed. DV D . The titles and the number of chapters within the respective titles are display ed. 1/2 shows that there are two pages of information, and that this screen is the first of those pages. When there are two or more pages of disc information, the next screen is displa yed when the cursor button (right direction) is pressed. Video CD . I CD . The tracks and the respectiv e track times are displa yed. 1/2 shows that there are two pages of information, and that this screen is the first of those pages. When there are two or more pages of disc information, the next screen is displa yed when the cursor button (right direction) is pressed. T o switch off the disc inf ormation Press DISPLAY again. The disc information screen disappears. Viewing disc information Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 (Chapter 1 ~ 49) Program Memory PROGRAM Exit Move 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ On Off 7 Chapter 1 Information: Compact Disc T otal Time T rack Time Trac k Time DISPLA Y Exit 6.51 3.18 6.50 4.16 3.22 5.23 4.55 6.13 5.45 5.10 01 02 03 04 05 1/2 06 07 08 09 10 72.04 Information: DVD Title Chapter Title Chapter DISPLA Y Exit 01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 05 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 4 1~ 1 1~ 1 1/2
25 En Basic Operations Vie wing disc information during pla yback Press DISPLAY repeatedly during pla y- bac k. When pressed, the f ollowing kind of disc inf or mation is displa yed in the upper part of the screen. DV D . When pressed once, the present frame inf or mation is dis- play ed. Present title number - Present chapter number Elapsed time of the title Present number of frame T otal frame of the title When pressed twice, the present title information is displa yed. Present title number - Present chapter number Elapsed time of the title Remaining time of the title T otal time of the title When pressed three times, the present chapter inf or mation is display ed. Present title number - chapter number Elapsed time of the present title Elapsed time of the chapter T otal time of the chapter When pressed four times , the present chapter information is fur ther display ed. Present title number - chapter number Elapsed time of the present title Remaining time of the chapter T otal time of the chapter When pressed five times, the transfer rate* level meter is displayed. Present title number - present chapter n umber Elapsed time of the present title T ransf er rate le vel meter T ransf er rate le vel * It is the value that shows the amount of information of the picture recorded on the D VD . The higher the lev el of the transfer rate, the greater the amount of information, but the picture quality may not always be good. When pressed six times, the displa y screen disappears. Play Chapter 1.19 2.18 1.19/ 1 âÂÂ1 Play Chapter 1.19 2.18 â 0.59/ 1 âÂÂ1 Play T r . Rate : 1.19 8.9 1 âÂÂ1 Play Title 1 âÂÂ1 1.19 41.19 â 40.00/ Play Frame 1 âÂÂ1 1.19 83445 2389/ Video CD . When pressed once, the present inf or mation of the video CD is display ed. Present trac k number/total trac k number Elapsed time of the disc Remaining time of the disc T otal time of the disc When pressed twice, the present trac k information is dis- play ed. T rack n umber Elapsed time of the disc Elapsed time of the track T otal time of the track When pressed three times, the present trac k information is fur ther display ed. T rack number Elapsed time of the disc Remaining time of the track T otal time of the trac k When pressed four times , the display screen disappears . ÷ Disc information can â t be viewed during PBC pla yback of a Video CD . CD . When pressed once, the present trac k inf or mation is display ed. T rack number Elapsed time of the trac k Remaining time of the track T otal time of the track When pressed twice, the present inf or mation of the CD is displa yed. Present trac k number/total trac k number Elapsed time of the trac k Remaining time of the disc T otal time of the disc When pressed three times, the displa y screen disappears. Play All 5/10 20.19 22.57 â 2.38/ Play T rack 20.19 4.40 2.38/ 5 Play T rack 5 20.19 4.40 â 2.02/ Play T rack 1 0.03 3.32 â 3.29/ Play All 1/10 0.03 66.32 â 66.29/
26 En Switching the Angle of the Ima g e (Multi-Angle) DV D . With D VDs featuring recor dings of pictures shot from dif- ferent angles, you can c hoose any desired vie wing angle during playbac k. The mark is placed on the jacket of a D VD that has multiple angles. If the mark is displa yed during pla yback, press ANGLE . Press ANGLE again to select the desired angle. The angle changes each time ANGLE is pressed. Note ÷ is displa yed on the screen when y ou come to a place where multiple angles ha ve been recorded. ÷ When the angle is s witched dur ing a pause, the pause is cleared. ÷ In some D VDs the angle can be switched also in the disc menu screen. ÷ When you do not want to be display ed, set the [Angle Indicator] to off in the initial setup menu (page 32). Switching the Subtitles during Pla yback DV D . When a DVD with subtitles that ha ve been recorded in multiple languages is being pla yed bac k, the subtitles dis- played can be c hanged. Press SUBTITLE during pla yback of the DV D . The currently selected subtitles are display ed. Press the SUBTITLE b utton again. The subtitle displa y changes each time SUBTITLE is pressed. Note ÷ T o cancel the subtitles, press CLEAR after pressing SUBTITLE , or press SUBTITLE and select [OFF]. ÷ In some D VDs subtitle can be switched also in the disc menu screen. In that case, press MENU and select after the menu is displayed. (page 17) ÷ The subtitle language here is temporar y . When pla yback has been stopped, it returns to the subtitle language se- lected by [Subtitle Language] (page 33) of the initial setup menu. HELLO! Subtitle :1 Spanish Subtitle :2 English HOLA ANGLE : 4/4 \ \ \ \
27 En Basic Operations Switching the A udio during Pla yback DV D . When a D VD with audio that has been recor ded in multi- ple languages is being play ed back, the audio played bac k can be changed. Press AUDIO while playing bac k the D VD . The currently selected audio is display ed. Press AUDIO again. The audio changes each time AUDIO is pressed. Note ÷ Switching the audio of the D VD may also be perf or med in the menu screen. In that case, press MENU and select after the menu is displayed. (page 17) ÷ The audio language switched here is tempor ar y . When pla y- back has been stopped, it returns to the audio language selected by [Audio Language] (page 33) of the initial setup menu. ÷ The picture may momentarily stop when the audio changes depending on the disc. Switc hing the stereo/ left/right A udio Video CD . I CD . The type of audio of Video CDs and CDs can be switched. Press AUDIO during playbac k of a Video CD or CD . Each time the b utton is pressed, the audio changes to stereo , 1/L (left) and 2/R (r ight). Note ÷ With Karaok e, etc., perf or m the above-mentioned operation and set to the type of audio written on the disc jack et, etc. to mak e the audio the accompaniment only . Audio :1 Spanish Dolby Digital Audio : 2 English HOLA HELLO Dolby Digital 2CH 2CH Audio :Stereo Audio :1/L Audio :2/R
28 En Inde x of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) On this play er, v ar ious settings can be selected while watching menu screens. Here we will e xplain how to access menu screens . Because menu screen access differs according to the type of disc being used, or the playbac k mode (stop mode etc.), ref er to the f ollowing menu map when accessing. TV Screen 4:3 ( Letter Box ) ....................... 4:3 ( Pan & Scan) 16:9 ( Wide ) Still Picture Field ............................................. Frame Auto On Screen Display On ........................................... ........................................ Off OSD Position Wide ............................................ Normal Angle Indicator On ................................................. Off Audio Language English ..................................... . Other Subtitle Language English ..................................... . Other Auto Language O n .............................................. Off DVD Language w/ Subtitle Language ............... English Other Subtitle Display On .............................................. Off Assist Subtitle Subtitle Off With Audio ............................... Selected Subtitle Audio DRC Large ........................................... Medium Virtual Surround Off VDD/Tru Surround Small Off Parental Lock Level Change ......................... . Password Change Screen Saver Off ............................................. Black Background Color Background Color ........................................ . Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital ........................... Dolby Digital 3 PCM DTS Out Off ................................................ DTS 96kHz PCM Out 96kHz 3 48kHz ..................... 96kHz MPEG Out MPEG .......................................... MPEG 3 PCM Digital Out On ................................................. Off 2 A udio1 Video Language General 1 A udio2 Video Language General 2 A udio1 Video Language General 2 A udio1 Video Language General 2 A udio1 Video Language General page 40 page 40 page 41 page 41 page 42 page 42 page 43 page 29 page 31 page 31 page 32 page 32 page 33 page 33 page 34 page 35 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 39 page 39 â indicates the setting when shipped
29 En Settings Operating the Initial Setup Menu DV D . I Video CD . I CD .. The initial setup me nu enables v arious settings to be made . The basic operating method for the initial setup men u and the locations of the buttons used are e xplained next. 7 Displa ying the initial setup menu Press STD-BY/ON . When the power has been turned on, proceed to . Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Example) The buttons that can be operated from the screen. 7 Settings that work immediatel y after chang- ing, depending on the type of disc Depending on the type of disc, whether D VD , Video CD or CD , some settings work immediately after changing. This pla yer provides confirmation by the color of the indicator to the left of the selected setting. See the follo wing table. 7 Settings that cannot be changed during pla y- back Those settings that cannot be changed during playbac k are dis- pla yed in gra y . Selecting the aspect ratio DV D . Set the aspect ratio to match the tele vision connected to this pla yer . This setting is unnecessary when connected to a wide- screen television. Most D VD movies suppor t a wide-screen television and the screen size ratio (usually called the aspect r atio) is set to 16:9 (horizontal:vertical). Consequently , if a D VD is viewed on a television of the con ventional siz e, the 4:3 aspect r atio has the eff ect of increasing the height of the image. Set the as- pect ratio to 4:3 when viewing on a tele vision of the conven- tional size to eliminate this distortion. This setting cannot be changed during playback. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [TV Screen]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . 4:3 (Letter Box): Select when a tele vision of the conventional siz e is con- nected and you w ant to view in the letter bo x format (see the next page). 4:3 (P an & Scan): Select when a tele vision of the conventional siz e is con- nected and you w ant to view in the pan & scan f ormat (see the next page). 16:9 (Wide): Select when a wide-screen television (16:9) is connected (Setting when shipped). Press SETUP . ÷ If a 16:9 disc with 96 kHz PCM sound is conv er ted to letter bo x format and played bac k, the sampling frequency of the sound will be downgraded to 48 kHz. T o enjoy the sound at 96 kHz, set the screen aspect ratio to wide-screen. ÷ Whether the aspect can be changed or not depends on the disc. Check the disc jac ket, etc. for details . Color of the indicator Blue Y ellow Green T ype of disc D VD only D VD/Video CD only Not aff ected by the type of disc Gra y Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 English English Other DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - English On TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit 16:9(Wide) Normal On 4:3(Pan&Scan) 4:3(Letter Box) SETUP DTS Out â 96kHz PCM Out â 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t â MPEG 3 PCM Digital Ou t â Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out âÂÂ
30 En Selecting the aspect ratio DV D . The images which appear in the TV Regular TV (4:3) Wide TV (16:9) Image recor ded on DVD 16:9 discs 4:3 discs Settings of this pla yer 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (P an & Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (P an & Scan) 16:9(Wide) W ay to vie w the image There are bands at the top and bottom,but it can be pr operly viewed The left and right sides of the screen are cut off, but it can be properly vie wed When you don âÂÂt want to view the pic- ture in this wa y , s witch the setting of this player to [4:3 (Letter Box)]. Appears to be lengthened verti- cally When the picture appears in this wa y , switch the settings of this player to [4:3 (Letter Box)] or [4:3 (Pan & Scan)]. It can be viewed pr operly Image recorded on D VD 16:9 discs 4:3 discs Settings of this pla yer 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Wide) W ay to vie w the image It can be viewed pr operly There are bands at the top and bot- tom depending on the disc. There are bands at the right and left, but it can be pr operly viewed Appears to be lengthened horizon- tally When the picture appears in this wa y , adjust the setting of TV to nor mal. Refer to the operating instruction of TV for details. NO TE When following operation is operated during playback in the letter box or Pan & Scan modes, the screen size is forcibly change d to the wide-screen mode ÷ When setup menu is displayed. ÷ When command stack is displayed. ÷ When video text is displayed. ÷ When AD V .SETUP menu is display ed. ÷ When video blackboard is displayed. ÷ When player control panel is displayed. ÷ When program is displayed.
31 En Settings DV D . Switching still pictures Eliminating the burriness of a picture when the DVD has paused, and viewing the picture clearly is possible. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [Still Picture]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Field: Eliminates the burriness of the picture when in the still picture state. F rame: Normal mode. (Setting when shipped) ÷ Scenes that the picture mov es dynamic, jittering occurs in the still picture. Auto: Field and F rame automatically switch. Press SETUP . Note ÷ Depending on the disc, there are times when the picture quality ma y not become clear , e ven if â Fieldâ is selected. Changing visual settings DV D . I Video CD . I CD .. Switching the screen displa y on/off The setting can be changed when you don â t want to ha ve the displa y when this play er is operated such as â Playâ and â Stopâ displa yed in the tele vision screen. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [On Screen Displa y]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: Displays screen. (Setting when shipped) Off: Does not display screen. Press SETUP . TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Frame Auto On Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit On Off On Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP
32 En DV D . Selecting the position of the OSD The OSD position of the initial startup screen such as â Playâ or â Stopâ , etc. which this player displays can be set to suit the type of television. Set the screen ratio of the DVD disc to 4:3. (for details check the disc jacket, etc.) Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [OSD P osition]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Wide: This setting a voids cutting off par t of the OSD when zoom has been selected with the wide-screen tel- e vision setting. Normal: Select this when normal or full hav e been selected with the wide-screen tele vision setting (Setting when shipped). Press SETUP . DV D . T urning the mark on/off Change the setting when you don âÂÂt w ant to display the mark that is display ed on the screen during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [Angle Indicator]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: Display the mark on the screen. (Setting when shipped) Off: Does not display the mar k on the screen. Press SETUP . TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit On Wide Normal Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit On Wide On Off Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP Changing visual settings
33 En Settings DV D . Setting the audio language Select the audio language. This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [A udio Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . English: The audio language is English. (Setting when shipped). Other : Select the desired audio from among 136 languages. See âÂÂWhen [Other] is selected by the subtitle language/ audio language/ D VD language setting â on the ne xt page for details. Press SETUP . DV D . Setting a subtitle language Select the subtitle language display ed. This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [Subtitle Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . English: Displays English language subtitles. (Setting when shipped) Other : Select the desired subtitle from among 136 languages. For details, see â When [Other] is selected by the subtitle language/ audio lan- guage/ D VD language setting â on the next page. Press SETUP . Setting the Langua g e Some D VD discs have m ultiple subtitles and audio tracks and ha ve a function that enables the user to select the one he/ she wants to suit his/her needs. The settings related to the various languages and subtitles in (Language) of the initial setup screen are explained here. Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English Other DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - English On Selected Subtitle SETUP Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English Other On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - English On Selected Subtitle SETUP
34 En 7 When (Other) is selected by the subtitle language/ audio language/ DVD language setting Operate while viewing the language code tab le on page 44. Select [Other]. Press ENTER . The language setting screen is displayed. Example) A udio Language is display ed Select [List of Languages] or [Code]. 7 Selecting the langua ge with the â List of Languagesâ (When selecting â F rench âÂÂ) Press twice. 7 Selecting a language with the â Codeâ (When selecting â F rench âÂÂ) Press the remote control number buttons 0 6 1 8 ÷ The n umbers can also be selected by pressing f or each digit. Pressing the shifts the digit. ÷ The numbers in the ( ) of the code show the range of the numbers that can be set. Press ENTER . DV D . A utomatically setting the audio and subtitles Y ou can select whether the audio and subtitles are selected automatically or by the initial startup setting. This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [A uto Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: This is effectiv e when the audio language and the subtitle language are the same and when the sub- title display is On. With a foreign movie DVD, the original language is selected for the audio and the language selected in the [Subtitle Language] menu option is selected for the subtitles ; with a domestic movie DVD, the original language is selected for the audio and the subtitles are off; (Setting when shipped). Off: Automatic setting of the audio during playbac k is cancelled, and the audio and subtitle language is set as already set by [Audio Language] and [Subti- tle Language]. Press SETUP . /â Audio Language Audio1 General Language Video 2 SETUP Move Exit ENTER Select Return ja: Japanese List of Languages Code (0~2) 10 01 RETURN Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - Off On Selected Subtitle SETUP Setting the Language
35 En Settings DV D . Setting the DVD menu language Some D VDs hav e a menu. Select the language from this menu. This setting cannot be set during playback. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [D VD Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . w/Subtitle Language: Men u screen is displayed with the language selected by the subtitle language. (Setting when shipped) English: The menu screen is displayed in English. Other : Select the desired language from among 136 languages. F or details, see â When [Other] is selected by the subtitle language/ audio language/D VD language setting â on page 34. Press SETUP . Note When a language that is not recorded on the D VD has been set, the menu screen is displa yed with one of the languages recorded. DV D . T urning the subtitle displa y on/off Select whether subtitles are to be displa yed or not, or whether â Assist Subtitleâ is to be display ed. This setting cannot be changed during playback. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [Subtitle Display]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: The subtitles are displayed (Setting when shipped). Off: The subtitles are not display ed. Howe ver , some D VDs enforce the displa y of subti- tles (See the next page). Assist subtitle: An assist subtitle is one which, for e xam- ple, helps to e xplain a scene for persons who are hearing impaired. The assist subtitles are display ed when this setting is selected, but only if the y hav e been re- corded on the disc. Press SETUP . Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - w/Subtitle Language English Other SETUP Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - On Off Assist Subtitle SETUP English
36 En DV D . Setting the language of the subtitles with enf or ced displa y Some D VDs enf orce the display of subtitles e v en when subti- tle display â Off â has been selected. Howe ver , the language of the subtitles can still be selected in the nor mal wa y . This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [Subtitle Off]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . With A udio: Subtitles are display ed in the language of the audio that is being pla yed back. Selected Subtitle: Subtitles are display ed in the language selected by â Subtitle Languageâ on the initial setup menu (Setting when shipped). Press SETUP . Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - Selected Subtitle With Audio SETUP On English Setting the Language
37 En Settings Setting vie wing and listening restrictions (P arental Loc k) Some D VDs that contain violent scenes incorporate viewing restriction le vels (great and small). This information is displayed on the disc jac ket. If the level of this pla yer has been set to a level lower than the level of a disc, (it is not possible to view and listen to that disc.) For e xample, if the le vel of this player has been set to 6, a special code number has to be input before discs of le vels 7 and 8 can be play ed back. DV D . Setting the restriction le vel The le vel of the vie wing and listening restrictions and the spe- cial code number are set manually . Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [General] with . Select [P arental Lock] with . Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select [Level Change] with , and then press ENTER . 7 When a code number has not yet been registered: The code number registration screen is displa yed. 7 When the code number has already been registered: The code number input screen is displa yed. Press the number b uttons and input the code number as 4 digits. ÷ Pressing f or each digit and selecting the numbers is also possible . Pressing mov es the digit. Press ENTER . The viewing and listening restriction le vel setting screen is display ed. ÷ The setting at the time of shipment is lev el 8 (unre- stricted). With , select the appropriate number f or the level. For e xample, if lev el 6 has been selected, viewing and listening restrictions are applied with respect to any discs of le vels 7 and 8. Press ENTER . The lev el of the viewing and listening restrictions is set. Notes: W e recommend you make a note of the code n umber . If you f orget the code number , retur n to the setting when shipped (page 44) and then reset it. Background Color - Parental Loc k - Screen Saver - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Level Change Password Change Blue SETUP / â Parental Lock: Register Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN Parental Lock: Level Change Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Select 1 234 67 8 5 Return Lev el SETUP ENTER RETURN Parental Lock: Level Change Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Select 1 234 67 8 5 Return Lev el SETUP ENTER RETURN / â Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN Parental Lock: Input Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit 10 19 Return / â SETUP ENTER RETURN
38 En DV D . When a D VD with a set P arental Lock le vel is loaded When a DVD with a set Parental Lock level is loaded, pass- word input screen may be displayed. Playback cannot be started until the password has been correctly input. Press the number b uttons and input the code number as 4 digits. ÷ Pressing f or each digit and selecting the numbers is also possible . Pressing mov es the digit. Press ENTER . Pla yback starts. Note: Some discs will skip while playing bac k only the scenes that hav e had their viewing and listening restricted. See the op- eration method f or with the disc to get details. DV D . Changing the code number P erform the operations of pr ocedures ~ â Setting the restriction levelâ on the previous pa ge Press , select [P ass wor d Change], and press ENTER . The code number input screen is displa yed. Press the number b uttons and input the present code number with 4 dig- its. ÷ Pressing f or each digit and selecting the numbers is also possible . Pressing mov es the digit. Press ENTER . The code number changing screen is displa yed. Press the number b uttons and input the new code n umber as 4 digits. Press ENTER . The code number is changed. / â Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN / â Parental Lock: Password Change Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN Setting vie wing and listening restrictions (P arental Loc k) / â Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN
39 En Settings DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the screen saver The screen sav er is a function to pre vent the burning in (the afterglow phenomenon) of an image when the same image has been display ed for a long time such as during a pause. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [General]. Select [Screen Saver]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Off: The screen saver function does not work. (Setting when shipped) Black: Screen sav er set to blac k. Backg round color : Screen sav er set to background color . Press SETUP . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Select the bac kgr ound color Select the color of the screen when the disc has stopped. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [General]. Select [Backgr ound Color]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Press ENTER . Adjust the coloring with the screen below and press ENTER . Press SETUP . Making the or dinar y settings Background Color - Parental Loc k - Screen Saver - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Level 8 Off SETUP Background Color Audio1 General Language Video 2 â / SETUP Move Exit ENTER Select Return RETURN Background Color - Parental Loc k - Screen Saver - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Level 8 Off Black Background Color SETUP
40 En DV D . Dolb y Digital Output When the connected amplifier does not suppor t Dolby Dig- ital*, set to [Dolby Digital 3 PCM]. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [Dolby Digital Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Dolby Digital: Select when connected to an am- plifier or decoder that suppor ts Dolby Digital. (Setting when shipped) Dolby Digital 3 PCM: Con ver ts a Dolby Digital signal to a linear PCM signal and outputs. Select when connected to an am- plifier that does not suppor t Dolby Digital. Press SETUP . DV D . DTS Output When the connected amplifier suppor ts DTS**, set to [DTS]. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [DTS Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Off: Select when connected to an amplifier that does not suppor t DTS. (Setting when shipped) DTS: Select when connected to an amplifier or decoder that suppor ts DTS. Press SETUP . Setting the Digital Output The type of digital signal that corresponds to the amplifier connected to this pla yer can be selected. Be careful because noise may occur when the appr opriate setting is not made. Read this together with the operation manual of the amplifier that y ou have. DTS Out - 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM Digital Ou t - Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Dolby Digital 3 PCM Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - 96kHz PCM Out - DTS MPEG Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM DTS Out - Digital Ou t - Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - ** â DTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital â are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
41 En Settings DV D . 96 kHz PCM Output When the connected amplifier suppor ts 96 kHz, set to (96 kHz). This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [96kHz PCM Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . 96 kHz 3 48 kHz: Down-samples a 96 kHz signal to 48 kHz and outputs. Select when con- nected to an amplifier that does not suppor t 96 kHz. (Setting when shipped) 96 kHz: Select when connected to an ampli- fier or D AC that supports 96 kHz. Press SETUP . DV D . MPEG Output When the connected amplifier suppor ts MPEG, set to (MPEG). Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [MPEG Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . MPEG: Select when connected to an amplifier or decoder that suppor ts MPEG. MPEG 3 PCM: Conv er ts an MPEG signal to a linear PCM signal and outputs. Select when connected to an amplifier that does not suppor ts MPEG. (Setting when shipped) Press SETUP . 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - MPEG DTS Out - Digital Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - 96kHz DTS Out - Digital Ou t - Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out -
42 En Setting the Digital Output DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the Digital Output Can be set so that an audio signal is not output from the dig- ital audio output terminal. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [Digital Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: Outputs audio from the rear digital output terminal. (Setting when shipped) Off: A udio is not output from the rear digital output ter mi- nal. Press SETUP . Settings to Optimize the A udio Quality DV D . I Video CD . Surround Setting This play er automatically switches to Vir tual Dolby Digital and T r uSurround in line with the playbac k audio . Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 2]. Select [Virtual Surround]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select [VDD/T ruSurr ound]. Press ENTER . Off : Does not work. (Setting when shipped) VDD/T ruSurround : Surround sound setting Press SETUP . 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM DTS Out - Digital Ou t - On Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - Audio DRC - Audio2 General Language Video 1 Move Exit SETUP VDD/T ruSurround Virtual Surround - Off
43 En Settings Audio DRC - Audio2 General Language Video 1 Move Exit SETUP Large Medium Small Off Virtual Surround - Off DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Dynamic Range Compression Setting Adjust the dynamic range of the audio soundtrack. This function makes loud v olume lower , and low v olume louder . When Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) is on, mo vie soft sounds such as dialogue can be heard more clearly with- out making loud sounds ev en louder. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 2]. Select [A udio DRC]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Large: Maximum compression of audio source Medium: Moderate compression of audio source Small: Minimum compression of audio source Off: Cancel the audio DRC (Setting when shipped) Press SETUP . Note ÷ A udio DRC is only effectiv e with Dolby Digital audio sources. ÷ Audio DRC eff ects depending on the speakers and amp that you connected. Adjust the setting of the amp and speaker to set them most eff ective. T ruSurround and Vir tual Dolby Digital This play er , b y means of the T ruSurround* technology of SRS Labs Inc., processes surround encoded stereo au- dio and multi-c hannel audio and reproduces Virtual Sur- round with onl y the two fr ont speakers. P ar ticularly , when the playback audio is Dolb y Digital multi-c hannel audio, the Vir tual Dolby Digital function automatically w orks, and a surround sound with a greater sense of presence will be reproduced. * T r uSurround and the symbol are tr ademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. in the United States and selected foreign coun- tries. T r uSurround technology has been commercialized b y means of a license from SRS Labs, Inc. Note ÷ This function does not w ork when the DTS audio and 96 kHz PCM audio of D VD is play ed back or when a CD is pla yed back. ÷ When AUDIO of the remote control is pressed in the Vir tual Dolby Digital mode , VDD is displa yed in the upper left of the screen. ÷ When [Dolb y Digital Output] of [A udio 1] of the âÂÂInitial Setup Screen â is set to [Dolby Digital 3 PCM] in Vir tual Dolby Dig- ital mode, audio is not output from the digital output termi- nal. (See page 40) ÷ The surround eff ect of some discs may be small depending on the disc.
44 En Language code list DV D . Returning to the default settings at the time of shipment DV D . I Video CD . I CD . All the settings can be returned to the default state at the time of shipment. With power to the unit in the standb y status, Press and hold 1 4 of the pla yer and press STANDBY ON of the play er . Some of the settings are returned to the default status at the time of shipping but the other does not returned. Setting which is returned to the default status SETUP menu, AD V . SETUP menu, program memory , parental lock. Setting which is not returned to the default status Command stack, Video blac kboard data, clock When this operation is performed, all the data stored in the memory (page 24) will be simultaneously erased. Be sufficiently careful bef ore returning to the default settings. Language (Language code) Japanese (ja) English (en) F rench (fr) German (de) Italian (it) Spanish (es) Dutch (nl) Russian (ru) Chinese (zh) K orean (ko) Greek (el) Af ar (aa) Abkhazian (ab) Afrikaans (af) Amharic (am) Arabic (ar) Assamese (as) A ymara (a y) Azerbaijani (az) Bashkir (ba) Byelorussian (be) Bulgarian (bg) Bihari (bh) Bislama (bi) Bengali (bn) Tibetan (bo) Breton (br) Catalan (ca) Corsican (co) Czech (cs) W elsh (cy) Danish (da) Bhutani (dz) Esperanto (eo) Estonian (et) Language (Language code) Basque (eu) P ersian (fa) Finnish (fi) Fiji (fj) F aroese (fo) F risian (fy) Irish (ga) Scots-Gaelic (gd) Galician (gl) Guarani (gn) Gujarati (gu) Hausa (ha) Hindi (hi) Croatian (hr) Hungarian (hu) Ar menian (h y) Interlingua (ia) Interlingue (ie) Inupiak (ik) Indonesian (in) Icelandic (is) Hebrew (iw) Yiddish (ji) Ja vanese (jw) Georgian (ka) Kazakh (kk) Greenlandic (kl) Cambodian (km) Kannada (kn) Kashmiri (ks) Kurdish (ku) Kirghiz (ky) Latin (la) Lingala (ln) Laothian (lo) Language (Language code) Lithuanian (lt) Latvian (lv) Malagasy (mg) Maori (mi) Macedonian (mk) Malay alam (ml) Mongolian (mn) Moldavian (mo) Marathi (mr) Mala y (ms) Maltese (mt) Burmese (my) Nauru (na) Nepali (ne) Norwegian (no) Occitan (oc) Oromo (om) Oriya (or) P anjabi (pa) P olish (pl) Pashto, Pushto (ps) P or tuguese (pt) Quechua (qu) Rhaeto-Romance (rm) Kirundi (r n) Romanian (ro) Kiny arwanda (rw) Sanskrit (sa) Sindhi (sd) Sangho (sg) Serbo-Croatian (sh) Sinhalese (si) Slov ak (sk) Slov enian (sl) Samoan (sm) Language (Language code) Shona (sn) Somali (so) Albanian (sq) Serbian (sr) Sis wati (ss) Sesotho (st) Sundanese (su) Swedish (sv) Swahili (s w) T amil (ta) T elugu (te) T ajik (tg) Thai (th) Tigriny a (ti) T ur kmen (tk) T agalog (tl) Sets wana (tn) T onga (to) T ur kish (tr) Tsonga (ts) T atar (tt) T wi (tw) Ukrainian (uk) Urdu (ur) Uzbek (uz) Vietnamese (vi) V olapük (vo) W olof (wo) Xhosa (xh) Y or uba (yo) Zulu (zu) Input code 1001 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 1412 1821 2608 1115 0512 0101 0102 0106 0113 0118 0119 0125 0126 0201 0205 0207 0208 0209 0214 0215 0218 0301 0315 0319 0325 0401 0426 0515 0520 Input code 0521 0601 0609 0610 0615 0625 0701 0704 0712 0714 0721 0801 0809 0818 0821 0825 0901 0905 0911 0914 0919 0923 1009 1023 1101 1111 1112 1113 1114 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 Input code 1220 1222 1307 1309 1311 1312 1314 1315 1318 1319 1320 1325 1401 1405 1415 1503 1513 1518 1601 1612 1619 1620 1721 1813 1814 1815 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 Input code 1914 1915 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 2001 2005 2007 2008 2009 2011 2012 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 2023 2111 2118 2126 2209 2215 2315 2408 2515 2621
45 En Settings Advanced Operations Ad v anced Feature Operations In the Basic Operation edition, basic handling of this unit is explained. In this Advanced Fea- tures edition, however , original features of this unit are e xplained. ÷ Using the AD V .SETUP Menu This pla yer , in addition to the SETUP menu, has an AD V .SETUP menu f or setting special functions such as the weekly timer and pow er-on star t. ÷ Pla yer contr ol using mouse Control method using the mouse is e xplained in this section. ÷ Bar code/command stac k function V arious barcodes or commands used to control the D VD-V7300D can be stored in this play erâ s memory in advance. Memorized content can be recalled f or successive or step b y step e xecution. With this function, program pla ybac k is possible using the play er alone without the need f or a computer , controller or adv ance registration of barcodes. (Memor ized data is not erased e ven if the AC po wer cord is unplugged.) Uses ÷ Sale promotion presentation ÷ Picture ref erence/Picture e xhibition ÷ Education/training á â eE ^ ç 1 4 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 001 01:02-03 002 03:001234-002365 003 02:05-08 004 01:045867-123456 005 STEP FWD á â eE ^ ç 1 4 A utomatic playbac k ÷ Provided remote control unit ÷ External option switch ÷ Successive playback/repeat with W e ekly timer/P ow er on star t Input Command input with pro- vided remote control unit Input Barcode input with barcode reader Manual pla yback Step by step pla yback with pro- vided remote control unit T OP MENU MENU TOP MENU MENU Input Playbac k â¡
46 En ÷ Video blac kboard function Using the mouse and ke yboard, pictures, lines and characters (alphabet, numbers, symbols) can be dr awn during video pla yback or displa yed alone . F ree lines can be dra wn on the picture during playbac k, and pre-drawn dra wings or characters can be superimposed on the image and displa yed at a specified position during pla yback. (Memorized data is not erased e ven if the A C power cord is unplugged.) How to use ÷ A pointer ÷ For picture subtitle ÷ For picture e xplanation ÷ For picture masking Uses ÷ Sale promotion presentation ÷ Education/tr aining ÷ External sync hronizing function ÷ Pla ybac k time/P o wer supply time displa y Cur ved lines can be dr awn with the mouses Pre-drawn dr awings or char acters can be automatically superimposed on the picture 1 4 á â eE ^ ç 1 4 á â eE ^ ç 1 4 á â eE ^ ç
47 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . T o access the ADV . SETUP menu Press and hold SETUP for one second. The screen displa ys the special menu shown in the figure on the left (hereafter called the AD V .SETUP menu). T o set a parameter , for e xample, the weekly timer , select WEEKL Y TIMER with ,setting ON/OFF , etc. with . If a parameter is set to ON, press ENTER and per- form the setting instructions as prompted on the screen. Like wise, f or power-on star t, select PO WER ON ST ART with , setting ON/OFF , etc. with , If a param- eter is set to ON, press ENTER , set ON/OFF to ON and perform the setting instructions as prompted on the screen. A similar procedure is used to set the other parameters with and set ON/OFF , etc. with . 4 REPEA T MODE Select OFF/CHAPTER/TITLE/DISC from the menu. When TITLE PLA Y MODE is set to ALL,DISC is be selected. OFF: The D VD play er plays bac k in the normal status and does not repeat. CHAPTER: One selected chapter only is repeated (D VD). One selected trac k only is repeated (Video CD , CD). TITLE: Playing bac k repeats only one title (D VD). Pla ying back repeats the entire disc (Video CD , CD). DISC: Playing back repeats the entire disc (D VD only). 5 B A UD RA TE This sets the baud rate of the RS-232C interf ace. T wo baud rates of 4800 bps and 9600 bps can be selected. 6 TRA Y LOCK When set to ON, the opening and closing action of the disc tra y is lock ed. 7 BLA CKBO ARD LOCK When set to ON, entering the video blac kboard input mode is pre v ented. 8 ST A CK MODE OSD This controls ON/OFF s witching of the OSD when e xecuting a stack. ON: The ST A CK display appears on the screen when e x- ecuting a stack and when searching. OFF: The ST ACK displa y does not appear on the screen. 1 WEEKL Y TIMER The time f or turning the power on and off can be set f or each da y of the week; moreover , the title and chapter where play- back is to start can also be set. The player is limited to a maxiamm of 24 settings at one time. This function mak es unmanned operation possib le. OFF: The WEEKL Y TIMER function does not operate . ON: The WEEKL Y TIMER function operates. 2 PO WER ON ST ART This function sets whether or not automatic pla yback is to start when the power is s witched on. OFF: The PO WER ON ST ART function does not operate . ON: The POWER ON ST AR T function operates. It is also necessary to set the playbac k title and chapter to iden- tify the star ting point for pla yback. If this star ting point is not identified, the pla yer w aits in the playbac k stop status. 3 TITLE PLA Y MODE Single: When a single title has been selected in this mode, the D VD pla yer stops when this one title has been pla yed back. All: When this mode has been selected, the pla yer pla ys back each title on a D VD disc in tur n until all hav e been play ed. In order to set up the unique functions of the D VD-V7300D, there are settings f or 15 parameters that are made by the remote contr ol unit. AD V . SETUP MENU settings ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP ADV .SETUP page 2/2 PLA YER CONTRL P ANEL Selectable SETUP LOCK(MOUSE) ON EXTERNAL OPTION SW Standard SYNC OUT (DURING SQ) OFF EXTERNAL SYNC OFF A V SYNC COMPENSA TE ON Exit SETUP Above picture indicates the initial settings.
48 En 9 REV STEP/REV PLA Y This selects the image units f or re verse pla y . VO B U : This depends on the disc being play ed back, but usu- ally reverses in blocks of 0.4 - 1 second. Frame: Rev erses at inter vals of one frame. 0 PLA YER CONTROL P ANEL This selects the displa y mode of the icon panel that can be controlled with a mouse. Selectable: Press (click) the left and right buttons of the mouse simultaneously , or with the left button pressed, click the right button, and the icon control panel is displayed. Alwa ys On: The icon control panel is alw ays displa y ed. Ho w- e ver , there are times when the panel will not be displa y ed due to the various setup screens . Alwa ys Off: The icon control panel is not displa yed. - SETUP LOCK (MOUSE) This sets whether or not the SETUP or AD V .SETUP menu can be activated from the icon control panel. ON: The SETUP or AD V .SETUP menu cannot be activ ated from the icon control panel. OFF: When the SETUP button on the icon control panel is left- click ed with the mouse, the SETUP menu is acti- vated, and when the AD V .SETUP button is left-click ed, the AD V .SETUP menu is activated. = EXTERNAL OPTION SW This is used to set the ke y of the external option switch. Standard: Input of all e xter nal option ke ys is possible . Limit: Only the follo wing input is possible among the e x- ter nal option ke ys: Up/down/left/right cursor , ENTER, number ke ys 1-6, ST ACK GR OUP 1-6, TOP MENU , and MENU AD V . SETUP MENU settings ~ SYNC OUT (DURING SQ) This function sets whether or not a video synchronization sig- nal is output to a blac k screen or to a blue bac kground when the play er is not outputting video . OFF: Video is alwa ys output (the synchronization signal remains). ON: Video is not output at times other than dur ing playbac k and during menu screen display . ! EXTERNAL SYNC This selects the synchronized TV signal f ormat when external synchronization is input. OFF: This setting prohibits the external synchronizing func- tion. P AL : When the D VD disc is to be play ed back in P AL format. NTSC: When the D VD disc is to be played bac k in NTSC format @ A V SYNC COMPENSA TE This is set when a method that uses e xter nal synchronization is used, when the play er is used b y itself, and when m ultiple units are operated side b y side and the video frames are aligned. ON: When using the pla yer b y itself OFF: When multiple units are operated side b y side and the video frames are aligned Note Setting below items can not be changed during playback. Operate them in the stop mode. ÷ REV STEP/REV PLA Y ÷ EXTERNAL SYNC ÷ A V SYNC COMPENSA TE
49 En Advanced Operations Pla yer contr ol using a mouse Mouse operation is possible by connecting a PS/2 mouse and turning power ON. DV D . I Video CD . Button Selection Y ou can use the mouse to select D VD Menu b uttons and but- tons display ed on the screen. When the mark cursor is placed on a button, it changes to the mark. While the cursor is displa yed as the mark, clicking on a b utton with the left b utton on the mouse lets y ou perform operations in the same w ay as with the remote con- trol. * Menu selection with the mouse is not possib le with Video CDs. DV D . I Video CD . I CD .. Pla yer contr ol icon Pressing the mouse â s left and right button simultaneously or clicking the right b utton while holding the left button displa ys the play er control icons on the bottom left of the screen. When the mouse pointer is placed on a pla yer control icon, the pointer changes from to . While the pointer is in the form of , clicking with the left mouse b utton perf orms the same operation as the remote control unit b utton. ÷ The buttons appearing in video images recorded on com- mercially av ailable D VD video discs may not be located in the recognized positions . With such discs , please use the remote control unit instead of the mouse. Discs Function â á E 3 e 1 4 T OP MENU MENU DV D YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Video CD YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO NO CD YES YES NO YES NO YES YES NO NO NO T OP MENU MENU TOP MENU MENU SKIP SCAN STEP PLA Y STEP SCAN SKIP RETURN FWD REV A When the play er control icon already mentioned is left- click ed with the mouse, an action is perf ormed similar to that when each button of the remote control unit is pressed. During playbac k In the case of a D VD In the case of a Video CD In case of left click, this unit w orks as the icon indicatedVideo titles cannot be directly selected with a mouse. Right- clic king the pla yer control icon, as in the figure , displays a n umber at the upper right of the screen, and pressing the the title of the number that has been input to be selected. ÷ When SETUP LOCK (MOUSE) on the AD V . SETUP menu is set to OFF , the SETUP and AD V . SETUP buttons appear on the pla yer control panel. Y ou can click these b uttons with the mouse to enter the corresponding SETUP menu. ÷ When SETUP LOCK (MOUSE) is set to OFF and point â Aâ is dragged with the left mouse button held down, the location of the player control panel can be changed. Once the location is changed, the new loca- tion will be maintained until the power is turned off . The default panel position is restored when the power is turned off , then bac k on again. Initialization is also performed when the OSD position is changed and when the video blac kboard is display ed. NO TE ÷ The position of the pla yer controls cannot be changed during pla y- back of P AL discs. ÷ The position of the play er control panel cannot be changed when the [OSD P osition] in the SETUP MENU is set to [Wide] or when the video blac kboard is display ed. T rack n umber 4 The numbers consecutiv ely decrease by one . ENTER The numbers consecutiv ely increase by one . In the case of the rignt click Note If the title of the number that has been input is not present or mouse operation is prohibited, it cannot be executed.
50 En DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting/correcting the current time Set the current date and time. 1. Move the â° (pointer) to âÂÂWEEKL Y TIMERâ b y pressing or . 2. Press or and set to ON. 3. Press ENTER . ÷ The Weekly Timer setting screen is displa yed. 4. Press ENTER . ÷ The date/time setting screen is displa yed b linking. 5. Set the time of the day . ÷ Set figures in order of year (2 digits), month, da y , day of the week, hour , minute and second. These figures can be input in an y of the fol- lowing tw o methods. Example) T o set to 8:15:00, Satur da y April 29, 2000 T o correct the date or time When the setting screen appears in step 3 above, press ENTER so that the figures of the year start to blink. Then press NEXT 4 times so that the figures of hour blink, and set them with the same method as abov e. A . Input using the numeric buttons and NEXT B . Input using or and ENTER ÷ â Aâ and â Bâ in the f ollowing description refers respec- tively to the tw o operation methods abov e. A : Press 0 = 0 = NEXT = 0 = 4 = NEXT = 2 = 9 = NEXT = 5 = NEXT = 0 = 8 = NEXT = 1 = 5 = NEXT = 0 = 0 = NEXT . * The days of the week can be set using the fol- lowing numeric b uttons. MON: 0, TUE: 1, WED: 2, THU: 3, FRI: 4, SA T: 5, SUN: 6. B: Press the or to select 00 and press ENTER to start the setting of the next set of figures (the month in this case). Set the month, date , day of the week, hour , minute and second, and press ENTER to complete the setting operation. Note ÷ The internal clock has a tolerance of approximately ñ2 minutes per month. (The amount varies depending on the usage environment.) ÷ The built-in cloc k is powered b y a capacitor. The cloc k of this unit functions ev en when it is in the ST ANDBY mode, pro vided that the AC cord is plugged into a po wer outlet. If the AC cord is unplugged, the cloc k can con- tinue functioning for 7 to 10 days (when the capacitor is fully charged and at 25 ðC) . ÷ W eekly timer setting is kept remembered as if A C cord is unplugged for long times. W eekly timer function operation/display 5 00âÂÂ00âÂÂ00 âÂÂâÂÂâ 00:00.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 00âÂÂ04âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 3 -4 1 2 ON ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER ON POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP 1/3 shows that there are three pages of setting, and that this screen is the first of these pages.
51 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the weekl y timer 1. When the setting screen appears in step 3 on the previous page, press or to mo ve â° (pointer) to the day of the week and press ENTER . ÷ P ower ON/OFF time setting displa y appears. 2. Set the power ON/OFF time. Example 1) T o turn power ON at 10:30 on W ednesday ÷ Mov e â° (pointer) to â WEDâ and press ENTER . ÷ If the power OFF time is not set, the timer simply turns po wer ON. Example 2) T o turn power ON at 10:30 on Wednesda y and turn it off at 17:45 NO TE: It is also possible to set only the po wer OFF time without set- ting the power ON time . In this case, when pow er is tur ned ON manually , it will be tur ned OFF at the set time. A : Press 1 = 0 = NEXT = 3 = 0 = NEXT = NEXT . B: Press or to select 10 and press ENTER the item to set the setting of the next set of figures. Now Press or to set it to 30 and press ENTER twice. A : Press 1 = 0 = NEXT = 3 = 0 = NEXT = 1 = 7 = NEXT = 4 = 5 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 10 and press ENTER item to set the setting of the ne xt set of figures. Set the subsequent sets of figures to 30, 17 and 45 by repeating the above. ÷ Y ou can set the WEEKL Y TIMER with the mouse as well as with the remote control. ÷ Where is displa yed, clic king with the left mouse but- ton lets you change selections or settings . ÷ Each time you clic k the left mouse button, the numerical value is increased b y one, Each time y ou click the right button, the numerical v alue is decreased by one. 1 2 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER RETURN ENTER ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen.
52 En 3. Set the operation to be performed at the moment timer playbac k star ts. 1. TOP MENU: Setup for pla ying from top of the menu. 2. TITLE: Setup for pla ying the specified title and chap- ter . ÷ Ref er to âÂÂPlaying the specified title and chapter â . 3 . BARCODE/COMMAND ST A CK: Setup f or recalling the display of the bar code command stack gr oups from memory . ÷ Refer to âÂÂSetup for recalling the barcode/command stack groups from memory â (See page 53). ÷ Select one of the abov e with or , and press ENTER . NO TE ÷ This step cannot be performed if the power ON time has not been set. ÷ The data is written in memor y at the moment the timer setup screen is e xited. The timer setup will not be stored in memor y if power is turned off before or without e xiting the screen. ÷ On a D VD disc that has been setup to star t playbac k automatically , the setup made abov e will not be applied to the disc. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Clearing the set time With the TIMER ON/OFF time input screen (shown left) displayed, press CLEAR and then press ENTER of the remote control unit. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Pla ying the specified title and chapter ÷ Mov e â° (pointer) to â 2 TITLE â and press ENTER . Example) T o begin playback with Chapter 2 of Title 6 NO TE ÷ When a title and chapter are selected, pla yback continues after the selected chapter only when there is one or more chapter after it. Playbac k completes at the end of the se- lected title. If repeat playbac k is set in the AD V SETUP menu, the se- lected chapter is play ed first then the set repeat pla yback star ts. ÷ When setting tracks on a CD or Video CD , please enter the track number in the CHAPTER in the abo ve setting. At this time TITLE and BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACKs settings will not operate. A: Press 0 = 6 = NEXT = 0 = 2 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 06 and press ENTER to star t the setting of the ne xt set of figures. Now press or to select 02 and press ENTER . TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER 3 1 2 TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN ALL 10 30 17 45 T06:C02 3 TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER P ointer W eekly timer function operation/displa y ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. For y our reference Memorized data is not erased e ven if A C pow er cord is unplugged.
53 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting to turn on pla yer po wer only When selecting a title, enter a title which is not on the disc. Example: Enter title 99. DV D . Setup f or recalling the bar code/command stac k gr oups fr om memory ÷ Mov e the pointer to 3. BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK and press ENTER . Example) T o recall and ex ecute Barcode/Command stack group â 5â NO TE When a Barcode Command stac k group is selected, the com- mand stack within the g roup will be ex ecuted repeatedly re- gardless of whether the repeat mode in the AD V SETUP menu is set to ON or OFF . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the timer function not to operate with the weekl y timer setting left as is 1. Move the â° (pointer) to WEEKL Y TIMER on the AD V SETUP menu screen with or and set to OFF with the remote contr ol unit â s or . A : Press 5 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 005 and press ENTER . Now the timer setting is complete. TIMER ON/OFF SAT 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER 00 âÂÂ04 â 29 WED 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 10 30 17 45 GROUP005 ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP
54 En DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the WEEKL Y TIMER and Expandable Functions Y ou can change the day f or the WEEKL Y TIMER settings. This setting allows f or the power to be turned on and off more than two times in the same da y . In addition, with the ALL setting, the pla yer can be set to turn on and off at the same time every da y . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the da y for the WEEKL Y TIMER 1. Select the WEEKL Y TIMER setup screen. ÷ F or information on how to select this screen, see page 50 and 51. 2. When the setting area below ON is b link- ing, press PREV . ÷ The setting that indicates the da y of the week will begin to blink. 3. Select a day b y using or . 4. Press NEXT . ÷ For information on how to turn the timer ON/OFF and other settings, see page 51. In step 3 above, as you press or , the follo wing 8 possible settings will be dis- play ed: MON,TUE, WED , THU , FRI, SA T , SUN, and ALL. For information on how the WEEKL Y TIMER operates when ALL is se- lected, see pa g e 55. Y ou do not have to use the remote control, the mouse can be used as well. P osition the cursor o ver the day setting and c lick the left mouse button to c hange the da y . W eekly timer function operation/displa y ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. TIMER ON/OFF SUN 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF SUN 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF MON 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF MON 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER 1 2 ë 3 4 ë MON ALL Display changes ë or Blink Blink Blink
55 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the po wer to turn on and off more than tw o times in the same da y Example 1) When set as seen in Example 1, the power turns on at 7:30 a.m. on Sunday and playbac k begins from the fir st title chapter (trac k) 1. Then the power turns off at 12:00 noon. At 1:00 p.m. on Sunday , the power turns on a gain and playbac k begins from the second title c hapter (track) 1. The power then turns off at 5:30 p.m. In this w a y , the play er can be set the time to turn on and off a maximum of 24 times on the same da y . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the pla yer to turn on and off at the same time e very day Example 2) Refer to page 54 while setting the da y setting to ALL. After this is set, the time at which the play er will turn on and off every da y can be entered. In Example 2, the power turns on everyday at 7:30 a.m. and playbac k begins from the first title c hapter (track) 1. The power then turns off at 5:30 p.m. Example 3) As can be seen in e xample 2, if y ou want the power to turn on everyda y except Sunday , set the time in the OFF column f or Sunday exactl y the same as the time for the ON column of ALL. Leave the time setting in the ON col- umn for Sunda y blank. In Example 3, on Sunday the power is alwa ys off, while on the remaining da ys the power turns on at 7:30 a.m. and playbac k begins from the first title c hapter (track) 1. The power then turns off at 5:30 p.m. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the po wer to turn on and off in the other da y Example 4) As can be seen in e xample 4, the power turns on at 11:00 p.m. on Monday and turned off at 2:00 a.m. on T uesday (Monda y midnight). 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SUN SUN ALL 13 00 17 30 T02 : C01 07 30 12 00 T01 : C01 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 07 30 17 30 07 30 T01 : C01 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 23 00 02 00 T01 : C01 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 07 30 17 30 T01 : C01 Example 1) Example 2) Example 3) Example 4) List displa y List displa y List displa y
56 En DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Examples of when the times set for the WEEKL Y TIMER o verlap However when the ON time and the OFF times do overlap, please understand that the player will operate as indicated in the e xamples below . Example 5) In 1 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 2 the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. In this case, the OFF setting for 1 will be ignored, and the play er will tur n off at the time that was set for 2 . Example 6) In 2 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 1 the player beings to operate according to the time set for ON. In this case, the OFF setting for 2 will be ignored, and the play er will tur n off at the time that was set for 1 . Example 7) In 1 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 2 the player begins to operate according to the time set f or ON. In this case, the play er will tur n off at the time that was set for 2 . Example 8) In 2 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 1 the pla yer will turn off momentarily accord- ing to the time set f or OFF . Then, in 3 the play er begins to operate again at the time set f or ON. Lastly , the play er will tur n off at the time that was set f or 3 . Example 9) In 1 ALL(ev er yda y), the play er begins to operate according to the time set for ON e xcept for Sunda y . These settings re- sult in the play er turning on and off according to the times set for ON and OFF in 1 . The pla yer therefore will not oper ate on Sunday . Notes When the ON and OFF times are set to the same exact time, the play er will react differently according to pre viously desig- nated settings. In Example 9, when the ON and OFF times are set the same, the power is OFF and the player is in standby up until that designated time. When the ON and OFF times are set the same, in the case when the players is ON up until that time, the OFF time set for 2 will be ignored. REFERENCE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 12 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ALL SUN ON ON OFF OFF ON 1 2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 1 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 Result 1 2 Result 1 2 Result 1 2 3 Result 1 2 Result Except Sunday ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 2 1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Example 5) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 6) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 7) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 8) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 9) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or ALL and SUN. (The times set for 1 ON and 2 OFF are the same time.) W eekly timer function operation/displa y
57 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the power on start function 1. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to âÂÂPO WER ON ST ARTâ b y pressing or . 2. Set it to ON b y pressing or . 3. Press ENTER . ÷ The POWER ON ST ART setting screen is displa yed. 1. Playing the top menu ÷ Move the â° (pointer) to 1. T OP MENU and press ENTER . 2. Playing the specified title and chapter ÷ Mov e the â° (pointer) to 2. TITLE and press ENTER . Example) T o begin playbac k with Chapter 2 of Title 6 NO TE ÷ When setting trac ks on a CD or Video CD , please enter the trac k number in the CHAPTER in the abov e setting. At this time TITLE and BARCODE/COMMAND ST A CKs settings will not operate. P o wer on star t function 1.T OP MENU: Playing from the top men u screen. 2.TITLE: Playing the specified title and chapter . 3.B ARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK: Recalling and executing the Bar code/Command stack gr oups in memory . ÷ Select one of the above with or , and press ENTER A : Press 0 = 6 = NEXT = 0 = 2 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 06 and press ENTER item to start the setting of the next set of figures. Now press or to select 02 and press ENTER . Y ou can set the PO WER ON ST ART FUNCTION with the mouse as well as with the remote control. ÷ Where is displayed, clicking with the left mouse but- ton lets you change selections or settings. ÷ Each time you click on a number with the left mouse button, it increases by 1. Each time you click on a number with the right mouse button, it decreases by 1. POWER ON ST ART 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK RETURN ENTER 1-2 3 ë POWER ON ST ART 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE TITLE 06 CHAPTER 02 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK RETURN ENTER ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART T06:C02 TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP In the case of 1 In the case of 2 In the case of 3 ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and exit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and retur n to the previous screen. Selecting the special title and chapter
58 En 3. Recalling and executing the Barcode/Com- mand stac k groups in memory ÷ Mo ve the â° (pointer) to 3. BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK and press ENTER . Example) T o e x ecute Bar code/Command stack gr oup 5 ÷ The AD V SETUP menu setup screen is displa yed again, in which the PO WER ON ST ART setting is sho wn. Now the setting of the operation to be perf or med at power ON is complete. NO TE With a disc with which pla yback star ts automatically , the op- eration ma y differ from the setting. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting to turn on pla yer power onl y When selecting a title, enter a title which is not on the disc. Example: Enter title 99. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . T urning off the PO WER ON ST ART FUNCTION 1. On the AD V SETUP menu screen, move the â° (pointer) to PO WER ON ST ART with the remote control unit â s or and select OFF with the remote contr ol unit â s or . A : Press 5 = NEXT . B : Press or to select 005 and press ENTER . POWER ON ST ART 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 005 RETURN ENTER ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART GROUP 005 TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP P o wer on star t function Setting the Barcode/Com- mand stack ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP For y our reference Memorized data is not erased e ven if A C pow er cord is unplugged. ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. Setting is possible b y the mouse instead of the re- mote control. When the â° pointer is on MENU, click left button, ADV . SETUP menu is disappeared.
59 En Advanced Operations DV D . Ad vanced usa g e With the barcode stack/command stac k function of this unit, groups can be divided and memorized without influencing pre- viously input commands. This is con venient f or separate memorization of contents of more than one disc , or when one play er is being jointly used b y many people. T o register a group separate to the already pre viously memo- rized content 1. Register a ne w group \ Pag e 6 7 â GR OUP 002 â on the top right of the barcode stack/com- mand stack input screen is the g roup number that will be memorized. As the group number will be important for e xecution, please mak e a note of it so that you do not f orget it. 2. Input the bar code with the barcode reader and transmit to pla yer \ Pag e 6 1 ÷ Input can also be done with the remote control unit. \ P age 60-64 3. Repeat step 2 in the desired pla yback or - der . 4. When input is finished, store in the player â s memory \ Pa g e 6 5 5. Execution \ P age 74, 75 At this time please select the group number that w as noted in step 1. NO TE: Commands stored in the pla yer â s memory can be grouped together or divided \ P age 70-73 . Please note, ho wev er , that the order of commands can not be changed. This play er can be used as follows using the Barcode stac k/ Command stack function ÷ Commands in the barcode book included with the disc can be memorized in the play er in advance. (Barcode stack func- tion.) ÷ Barcodes can be set using the provided remote control f or discs that do not hav e barcodes, or for commands that y ou want to use that are not pro vided with barcodes. (Command stack function.) ÷ The remote control can be used f or recall and successive execution or step by step execution of memorized content. NO TE: ÷ The maximum number of steps that can be memorized in the player is 300 steps including video blackboards. ÷ Memorized data is not erased even if power to the unit is s witched OFF .Barcode/Command screen DV D . Basic usage How to use the barcode stac k/command stack function is in- dicated as f ollows: Details of those settings, ref er to the pages after â \â . 1. Displa y the barcode stac k/command stack setup screen with the remote contr ol \ Pag e 6 0 2. Input the barcode with the bar code reader and transmit to play er \ Pag e 6 1 ÷ Input can also be done with the remote control unit. \ Pa ge 60-64 3. Repeat step 2 in the desired pla yback or - der . 4. When input is finished, store in the player â s memory \ Pa g e 6 5 5. Execution \ P age 74, 75 Bar code/Command stac k function NO TE: The Barcode stack/Command stac k function will not op- erate with CD or Video CDs.
60 En The player can store commands input using LASERBARCORD and D VD barcodes. The stored commands can be recalled for either successive or step-by-step execu- tion. Memorized data is not erased e ven if AC po wer cord is Un- plugged. DV D . Displa ying the Barcode/ Command stac k screen 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla y er control panel. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. ÷ If barcodes hav e already been input, their data are shown in the screen. Select whether barcodes are to be input by er asing ex- isting barcodes or by adding them to the e xisting barcodes. ÷ T o input new barcodes from the beginning, select â YESâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ T o add new barcodes to e xisting barcodes, select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ Press ENTER to display the Barcode/Command Stack In- put screen. ÷ When barcodes have not been input, the Barcode/Com- mand Stack input screen will be displayed. ÷ The setting procedure of this screen will be described in the subsequent pages. ÷ Barcode/Command Stacks can be set directly using a barcode reader (optional) or set using the remote con- trol unit. 2 1 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME 000000 SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT Bar code/Command stac k setting Barcode/Command screen
61 En Advanced Operations DV D . Direct setting using a bar code reader 1. Read a bar code with a barcode reader . 2. Send it to the pla yer . Example 1) Read â PLA Y â and send it. Example 2) Read â Pla y Title 8 Chapters 5 to 12 with Subtitle 3, A udio 2 and Angle 1 â and send it. DV D . Setting using the remote contr ol unit Five commands including Pla y 3, P ause 8 , e Still/Step E and Stop 7 and W AIT and GO T O GROUP can be set using the remote control unit. The chapter search, chapter pla y , frame search and frame segment play* commands can also be set using the remote control unit. * Frame segment play is to play between two specific frames. Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ The TITLE number will blink and the input mode will be se- lected. Example 1) T o set â Playâ Press PLAY . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stac k Input screen shows â PLA Y â and increments to the ne xt Input screen. Example 2) enter the wait time 1. Press and hold PAUSE . ÷ â W AIT 000 sec â appears on the screen. 2. Use the number buttons to enter the wait time in seconds. ÷ The maxim um time v alue that can be entered is 999 3. Press NEXT . (completes the procedures) 1 2 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 PLA Y 30 ð 30 ð 7 m BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004: 006 WAIT 000sec.
62 En Example 3) T o â Play Title 3 Frames 123000 to 129000 â Example 4) T o â Play Title 5 Chapters 3 to 7 with Subtitle 3, A udio 2 and Angle 1 â 1 . Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ The TITLE number will blink. 2 . Press 3 = NEXT . ÷ Title 3 is set, and the mode s witches to F rame Input. 3 . Press 1 = 2 = 3 = 0 = 0 = 0 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the star t frame number . ÷ If the operation up to the present has been performed during playback, the input start frame is searched now . 4 . Press 1 = 2 = 9 = 0 = 0 = 0 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the end frame number . ÷ If the operation in steps 3 and 4 is performed during playback, you can press ENTER in place of specifying the frame number in steps 3 and 4 above. In this case, the frame number being played is input auto- matically . 1 . Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ The TITLE number will blink. 2 . Press 5 = NEXT . ÷ This sets title 5 and the chapter input mode starts. 3 . Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME to select SEARCH CHAPTER. ÷ This item sets the chapter number where pla yback should star t. ÷ Each press s witches â CHAPTERâ and â FRAMEâ al- ter nately . 4 . Press 3 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the star t chapter number . 5 . Press 8 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the end chapter number . 6. Press 3 = NEXT . ÷ This sets Subtitle 3. 7. Press 2 . (Do not press NEXT .) ÷ This sets Audio 2. 8 . Press 1 . (Do not press NEXT .) ÷ This sets Angle 1. Now go to the next step . For your ref erence T o play chapter 7 till the end as sho wn in Example 4), enter â 8â , obtained b y adding 1 to 7, in MARK CHAPTER. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 08 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Displa y when the example on the right is input Displa y when the example on the right is input Bar code/Command stac k setting Note The diff erence between search frames and mark frames can- not be set to 24 frames or less . The entry must be 25 frames or greater .
63 En Advanced Operations Example 5) T o input the command for setting Subtitle 1, A udio 2 and Angle 3 ÷ With a play command that specifies the start and end frames, it is not possible to set the subtitle , audio and angle simulta- neously . Howe ver , by placing the subtitle , audio and angle setting command as described above bef ore the frame sec- tion pla y command, the section playbac k can be ex ecuted with the specified setting. The input as shown abo ve allo ws to pla y title 3 frames 10000 to 15000 by setting Subtitle 1, A udio 2 and Angle 3. With commands other than the frame section play command, such as the frame search, chapter search and chapter sec- tion play commands, the specified setting is valid within each command. Example 6) T o repeat â Play Title 3 frames 123000 to 129000 â in Example 3 1 . When the wor d TITLE is blinking, enter â 00â in the TITLE. ÷ (Do not press NEXT .). 2 . Press SUBTITLE while the TITLE digits are blinking. 3 . When the SUBTITLE digits star t to blink, press 1 then NEXT . 4 . When the A UDIO digit star ts to blink, press 2 . 5 . When the ANGLE digital star ts to blink, press 3 . 1. Perf orm steps 1 to 4 in Example 3. ÷ The barcode/command stack input screen of the next step appears. 2. Press RPT A-B while the TITLE number is blinking. ÷ The REPEA T indicator appears on the screen. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE 01 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 3 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 SUBTITLE 01 AUDIO 2 ANGLE 3 002 03:10000 âÂÂ15000 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Press DISPLAY switches o ver to the follo wing displa y Item displa y List displa y 1. 2. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 002 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 002 REPEA T
64 En Example 7) Inputting a command to jump to another group. T o change a previously input â GO T O GROUP â command group number , press RECALL during Detailed or List display , and input the new n umber . Using this command enables consecutiv e jumping to different groups. < Conceptual representation > Y ou can also create standby display g roups. If you do this, you return to the standby displa y after jumping to another group . < Conceptual representation > DV D . Setting the Subtitle, A udio and Angle SUBTITLE ÷ â 00â turns the screen color to the color specified in â Back- ground color â in the GUI menu and makes the pla yed image invisib le. ÷ â 01â to â 32â displays the corresponding subtitle . ÷ â 33â plays with Subtitle OFF . ÷ â 34â is used to make the pla yed image made in visible with â 00â visible again. ÷ â 99â retains the pre vious condition. This is used to change other setting than SUBTITLE while maintaining the SUBTI- TLE setting the same. ÷ â 35â to â 98â are inv alid. A UDIO ÷ â 0â plays image with A udio OFF . ÷ â 1â to âÂÂ8 â selects and plays the corresponding audio . ÷ â 9â retains the previous condition. ANGLE ÷ â 1â to âÂÂ8 â selects and plays the corresponding angle . ÷ â 9â retains the previous condition. ÷ â 0â selects and pla ys Angle 9. NO TE ÷ When â retain the previous conditionâ is selected, â â½ â is dis- play ed in the input screen. ÷ The barcode/command stack cannot be e x ecuted if a value that does not exist in the disc is input. DV D . T o use only the c hapter sear ch or frame sear ch In item â MARK CHAPTERâ or â MARK FRAMEâ , simply press NEXT without setting anything. A still image is display ed after search. DV D . T o change a v alue during input Press the numeric button of the correct number (including 0). T o retur n to a previous setting point, press PREV . DV D . T o cancel input in the middle Mov e the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction) and press ENTER . 1 . When the TITLE number is flashing, press RECALL . 2 . The displa y changes to that indicated in the fig- ure on the left. Input the number of the gr oup you want to jump to, and press NEXT . GO TO GROUP - 002 * * * * GROUP - 001 GO TO GROUP - 004 * * * * GROUP - 002 GO TO GROUP - 010 * * * * GROUP - 004 REPEA T * * * * GROUP - 001 GO T O GROUP - 001 GROUP - 002 * * * * GO T O GROUP - 001 * * * * GROUP - 004 GO T O GROUP - 001 * * * * GROUP - 003 example RECALL 002 PLA Y or External option switch Group 002 example RECALL 003 PLA Y or External option switch Group 003 example RECALL 004 PLA Y or External option switch Group 004 Jump Bar code/Command stac k setting BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004: 003 GO T O GROUP - 000
65 En Advanced Operations DV D . Saving Bar code/ Command stac k When input has been completed to the end using the ex- ample operation, the barcode stack/command stack in- put screen for the ne xt step appears in a f ew seconds. When this screen appears, press or to move â° (pointer) to SA VE and press ENTER . NO TES: ÷ The input information is not saved if â° (pointer) is moved to SA VE and ENTER is pressed before the bar code stac k/com- mand stack input screen f or the next step appears. ÷ The input inf ormation is not sav ed if â° (pointer) is mov ed to EXIT and ENTER is pressed. DV D . T o delete a previousl y imput Bar code/ Command stac k 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displayed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stac k Input screen is display ed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â DEL â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction). 6. Select the step to be deleted b y pressing or . 7. Press ENTER . ÷ The selected step is deleted and the numbers of the sub- sequent steps are decremented by 1. 8. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT : Even if y ou have come to step 7 in the abo ve deletion proce- dure, y ou can still abort deletion by moving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing the cursor button (right direction) then pressing ENTER . The deletion is entered in memory when the â SA VE â operation is perf or med in step 8. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 08 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 001 001 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 002 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 002 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME 000000 SUBTITLE * A UDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT Step displa y ÷ The display disappears and the input inf or mation is sav ed. The displa y disappears.
66 En DV D . Correcting a pre viously input Bar code/ Command Stac k Example) T o change the Audio setting of step 003 fr om 2 to 1 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen is displa y ed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Select â 003 â°â by pressing or . 6. Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ This initiates the Barcode/Command Stack input mode. 7. Press NEXT 4 times to select item â A UDIO âÂÂ. 8. Press 1 . 9. Press NEXT . ÷ The next step â s Barcode/Command Input screen is dis- pla yed. 10. Move the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing and press ENTER . NO TE: T o save the corrected inf ormation, press NEXT repeatedly until the last item flashes (ANGLE in this example). Press NEXT one more time to mov e to the page f or the ne xt step . In this âÂÂne xt step âÂÂ, move â° (pointer) to SA VE and press ENTER to sav e data. The corrected information is not sav ed if â° (pointer) is mov ed to SA VE and ENTER is pressed bef ore the end of correction (in the middle of the step being corrected). DV D . Adding a step in a pre viously input Bar code/Command Stac k 1. Perf orm steps 1 to 4 of â Correcting a previ- ously input Bar code/Command Stac k âÂÂ. 2. Select the step where a new step is to be inserted by pressing or . 3. Move the â° (pointer) to â INSâ by pressing or and press ENTER . ÷ This inser ts a new step bef ore the selected step and the numbers of subsequent steps are incremented b y 1. 4. Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ This initiates the Barcode/Command Stack input mode. 5. Set a step in the same way as â Setting a Barcode/Command Stac k settings â . (See page 61- 64) 6. Move the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing and press ENTER . BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 003 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 05 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 1 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 003 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 05 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 003 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 004 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Bar code/Command stac k setting
67 En Advanced Operations DV D . Methods of Gr ouping Grouping some Bar code/Command Stacks A group can be formed with several Barcode/Command Stacks , and more than one group can be formed and stored. When e x ecuting a group of commands, select a group from the stored groups and e xecute them either consecutiv ely or step by step . It is also possib le to divide or delete a group . The f ollowing procedure consists of inserting a group delimiter after a group of barcode commands. Inserting a group 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displayed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press the ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stac k Input screen is display ed when the ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. ÷ Mak e sure that the â° (pointer) is located at the step im- mediately f ollowing the last entry . 5. Press NEXT . ÷ The input screen f or the first step of the ne xt Barcode/ Command Stac k group appears. ÷ The Barcode/Command Stacks of the ne xt group can be set from here. Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stac ks 1 2 3 4 5 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 002: 001 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT
68 En DV D . Switching the Bar code/ Command Stac k gr oup 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press the ENTER . ÷ The Barcode Input screen is display ed when the button is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Press PREV NEXT . ÷ Pressing NEXT switches o v er to the next g roup . ÷ Pressing PREV switches o v er to the pre vious group . DV D . Deleting a gr oup 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode Input screen is displa yed when ENTER is pressed. 2 3 1 NEXT PREV J SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/002 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 002/ 002 001 SUBTITLE 01 AUDIO 2 ANGLE 3 002 03:10000 âÂÂ15000 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stacks
69 En Advanced Operations 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Select the gr oup to be deleted b y pressing PREV NEXT . 6. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â GROUPâ on the first line b y pressing . 7. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â DEL â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction). 8. Press ENTER . ÷ This deletes the selected group . 9. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction) and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT Even if y ou have come to step 8 in the abo ve deletion proce- dure, y ou can still abor t deletion by mo ving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing the cursor button (right direction) then pressing ENTER . The deletion is entered in memor y when the SA VE â operation is performed in step 9. 7-8 4 9 5 6 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT
70 En DV D . Dividing a previousl y input gr oup 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is display ed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen is displa yed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list display appears . 5. Select the step where the existing gr oup is to be divided by pressing or . ÷ Mov e the â° (pointer) the first step of the group created by division. 5 2 3 1 4 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stacks
71 En Advanced Operations 6. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â INSâ by pressing or . 7. Press ENTER . ÷ This inser ts a vacant step bef ore the selected step and the numbers of subsequent steps are incremented b y 1. 8. Press NEXT . ÷ This divides the e xisting group at the v acant step . ÷ A new g roup is created. The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen of the first step of the newly created g roup is displa yed. 9. Mov e the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â b y pressing the cursor but- ton (right direction) and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT Even if y ou have come to step 8 in the abo ve g roup proce- dure, y ou can still abor t g roup by mo ving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing then pressing ENTER . The group is entered in memory when the SA VE â operation is perf or med in step 9. 6 8 7 9 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 003 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 004 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 002: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 002: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT
72 En DV D . Joining tw o Barcode/ Command Stac k groups 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is display ed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen is displa yed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y of the last group that was input is dis- play ed. 5. Change the group with PREV . ÷ Mov e the â° (pointer) to the next step of the pre viously input number with or . This becomes the divi- sion point. 2 3 1 4 5 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004/004 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME 000000 SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004/004 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 004 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 âÂÂ23 â â â 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stacks
73 En Advanced Operations 6. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â DEL â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction). 7. Press ENTER . ÷ This deletes the group delimiter and joins the current group with the ne xt group to it. ÷ The numbers of the groups after the current g roup are decremented by 1. 8. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction) and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT Even if y ou hav e come to step 7 in the above g roup Joining, you can still abort group by mo ving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ b y pressing the cursor button (right direction) then press- ing ENTER . The group is entered in memory when the SA VE â operation is perf or med in step 8. 7 6 8 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 004 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 âÂÂ23 â â â 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 003 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 âÂÂ23 â â â 003 PLA Y 004 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 005 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 003 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 â 23 â â â 003 PLA Y 004 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 005 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT
74 En DV D . Recalling/ex ecuting barcode commands in memory T o excute a bar code command group: Load the disc to excute them. 1. Press RECALL . 2. Press PREV . 3. Input the number of the command gr oup to be recalled/executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT twice. ÷ This recalls and ex ecutes the selected group. T o execute steps in a command gr oup: Load the disc to excute them. 1. Press RECALL . 2. Press PREV . 3. Input the number of the command gr oup to be recalled/executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT . ÷ T o re-enter the group number , press PREV . 5. Input the number of the step to begin e x- ecution using the numeric b uttons. 6. Press NEXT . ÷ This recalls and ex ecutes the selected and subsequent steps in the selected group . NO TES: ÷ Pressing REPEAT repeats the e xecution of the set GROUP . ÷ If you press STEP in place of NEXT in step 6 above, command steps will be ex ecuted step by step . After one step has been executed, press NEXT to advance to the next step. Pressing PREV allows you to return to the previous step. Using a Bar code/Command Stacks BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 Switching the command group Recall screen Recall screen Switching the command step NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla y er control panel.
75 En Advanced Operations DV D . Recalling/executing previously input barcode/command stack from the list view 1. Press RECALL . 2. Press DISPLAY . ÷ This displa ys a list of commands. 3. Select a gr oup by pressing PREV NEXT . ÷ Select the command group containing the command(s) to be e x ecuted. 4. Select a step b y pressing . ÷ Select the command step to begin e xecution with. If the command step number is left to âÂÂ001â on this step , the commands in the entire command group will be executed. 5. Press PLAY or STEP . ÷ Pressing PLAY starts consecutive ex ecution. ÷ Pressing STEP star ts step-by-step e xecution. Some titles may not be ab le to be recalled and e x ecuted. Example) The search command cannot be e xecuted with a title that does not show the chapter , time and similar inf or mation on the screen or with a disc that is not permitted to use the search function. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 003 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 â 129000 003 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008
76 En The video blac kboard function of this unit allows y ou to dra w characters and pictures just lik e on a blac kboard. The drawn characters and pictures can be displa yed alone or superim- posed on the disc video . DV D . Operation using the mouse or ke yboard Connect the PS/2 mouse or PS/2 ke yboard to the mouse/ keyboard connector of this unit. (See page 84) DV D . Activ ating the blac kboard function T urn the power on. Clic k the right button an ytime to display the Blac kboard screen. Blackboar d screen ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT DV D . Inputting character s 1. Move the cur sor to ABC and c lick the mouseâ s left button. 2. Move the cur sor to the position where y ou want to input the first c haracter . ÷ The cursor changes to the I cursor in the area where character input is possib le. 3. Click the mouseâ s left button. ÷ â _â brinks. Y ou can input a character from this point. 4. Input a character . ÷ Characters can also be input from the PC k eyboard pro- vided that this is connected. The PC ke yboard can input characters by distinguishing the numerals , symbols and uppercase/lowercase alpha- bet as well as carriage returns. 5. Click the mouseâ s right button after com- pleting the input. ÷ The Blackboard screen is displa yed again. ÷ T o sav e the characters, use the procedure in â Saving characters or pictures â on page 78. Character Input/Output drawing (DVD video blackboard) 1-3 4 5 P IONEER_ ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT P IONEER_ 1 2 1 2 NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla yer control panel. Input âÂÂPIONEER â â Yâ cable
77 En Advanced Operations DV D . Using the drawing tools ÷ Use the mouse â s left button to select icon below . (LINE):Draws a straight line. (BO X): This tool can be switched b y click- ing to a tool for dra wing a line-en- closed rectangle, solid-painted rectangle or a rectangle the out- side of which is painted. : Paints in inside. : Paints in outside. (R OUND): This tool can be switched b y clic king to a tool f or drawing an ellipse, solid-painted ellipse or an ellipse the outside of which is painted. : Paints in inside. : Paints in outside. : This tool can be switched b y clic king to a tool for dra wing a thin, medium or thick line. : Each clic k switches the color to Red, Blue, Green, Y ellow , White, Blac k, Gray or Purple. : Saves the drawn picture. (See page 78 for the saving method.) : Cancels the drawn picture. Eac h click cancels the last drawn picture. Press with the mouse for more than 1 second to clear the entire drawing in the screen. : Clic k the mouse to exits the current screen . NO TE ÷ The Direction buttons ( ) and ENTER on the remote control unit can also be used f or the abov e op- eration. ÷ The blac kboard function will not function in a disc âÂÂs men u screen. DV D . Drawing a picture Press the mouse â s left button at the point you w ant to star t dra wing and mov e the cursor (without releasing the mouse button). (This operation is ref erred to as dragging.) 1. Select a drawing tool. 2. Move cur sor to the drawing start position. 3. Drag. ÷ A picture is dra wn as you mo ve the cursor . 4. Release finger from the mouse. ÷ Dra w other pictures by repeating the abo ve. ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT 1 2 3 4 ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT Dra wing tool
78 En DV D . Saving c haracter s or pictures 1. Click SA VE on the screen. ÷ The Sav e screen is display ed. 2. Display the video where y ou want to begin displaying the object or te xt. ÷ â INâ blinks . ÷ Display the video b y controlling the play er control icon at the bottom left of the screen. 3. Click SA VE on the screen. ÷ This sets the display start position. ÷ â OUTâ starts to blink. 4. Display the video where y ou want to stop displaying the object or te xt. ÷ Display the video b y controlling the play er control icon at the bottom left of the screen. 5. Click the A UTO DISP on the screen. ÷ This sets the display end position. ÷ The characters or pictures are sa ved in the pla yer â s memor y . ÷ The group and step where they are sa ved are shown. 6. Click EXIT . ÷ The Blackboard screen is displa yed again. NO TE: ÷ By saving the characters and dra wing without playing a disc, the drawing can be displayed in a desired scene. (See page 80-81 for executing method.) ÷ Stored data is not erased e ven if po wer to the unit is s witched OFF . NO TE: ÷ With a D VD , the star t point (IN) and end point (OUT) can be set only within the same title. The time displa y of the IN and OUT points will be shown in ( ) or [ ]. In some cases the image may not be sa ved e xactly as they are in the original. ÷ The Direction buttons ( ) and ENTER on the remote control unit can also be used f or the abov e operation. DV D . Details on the blac kboar d Displa y mode (See next page) RED : Red BLU : Blue GRN : Green YL W : Y ellow WHT : White BLK : Blac k GR Y : Gr ay PUR : Purple 1 : Line width fine 2 : Line width medium 3 : Line width thick i : Painted inside o : Painted outside L : Line B: B o x R : Round Displa y end min.sec. Displa y star t min.sec. Displa y title 1 6 5 2-4 ABC COLR UNDO EXIT SA VE A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE GROUP 001 NEXT DISPLA Y AREA IN OUT GROUP 001 001 Râ 3, RED 02-015. 29~015. 36 A A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE GROUP 001 001 Râ 3, RED 02-015. 29~015. 36 A A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE GROUP 001 001 Râ 1, YL W 02-002. 41~032. 06 A 002 B â 3, GRN 01-027. 30~035. 08 A Character Input/Output dra wing (D VD video blac kboar d)
79 En Advanced Operations DV D . T o change the display mode 1. Move the cursor to the line y ou want to c hang e and clic k the left button of the mouse. 2. Move the cursor to A UTO DISP and c lick the left b utton of the mouse. Indicator display on the right edge of screen A : Displayed at the same time as the disc pla yback, from the set star t point through the set end point. A S : The video becomes a still image at the set start point. â A S : The video becomes a still image immediately be- f ore the set star t point. No display : The set characters or pictures are not displa yed. Pressing ENTER in this section star ts drawing. S : The video becomes the still image at the set star t point b ut objects are not display ed. Press ENTER on the remote control unit to star t pic- ture dra wing. â½ : The â½ mar k is display ed on the top right of the screen during playbac k. Pressing ENTER in this section star ts drawing. â½ S : The video becomes a still image , in which only the â½ mark is display ed, at the set start point. Press ENTER on the remote control unit to star t pic- ture dra wing. Meaning of display ed symbols â Sâ stands f or âÂÂStill image â and pla ys a still image at the IN point. â A â stands f or âÂÂA uto display â , which displa ys drawing in the screen set with A UTO DISP . â â½â displays only the â½ marking. âÂÂâÂÂâ displays a still image immediately bef ore the start of the IN point. DV D . P encil tool/freehand drawing Clic k the right button of the mouse in the video blac kboard input screen to turn the pointer into the pencil tool. Freehand dra wing is possible b y holding the mouse â s left button. Clicking the right button again displa ys the Blackboard screen. T o change the color or line width, select COLR or the tool on the Blackboard screen. (See â Dra wing T ools â on page 77.) NO TE: ÷ Pictures can be dra wn using the pencil tool but the y can- not be sa ved later . GROUP 001 001 R â 3, RED 02-015. 29~015. 36 A A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE Indicator on the top of right Notes ÷ It takes time to dr aw a graphical image , so if you are using it to hide par t of the video image, the image-dra wing IN point must be set sufficiently in adv ance of the desired scene. Drawing time varies according to the type of drawn graphic and the number of dra wings. As a r ule of thumb , the dra wing time is usually in the range of 10 to 30 fr ames. ÷ If diff erent graphics are recorded in adjacent frames , they ma y not be drawn on the screen during continuous pla y- back due to dr awing speed constr aints. ÷ Operation will not be perf ormed according to the setting during frame rev erse or reverse pla yback. Dra w by dragging with the left b utton pressed.
80 En DV D . Gr ouping blac kboards Blackboards can be registered by dividing them into groups according to the disc and title to enable selectiv e use later . This makes it possible to store drawn characters and pictures in positions matching the played images. Pictures and characters comprising groups are also stored as steps. When executing the blackboards, arbitrary registered black- board groups can be selected and displayed. Groups also can be deleted. Selecting a group is done as f ollows. When â DISPLA Y AREA IN OUT â is displayed on the screen or when the â° (pointer) is display ed to the left of GR OUP , the group that you want can be selected by clicking on the NEXT or PREV displa y with the mouse. The group can be entered by selecting it and clic king on SA VE on the screen. DV D . T o select the gr oup 1. Press RECALL twice. ÷ The step section blinks . ÷ The step section should continue displa ying 000. ÷ When the step is 000, the entire group will be e x ecuted. ÷ When a step is selected, only the selected step in the group will be ex ecuted. 2. Press PREV . ÷ Group part blinks. 3. Input the number of the gr oup to be recalled/ executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT twice. ÷ This star ts ex ecution according to the selected black- board. DV D . T o ex ecute steps in a gr oup 1. Press RECALL twice. 2. Press PREV if y ou want to switc h the group. ÷ If you do not w ant to change the group , go to step 5 below . 3. Input the number of the gr oup to be recalled/ executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT . 5. Input the number of the step to begin e x- ecution using the numeric b uttons. 6. Press NEXT . ÷ This star ts ex ecution of the selected step in the selected group . ÷ The step setup is released after the step has been ex- ecuted. Gr ouping video blac kboar ds BLACKBOARD GROUP 001: 000 BLACKBOARD GROUP 001: 000 GROUP 001 001 R â 1, 02-002. 41~032. 06 A 002 B â 3 01-027. 30~035. 08 A YLW GRN Step Group Select the group Select the step NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla yer control panel.
81 En Advanced Operations DV D . Recalling/e xecuting pre viously input b lac kboar ds while observing their list 1. Press RECALL twice. 2. Press DISPLAY . ÷ This displa ys a list of commands. 3. Select a gr oup by pressing PREV NEXT . 4. Select a step b y pressing . 5. Press ENTER . NO TE Press CLEAR to clear the characters or pictures being displa yed. How e ver , characters and pictures that ha ve been set with the A UTO DISP cannot be cleared with CLEAR . Displa y of the recalled character s and pictures Characters and pictures recalled b y â Ex ecuting an entire group â are not displa yed in the order the y were registered but in or- der of the locations of the set displa y star t points. When a characters or picture is displa yed while another char acter or picture is already displa yed, the ne wly displa yed character/ picture is superimposed abov e the existing char acter/picture, and all characters/pictures are displa y ed until the last displa y end point among the set displa y end points. ÷ When pictures A and B are display ed, picture B appears after the displa y of picture A has ended. ÷ When pictures A and C are displa yed, picture C appears abov e picture A which is already displayed, and the displa y of pictures A and C ends at the picture C end point. ÷ When pictures C and D are displa yed, picture D appears abov e picture C which is already displayed, and the displa y of pictures C and D ends at the picture C end point. GROUP 001 001 R â 1, 02-002. 41~032. 06 A 002 B â 3, 01-027. 30~035. 08 A Example Time Flow (Start point) (End point) (Start point) (End point) (Start point) (End point) (Start point) (End point) YLW GRN Select the group Select the step
82 En Synchr onized use of 2 or more player s ÷ Using a single sync generator to synchronize two or more players ÷ Make sure that the terminator switch is ON on the terminal player and OFF on the other players. ÷ When applying synchronization to one play er , set the ter minator switch to ON. INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND NO TE: When you return to D VD Video playbac k after text file displa y , playback resumes from where you clic ked on the b utton. Video te xt retriev al DV D . This pla yer enab les playbac k of te xt files recorded on D VD Video discs. With the Video T ext Retriev al function, you can use the mouse to clic k on buttons displa y ed during D VD Video disc playback. Thi s provides te xt file indications corresponding to the button, either separately displa yed on-screen or superimposed over a D VD st ill image. ÷ The Video T ext Retrie val function oper ates with Video T ext Retrie v al compatible discs. It does not operate with regular D VDs that do not feature recorded text files. ÷ Video T ext Retrie val is our original format. External synchr onizing function DV D . T o tur n on this this function, set the EXTERNAL SYNC option under the AD V . SETUP menu to OFF , and then set either NTSC or P AL according to the type of disc to be play ed. Fur ther , select NTSC or P AL of the TV SYSTEM selector on the rear panel depending on the disc which is to be played. Through external input of a synchronization signal (black burst), video output signals can be synchronized with external signal s on the D VD-V7300D . (Dur ing D VD disc playbac k.) Through the use of this function, video switch timing can be matched, and switching can be done without causing picture disturbance on the TV without the need for such de vices as a TBC (Time Base Collector). NO TE: ÷ When the external synchronizing function is turned on, discs other than DVD cannot be played. ÷ Loc king to the sub carrier element of the blac k burst signal will not occur . ÷ During the approximately 5 seconds needed for locking to the external synchronizing signal, there will be video disturbance at the video output jacks. ÷ Input the external synchronizing signal before playback of the DVD disc. Synchronization will not operate if input is done afte r playback is started. ÷ In cases where tw o or more D VD-V7300D units are externally syncronized and their videos are started sim ultaneously for frame-synchroniz ed playbac k, tur n off A V SYNC COMPENSA TE on the AD V . SETUP menu. The e xter nal sync function works only with DVD play: it does not work with any other operation. Welcome T o The Islands Of Everlasting Summer! Welcome T o The Islands Of Everlasting Summer! No 1 No 2 No X INPUT BLACK B URST SIGNAL â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . ON OFF ON
83 En Connection/etc. Precautions when connecting the play er This pla yerâ s Analog copy protect technology is cop y guarded. If you connect the pla yer to a TV via a VCR, or record and pla yback the contents of a disc with a VCR, the pla yback picture ma y not be nor mal. Connecting the player Ho w to displa y total hour s pla yed and po wer on time DV D . I Video CD . I CD . This unit is capable of displa ying the total play time and po wer ON time as the working condition and maintenance timing inf or mation. The pla y time and power ON time can be displa yed as de- scribed below . 1. Press and hold DISPLAY on the fr ont panel of the main unit before turning po wer ON, and press STANDBY ON . 2. The screen shows the f ollowing: 3. When an operation (pla yback fr om the re- mote, for e xample) is performed, the time information displa y disappear s and normal operation starts. NO TE ÷ As the time is measured by the CPU cloc k, the inf or mation includes an error of up to 2%. ÷ This is not capable of turning the total play time and power ON time as the working condition and maintenance timing inf or mation to 0. OPERA TING TIME POWER ON 00105:46 PLA Y 00078:13 T otal play time, which is 78 hours 13 munites in this e xample. P ower on time, which is 105 hours 46 munites in this e xample. Right Left â© â© â© ÷ Connect plugs to the terminals that match the plug âÂÂs color (white, red, yello w). ÷ Align the plug with the connector in the proper orientation and inser t, then tighten the lock screws . ÷ Align the plug properly with the tab on the connector , and press in carefully , then rotate to the right to lock. â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . ÷ Connect the TV with S-VIDEO ter minal to the S-VIDEO output terminal of this player . screw Video output Audio output Interface connector (RS-232C) S-video output External Sync input (BNC)/Video output (BNC)/ Component video output (BNC) Advanced Operations
84 En Connection of mouse and keyboard A commercially av ailable PS/2 mouse or PS/2 k e yboard can be connected to this unit â s mouse/ke yboard connector as f ollo ws . 1. T urn this unitâ s POWER off to set it to the standby mode. 2. Connect the PS/2 mouse or PS/2 keyboar d to this unitâ s mouse/keyboar d connector . 3. T urn this unitâ s PO WER ON. Connection is now complete. If you w ant to use both the mouse and ke yboard, connect them using a commercially av ailab le âÂÂY â cable. Note: ÷ The power rating of this mouse/k eyboard connector is no more than 5V 100mA. Do not use a mouse or key- board with a current drain exceeding the rating of 100mA. ÷ Cer tain commercially av ailable PS/2 mouse models , PS/ 2 ke yboard models and â Yâ cables ma y not be compat- ible with this unit. For details, please consult PIONEER technical suppor t. TV SYSTEM selector Video output changes as f ollows according to the pla yback disc â s recorded f or mat. NTSC-P AL, P AL-NTSC conversion is possib le on Video CDs. P AL-NTSC conv ersion is not possible on D VDs. When the TV SYSTEM selector is set to the A UT O position, the disc â s for mat will be output as is. When a CD or disc is not loaded, the previ- ous video output will be selected. About MOD . (Modulation) P AL Most model of the newly de veloped countdo wn P AL TV sys- tem detect 50 Hz (P AL)/60 Hz (NTSC) and automatically switch vertical amplitude, resulting in a display without vertical shrink- age . On some TVs, the picture may shrink v er tically , leaving b lack bands at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not malfunction; it is caused by the NTSC-P AL conv ersion. If your P AL TV does not hav e a V -Hold control, you ma y not be able to view NTSC disc because the picture may roll. If the TV has V -Hold control, adjust it until the picture stop rolling. Disc T ype Format D VD NTSC PA L Video CD NTSC PA L CD , No disc Output f or mat P osition of TV SYSTEM selector NTSC P A L AUTO NTSC MOD. P AL NTSC âÂÂâÂÂâ PA L PA L NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC NTSC P AL P AL NTSC P AL NTSC or P AL AUTO NTSC PAL TV SYSTEM â Yâ cable Connecting the pla yer
85 En Connection/etc. INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND TV SYSTEM Computer Connect one or the other A udio input (L, R) A udio input (monaural) Video input (pin plug) S-Video input (S) T elevision (monitor tele vision) Connect one of these three inputs Video input (BNC) Sync signal output terminal ÷ T elevision (monitor TV) ÷ Control Computer ÷ Sync Generator These instructions indicate the con- nections made when connecting this component directly to a tele vision (monitor TV) to perform disc pla yback. Connection example 1 Set this s witch â ONâ when using 1 play er, and when not con- necting any com- ponents. Set to COMPOSITE RS-232C ÷ Please also refer to the man ual for the TV (monitor TV) that y ou are connection to. Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied AC cord which fits to the household A C outlet) â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer .
86 En INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP b Pr L AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND AC IN TV SYSTEM Connect to the Component Video input ÷ The description of the component video input connectors may diff er de- pending on the TV set or monitor. ÷ If the color of the picture is thin or something wrong, adjust the color setting of the TV you are connection to . BNC cables (sold separ ately) A udio input T o SYNC generator T elevision with the component video out (monitor television) Component video input Set to COMPONENT â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . T o computer Do not connect to the component video input of the high- vision TV (Y , P B , P R ). Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied A C cord which fits to the house- hold AC outlet)
87 En Connection/etc. INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B PR L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT TV SYSTEM A V receiver with digital input for Dolby Digital. When connecting the pla yer to an amplifier with Dolby Digital in- puts. *Make this connection when using this unit with Pioneer â s VSA-E06, VSA-E07 A V amplifier . ÷ Connect this unit â s digital output PCM/ jack to the Dolby Digital input jac k of a Dolby Digital compatib le amplifier . ÷ Select whether or not to use the coaxial digital output according to the amplifier â s input jack. VIDEO IN D VD , LD , A UDIO IN PCM/ /DTS â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . ÷ Some discs may not allow digital output when this pla yer â s output down sampling is set for 96 kHz (see page 41). Connection example 2 Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied AC cord which fits to the household A C outlet)
88 En INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B PR L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND TV SYSTEM INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND TV SYSTEM A V amplifier AUDIO IN VIDEO IN ÷ Surround sound can be enjo yed with amplifiers that hav e a built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder . ÷ F or more details, ref er to the connected componentâ s operation manual ÷ Connect this pla yerâ s audio output jacks to an amplifierâ s CD , LD , A UX or other audio input jacks . (Do not connect to PHONO jacks.) ÷ Connect this play erâÂÂs video output jac k to the amplifierâÂÂs video input jac k. Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied A C cord which fits to the household A C outlet) A V amplifier Digital A udio recorder Y ou can connect to a digital audio recorder as MD ,CD-R or D A T . Digital audio input Digital audio recorder (MD play er, CD-R pla yer , or DA T pla yer , etc.) ÷ Connect this pla yerâ s coaxial digital output jacks to MD pla yer , CD-R pla yer , or DA T play er . ÷ Connect this unitâ s digital output PCM/ jac k to the digital audio recorder . NO TE When you record the Dolby Digital DVD, set [Digital Out- put] (see page 34) to [Dolby Digital 3PCM]. If [Digital Out- put] is set to [Dolby Digital] during recording Dolby Digital DVD, noise is recorded. â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the sup- plied A C cord which fits to the household AC outlet) By connecting to a regular A V amplifier or stereo amplifier , you can enjoy playback with improved sound quality . Connection example 3 Connection example 4
89 En Connection/etc. When used in wireless mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC When used in wired mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC Using a Laser Barcode Scanner (Sold Separately) Laser Barcode Scanner T o use the optional LaserBarcode Scanner (UC-V108BC or UC-V109BC) in the wired mode to transmit signals , connect the LaserBarcode scannerâ s connection cord to the play erâ s front-panel EXT .CONT jack. T o transmit barcode signals in the wireless mode, aim the re- mote control unit tow ard the play erâ s remote control signal receiver . Consult the LaserBarcode Scannerâ s Operating In- structions for details on operation. Note: ÷ During oper ations using the LaserBarcode Scanner , attempt- ing to operate the pla yer by means of the remote control unit, pla yer operating b uttons, or serial commands from a computer ma y cause malfunctions. When using the LaserBarcode Scanner in the wired mode, the remote control unit is disab led in order to pre vent error commands from the remote control unit. For this reason, it is recommended that the wired mode be used. ÷ When the pla yer is operated via barcodes , the on-screen displa ys when this play er is operated such as âÂÂPlayâ and âÂÂStopâ do not appear. ÷ When a CD or Video CD disc is loaded, barcode commands issued for LD or DVD are ignored. ÷ When a D VD is loaded, commands issued for CDs are ig- nored. 7m 30 ð 30 ð When used in wireless mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC When used in wired mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC Using a Laser Barcode Scanner (Sold Separately) Laser Barcode Scanner T o use the optional LaserBarcode Scanner (UC-V108BC or UC-V109BC) in the wired mode to transmit signals , connect the LaserBarcode scannerâ s connection cord to the play erâ s front-panel EXT .CONT jack. T o transmit barcode signals in the wireless mode, aim the re- mote control unit tow ard the play erâ s remote control signal receiver . Consult the LaserBarcode Scannerâ s Operating In- structions for details on operation. Note: ÷ During oper ations using the LaserBarcode Scanner , attempt- ing to operate the pla yer by means of the remote control unit, pla yer operating b uttons, or serial commands from a computer ma y cause malfunctions. When using the LaserBarcode Scanner in the wired mode, the remote control unit is disab led in order to pre vent error commands from the remote control unit. For this reason, it is recommended that the wired mode be used. ÷ When the pla yer is operated via barcodes , the on-screen displa ys when this play er is operated such as âÂÂPlayâ and âÂÂStopâ do not appear. ÷ When a CD or Video CD disc is loaded, barcode commands issued for LD or DVD are ignored. ÷ When a D VD is loaded, commands issued for CDs are ig- nored. 7m 30 ð 30 ð
90 En T r oubleshooting If you are wondering whether you have a breakdown, please check and find out. A slight mistake in operation can mak e you think that y ou hav e a breakdown. Fur ther more, f actors other than this pla yer can also be considered. Check the tel- e vision, the A V amplifier and the speakers, etc., that y ou use together with this pla yer . When the prob lem is not corrected, e ven after inspecting again according to the items belo w , con- tact the store where you purchased the player or the nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center . P ower does not come on. â¡ Connect the power cord to the outlet properly (page 86 - 89). Even when the disc table is c losed, it comes out. â¡ Set the disc in the disc table properly (page 16). â¡ Clean the disc (page 8). â¡ Check the region no. (page 13, 91). The screen does not appear . â¡ Check the setting of the video output selector at the rear of this pla yer with the connected video terminal (page 85, 86). â¡ Confirm that connections are correct (page 83-88). â¡ Mak e the television or A V amplifier setting, etc., to D VD pla y- back setting. Cannot play bac k. â¡ Clean the disc (page 8). â¡ Set the disc in the disc table properly (page 16). â¡ Remov e the condensation in the play er (page 8). â¡ SECAM f or mat discs cannot be pla y ed back. â¡ Inser t the disc with the proper side up. The contents of the settings disappear . â¡ When the pow er has been tur ned off due to a power outage and the power cord ha ving been pulled out while the power is turned on, the contents of the settings disappear. Make sure to pull out the pow er cord after the pow er b utton of the pla yer or the power b utton of the remote control has been pressed and the indicator has turned orange. The screen stops and the operation b uttons are not accepted. â¡ After pressing STOP , play back once more. The mark appear s on the screen. â¡ The disc prohibits that operation (page 13). The mark appear s on the screen. â¡ The pla yer prohibits that operation (page 13). Cannot use the remote contr ol. â¡ Operate within the usage r ange of the remote control. (page 16) â¡ Replace the dry cell batteries of the remote control with new ones (page 5). External synchr onizing cannot be performed. â¡ Ref er to the EXTERNAL SYNC setting in the AD V . SETUP me nu . (page 48) â¡ Check the notes under â NOTEâ for the external synchroniz- ing function. (page 82). No sound comes from the speaker s or the sound is distorted â¡ Confir m that the audio cable is properly connected (pages 83-88). â¡ Some discs prohibit 96 kHz digital output of Linear PCM audio . With these kinds of discs , ev en if the [96 kHz PCM Out] setting of [Audio 1] of the setup menu screen is set to [96 kHz], it is automatically changed to 48 kHz and output. (page 41). â¡ During playback of a DVD recorded at 96 kHz in 16:9, when [4:3 (Letter Box)] of [Video] is selected, e v en if the setting of [96 kHz PCM Out] of [Audio 1] is set to [96 kHz], it is auto- matically changed to 48 kHz and output (page 29). â¡ Clean the disc (page 8). â¡ If it has been set to the pause or slow pla yback mode, change to the playbac k mode (page 21). â¡ If the volume of the tele vision or A V amplifier , etc., has been set to â minim um â , raise the v olume. â¡ Confir m that the connector plug has been sufficiently in- ser ted and that it has not been disconnected. â¡ If the connector plug and terminal are dir ty , wipe them. The screen is extended vertically or horizon- tally . â¡ Adjust the [TV Screen] setting (page 30). There are difference in v olume between D VD and CD . â¡ This is due to the difference in the disc recording methods . The picture is distor ted or dark during D VD playbac k â¡ This play er has the cop y guard of an analog copy protect system. Some discs have a cop y prohibition signal. When those types of discs are play ed back, a condition such as lateral stripes on par t of the screen appears, but this is not a malfunction. The playbac k screen is distorted when a D VD video has been recorded on a VCR and played back on a VCR â¡ This play er has the cop y guard of an analog copy protect system. Some discs have a cop y prohibition signal and when that kind of disc is play ed back on a VCR, and recorded and play ed back on a VCR, it cannot be play ed back nor mally due to the copy guard. The television, etc., malfunctions â¡ Some tele visions with a wireless remote control function mal- function due to the remote control of this pla yer . Use them separated from this pla y er . When setup menu screen appears, a screen set to letter bo x suddenl y becomes extended vertically . â¡ When setup menu screen appears during playback in the letter box or pan & scan modes, the screen size is forcibly changed to the wide-screen mode, but this is not a malfunc- tion. (See page 30) This play er may not operate normally due to outside influ- ences such as static electricity . At such times it ma y operate normally after the po wer cord has been temporaril y unplugged and plugged in again. When the pr oblem has not been solved by this pr ocedure, consult the store where y ou purchased the play er or the nearest service station.
91 En Connection/etc. Aspect Aspect ratio ref ers to the length to height r atio of TV screens. The ratio of a normal TV is 4:3, while the ratio of a Hi-vision TV or wide TV is 16:9. This allows y ou to enjo y a picture with a wider perspectiv e. Component video output The color signal of the TV is divided into the luminance (Y) signal and the color (P B and P R) signals and then output. In this wa y mutual interference of each signal is a voided. On a TV with component input jacks , these signals are synthesized to produce the picture. P arental level This function was suggested b y parents. Parental le v el con- trol are restrictions incor porated into scenes that allow par- ents to pre vent their children from viewing them if the y desire. Dynamic range Dynamic range ref ers to the difference between the maximum and minimum le vels of the audio soundtr ack as measured in decibels (dB). Dolb y Digital The maximum 5.1 channels of audio used in the surround system (Surround Digital) f or movie theaters is digital data compressed by A C-3. For D VD discs, the digital output PCM/ jac k m ust be con- nected to the amplifier or processor â s digital input AC-3/PCM jack. Pla yback Control (PBC) This ref ers to signals recorded on a Video CD (V ersion 2.0) enabling pla yback control. Y ou can use menus recorded on discs with PBC for easy , in- teractiv e search f or desired scenes and playbac k. Y ou can also enjoy vie wing high-resolution/standard resolu- tion still images. Multi-angle When you w atch regular TV programs you are w atching the image filmed through the TV camera. Because of this, the picture is display ed on your TV from the view point of the TV camera â s position. In a TV studio the image is filmed by man y cameras at the same time . One of those images is selected by the prog ram director and transmitted to y our TV . If all the filmed images were transmitted to y our TV you would be ab le to select the camera image y ou want. Some D VD discs are recorded with the angles of all the camera â s used for filming and you can select among them when using this pla yer . These types of discs are called multi-angle discs. Multi-audio Some DVD has multi audio language. Up to eight diff erent languages (8 streams) can be recorded on a D VD disc , The multi audio function can be used to select the language of your choice. Subtitle Subtitles are language titles superimposed on movies etc. Up to 32 diff erent subtitle languages can be recorded on a D VD disc. The subtitle function can be used to select the language of your choice . Regional restriction codes (Region number) Regional restriction codes are built in to D VD pla yers and D VD discs f or each sales region. If the regional restriction codes of the D VD player does not match one of the regional restriction codes of the D VD disc, pla yback is not possible. The regional restriction code can be f ound on the rear panel of the D VD play er. The illustration below sho ws the regions and corresponding region numbers . Linear PCM This ref ers to D VD audio recording f or mat. It is the same for- mat as that of CD audio , but the sampling frequency is re- corded at 48 kHz and 96 kHz, and audio with a higher sound quality than that of a CD can be enjo y ed. DTS DTS stand f or Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround sys- tem diff erent from Dolb y Digital that has become a popular surround f or mat for movies. MPEG MPEG stand f or Moving Picture Expert Group. This is an in- ternational standard for compression of moving images . On some D VDs, digittal audio has been compressed and recorded in this f or mat. PCM PCM stands f or Pulse Code Modulation and is digital audio . The digital audio of CD or DVD discs is PCM. 5.1 ch This ref ers to multi-channel audio with a special low sound range 0.1 channel added to the fiv e channels of front left/r ight, center and rear left/right. It is used by the Dolby Digital and DTS surround systems. T erms DOLBY D I G I T A L
92 En/Fr Specifications General System .............................................................. D VD system and Compact Disc digital audio system P ower requirements ........................ AC 220-240 V , 50/60 Hz P ower consumption ....................................................... 15 W P ower consumption in standby mode .......................... 0.8W W eight ......................................................................... 4.5 kg Dimensions ....................... 210 (W) x 412 (D) x 119 (H) mm (Not including protruding cables, etc.) Operating temperature .................................. 5 ð C to 35ð C Operating humidity .... No more than 85% (no condensation) Video Output Output lev el ................................................................ 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠when loaded, synchronous negative) Jac ks .................................................................... BNC, RCA S-Video Output Y (luminance) - Output le vel ............................. 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Output le vel .............................. 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Component video Output Y - Output level ....................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC P B - Output level ................................... 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC P R - Output level ................................... 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC S/N ratio ..................................................... more than 60 dB Horizontal resolution ..................................... more than 500 External synchr onizing input Input signal lev el ................................................. Black burst 0.3 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC x 2 (loop through) A udio Output Output lev el During audio output .................. 200 mVr ms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) Number of channels ............................................................ 2 F requency response .......... 4 Hz to 22 kHz (D VD fs: 48 kHz) 4 Hz to 20 kHz (CD) S/N ratio ......................................................... 115 dB (EIAJ) Dynamic range ................................................. 98 dB (EIAJ) W ow and flutter .............. ñ0.001% W . PEAK or lower (EIAJ) Other T erminals Coaxial digital output .............................................. RCA jack Communication interf ace .............................. D-SUB , 15-pin Accessories Audio cord .......................................................................... 1 Video cord .......................................................................... 1 AC cord .............................................................................. 2 Remote control unit ............................................................ 1 AA (R6P) dry cell batteries ................................................. 2 Laser barcode sheet .......................................................... 1 Operating Instructions ........................................................ 1 NO TES: ÷ All values listed in these specifications are standard values. ÷ The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. Caractéristiques techniques Généralités Syst è me ........................ D VD et Compact Disc Digital Audio Alimentation ......................................... 220-240 V , 50/60 Hz Consommation .............................................................. 15 W Consommation en veille ............................................... 0,8 W Poids ........................................................................... 4,5 kg Dimensions ............................... 210 (W) x 412 (P) x 119 (H) (Non compris les parties saillantes, c âbles, etc.) T emp é rature de fonctionnement ..................... 5 ðC à35 ðC Humidit é ambiante .... Inf érieure à85% (sans condensation) Sorties vidéo Niveau de sortie .......... 1 Vc-c (75 Ohms, n é gatif synchrone) Prises ................................................................... BNC , RCA Sorties S-vidéo Niveau de sortie de la luminance (Y) ........ 1 Vc-c (75 Ohms) Niveau de sortie de la chrominance (C) ............... 286 mVc-c (75 Ohms) Sortie des vidéo component Niveau de sor tie de Y ................... 1,0 Vc-c (75 Ohms) BNC Niveau de sortie de P B .................. 0,7 Vc-c (75 Ohms) BNC Niveau de sortie de P R .................. 0,7 Vc-c (75 Ohms) BNC Rapport signal/bruit ........................................ plus de 60 dB D é finition horizontale ........................................ plus de 500 Entrée de synchronisation e xterne Niveau du signal d â entré e ...................................... Salv e noir 0,3 Vp-p (75 â¦) BNC x 2 (en boucle) Sortie audio Niveau de sortie Niveau de sortie num é rique ...... 200 mV eff. (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Nombre de voies ................................................................. 2 R é ponse en fr é quence ... 4 Hz à22 kHz (Fs de D VD: 48 kHz) 4 Hz à20 kHz (CD) Rappor t signal/br uit ......................................... 115 dB(EIAJ) Dynamique ........................................................ 98 dB(EIAJ) T aux de pleurage et de scintillement ............ ñ0,001% cr ê te, pond ér é , ou moins (EIAJ) Autres prises Sor tie coaxiale .............................................................. RCA Interf ace de communication ................... D-SUB, 15 broches Accessoires Cordon audio ..................................................................... 1 Cordon vid é o ...................................................................... 1 Cordon d â alimentation ........................................................ 2 T él écommande .................................................................. 1 Piles s èches AA/R6P ......................................................... 2 Feuilles de barres codes laser ........................................... 1 Mode d â emploi .................................................................... 1 Remarque: ÷ T outes les valeurs indiqu ées dans ces car act é ristiques tech- niques sont des valeurs standards . ÷ Les car act éristiques et la pr ésentation peuvent ê tre modifi é es sans avis pr é alable àfin d â amé lior ation. Français
93 Ge/It Connection/etc. T echnisc he Daten Allgemeines System ...................................................... D VD-System und digitales Compact Disc-Audiosystem Stromversorgung ................. 220 - 240 V W echselspannung, 50/60 Hz Leistungsaufnahme ....................................................... 15 W Leistungsaufnahme im Bereitschaftsmodus ................ 0,8 W Gewicht ....................................................................... 4,5 kg Abmessungen ..................... 210x 412 x 119 mm (B x T x H) (Ausschlie àlich hervorstehender Kabel us w .) Betriebstemperatur ...................................... 5 ð C bis 35ð C Luftfeuchtigkeit bei Betrieb .............................. 85% maximal (ohne Kondensationsbildung) Video-Ausgang A usgangspegel ...... 1 Vs-s (75 ⦠, negative Synchronisation) Anschlu àbuchsen .................................. BNC, RCA-Buchsen S-Video-A usgang Y (Leuchtdichte) - A usgangspegel ................... 1 Vs-s (75 â¦) C (F arbsignal) - Ausgangspegel ................ 286 mVs-s (75 ⦠) K omponentensignal-Videoausgang Y - A usgangspegel ................................ 1 Vs-s (75 ⦠) BNC P B - Ausgangspegel ............................. 0,7Vs-s (75 ⦠) BNC P R - A usgangspegel ............................. 0,7Vs-s (75 ⦠) BNC Signal/Rauschabstand ................................. mehr als 60 dB Horizontalaufl ö sung ......................................... mehr als 500 Eingang für externe Sync hronisation Eingangssignalpegel ....................................... Schwarzburst 0,3 Vs-s (75 â¦) BNC x 2 (durchgeschleift) A udio-Ausgang A usgangspegel Bei A udio-Ausgabe .................. 200 mVr ms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) Anzahl der Kan ä le ............................................................... 2 F requenzgang .................. 4 Hz bis 22 kHz (D VD fs: 48 kHz) 4 Hz bis 20 kHz (CD) Signal/Rauschabstand ................................... 115 dB (EIAJ) Dynamikbereich ............................................... 98 dB (EIAJ) To n h ö henschwankungen ....................... ñ0,001% W . PEAK oder niedriger (EIAJ) Andere Anschlüsse K oaxialer Digital-A usgangsanschlu à................ RCA-Buchse K ommunikations-Schnittstelle ....... 15polige D-SUB-Buchse Zubehör Audiokabel ......................................................................... 1 Videokabel ......................................................................... 1 Netzkabel ........................................................................... 2 Fernbedienungseinheit ...................................................... 1 T rockenz ellenbatter ien AA (R6P) ....................................... 2 Laser-Strichcodeblatt ......................................................... 1 Bedienungsanleitung ......................................................... 1 Hinweis ÷ Bei den obigen Angaben handelt es sich um die Standardwer te. ÷ Die technischen Daten und das Design dieses Produkts k ö nnen aus Gr ü nden der Weiterentwic klung ohne vorherige Ank ü ndigung ge ä ndert werden. Dati tecnici Generali Sistema .................................... D VD e audio digitale per CD Alimentazione ....................... A c.a. a 220 â 240 V , 50/60 Hz Consumo ....................................................................... 15 W Consumo nel modo di attesa ...................................... 0,8 W P eso ............................................................................ 4,5 kg Dimensioni ..... 210x 412 x 119 (L x P x A) senza protrusioni T emperatura di la voro ................................... Da 5 ð C a 35 ð C Umidit àdi lavoro ........... Non pi ù dell â 85%, senza condensa Uscite video Liv ello di uscita ............. 1 Vp-p (75 ohm, Negativ o sincrono) Prese .................................................................... BNC , RCA Uscite S-video Y (luminanza) â liv ello di uscita ................... 1 Vp-p (75 ohm) C (colore) â liv ello di uscita .................. 286 mVp-p (75 ohm) Uscite video componente Y â livello di uscita ............................ 1 Vp-p (75 ohm), BNC P B â livello di uscita ......................... 0,7Vp-p (75 ohm), BNC P R â livello di uscita ......................... 0,7Vp-p (75 ohm), BNC Rappor to S/R ...................................................... oltre 60 dB Risoluzione orizzontale ......................................... pl ù di 500 Ingresso esterno di sincronizzazione Liv ello del segnale in ingresso ...................... A raffiche nero 0,3 Vp-p (75ohm) BNC x 2 (anello passante) Uscita audio Liv ello di uscita A udio ........................................ 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Numero di canali ................................................................. 2 Risposta in frequenza ............................... da 4 Hz a 22 kHz (freq. campionamento D VD: 48 kHz) da 4 Hz a 20 kHz (CD) Rappor to S/R ................................................. 115 dB (EIAJ) Gamma dinamica ............................................. 98 dB (EIAJ) W ow & flutter ............... ñ0,001% a vattaggio di picco (EIAJ) Altri terminali Uscita digitale coassiale ..................................... Presa RCA Interf accia di comunicazione ....................... D-SUB a 15 pin Accessori Cavo audio ......................................................................... 1 Cavo video ......................................................................... 1 Cavo di alimentazione ........................................................ 2 T elecomando ...................................................................... 1 Batterie a secco AA (R6P) ................................................. 2 F oglio con codice a barre al laser ...................................... 1 Instruzioni per l â uso ............................................................ 1 Note ÷ T utti i valori elencati in questi dati tecnici sono v alori stand- ard. ÷ Il design ed i dati tecnici di questo prodotto sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso. Deutsch Italiano
94 Sp Especificaciones Generalidades Sistema .................................................... Sistema de D VD y sistema de audio digital de disco compacto Alimentaci ó n ................................... CA 220-240 V , 50/60 Hz Consumo ....................................................................... 15 W Consumo en el modo de espera .................................. 0,8 W Peso ............................................................................ 4,5 kg Dimensiones ................ 210 (An) x 412 (Prof) x 119 (Al) mm (Sin incluir cables que sobresalgan, etc.) T emperatura de funcionamiento ................... 5 ð C a 35ð C Humedad de funcionamiento ..................... No m á s del 85% (sin condensaci ó n) Salida de vÃÂdeo Nivel de salida .......... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠, sincronizaci ó n negativ a) T omas .................................................................. BNC , RCA Salida de S vÃÂdeo Y (luminancia) - Niv el de salida ....................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Niv el de salida ......................... 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Salida de Component vÃÂdeo Y - Nivel de salida ................................ 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠), BNC P B - Nivel de salida ............................ 0,7 Vp-p (75 ⦠), BNC P R - Nivel de salida ............................ 0,7 Vp-p (75 â¦), BNC Relaci ó n se ñ ala a ruide ...................... m ó s de 60 dB (EIAJ) Definici ó n horizontal ........................................... m á s de 500 Entrada de sincronización e xterna Nivel de se ñal de entrada ............................... R á faga negra 0,3 Vp-p (75 â¦) BNC x 2 (conexi ón derivada) Salida de audio Nivel de salida Durante la salida de audio ....... 200 mVr ms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) N ú mero de canales ............................................................. 2 Respuesta de frecuencia .... 4 Hz a 22 kHz (D VD fs: 48 kHz) 4 Hz a 20 kHz (CD) Relaci ó n se ñ ala a ruido ................................. 115 dB (EIAJ) Gama din á mica ................................................ 98 dB (EIAJ) Fluctuaci ó n y tr é molo ....... ñ0,001% W . PEAK menos (EIAJ) Otros terminales Salida digital coaxial ........................................... T oma RCA Interf az de comunicaci ó n .................... D-SUB, 15 contactos Accesorios Cable de audio ................................................................... 1 Cable de v àdeo ................................................................... 1 Cable de alimentaci ó n ....................................................... 2 Mando a distancia .............................................................. 1 Pilas secas AA (R6P) ......................................................... 2 Hoja de c ódigo de barra l á ser ............................................ 1 Manual de instrucciones .................................................... 1 ÷ T odos los valores listados en estas especificaciones son valores est á ndar . ÷ Las especificaciones y el dise ño de este producto est á n sujetos a cambios sin pre vio aviso con motiv os de mejoras. Español
95 En Connection/etc.
<99K00JF0G00> Printed in Japan/ Impr imé au Japon <DRB1268-A> Information about this product ÷ The German, French, Itarian and Spanish v ersions of this Operating Instructions are in PDF format at the web site below . ÷ Les versions allemande , française, italienne et espagnole de ce mode dâÂÂemploi sont disponib les en f or mat PDF sur le site Internet ci-dessous. ÷ V ersionen dieser Bedienungsanleitung in deutscher, fr anzösischer , italienischer und spanischer Sprache stehen im PDF- Format beim unten angegebenen W eb Site zur V erfügung. ÷ Le versioni in tedesco , francese, italiano e spagnolo di queste istruzioni per lâÂÂuso sono disponibili nel formato PDF al sito web sotto . ÷ Las v ersiones española, alemana, francesa e italiana de estas instrucciones de utilización se encuentran disponibles en formato PDF en el sitio de la telaraña mostr ado a continuación. http://www .pioneer -eur . com PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153 -8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONIC [EUROPE] N.V. Multimedia Division: PIONEER House, Hollybush Hill STOKE POGES, SLOUGH SL2 4QP UK TEL: 44-1-753-789-789 FAX: 44-1-753-789-880 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA Pty Ltd: www.pioneeraus.com.au
2 En IMPOR T ANT FOR USE IN THE UNITED KINGDOM The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the f ollowing code: blue: neutral bro wn: live If the plug provided is unsuitable for your sock et outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug fitted. The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must not be inser ted into any 13 amp soc ket as this can result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor of the distribution panel should be provided with 13 amp fuse . As the col- ours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance ma y not correspond with coloured marking identifying the ter minals in your plug, proceed as follo ws: The wire which is coloured blue m ust be connected to the terminal which is mar ked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is mar ked with the letter L or coloured red. Do not connect either wire to the earth ter- minal of a three pin plug. NO TE After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cov er in the plug must be replaced with a fuse cov er which corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base of the plug or the word that is embossed on the base of the plug, and the appliance must not be used without a fuse cover . If lost, replacement fuse cov ers can be obtained from your dealer . This appliance is rated approv ed to B.S . 1362 A.S.T .A. should be used. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of suffi- cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION IMPOR T ANT CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilater al triangle is intended to aler t the user to the presence of im- portant operating and maintenance (ser vicing) in- structions in the literature accompanying the appli- ance. Bij dit product zijn batterijen geleverd. W anneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA.
3 En/Fr The stand-by/ ON s witch is secondary connected and therefore,does not separate the unit fr om mains power in standby position. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRàLING VED àBNING UNDGàUDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRàLNING NÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STRàLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT NÃÂKYVàJA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. ÃÂLàKA TSO SÃÂTEESEN. VRW1699 IMPORT ANT CA UTION This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remov e any co vers or at- tempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The follo wing caution label appear on the player . Location: On the bonnet of the player This product complies with the Low V oltage Directiv es (73/ 23/EEC) . EMC Directives (89/336/EEC , 92/31/EEC) and CE Ma rking Directi ve (93/68/EEC). Australian C-Tick W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CONSUL T WITH THE COMP ANY SALES REPRESENT A- TIVE. âÂÂUSE ONL Y SAFETY LICENCED PO WER SUP- PL Y CORD. â A CERTIFIED PO WER SUPPL Y CORD IS T O BE USED WITH THIS EQ UIPMENT . FOR A RA TED CURRENT UP T O 6 A, A TYPE NO T LIGHTER THAN H05VV -F 3G O .75 mm 2 SHALL BE USED . The generation of Acoustial Noise Is Less Than 70 dB. (ISO 7779/DIN 45635) IMPOR T ANT A TTENTION Ce produit renferme une diode àlaser d'une catégorie supérieure à1. Pour garantir une sécurité constante, ne pas retirer les couvercles ni essayer d'accéder àl'intérieur de l'appareil. Pour toute réparation, s'adresser àun personnel qualifié. La note suiv ante se trouve sur v otre lecteur . Emplacement : Sur le couvercle du lecteur Ce produit est conf orme àla directive relative aux appareils basse tension (73/23/CEE), aux directiv es relarives àla compatibilité électromagnétique (89/336/CEE,92/31/CEE) et àla directiv e CE relative aux marquages (93/68/CEE). ATTENTION: AFIN DE PREVENIR TOUT RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE OU DâÂÂINCENDIE, NE P AS EXPOSER CET APP AREIL A L'HUMIDITE NI A LA PLUIE. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS àTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR àPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT N àKYV àJA N àKYM ÃÂTT àMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. àLàKA TSO S àTEESEN. VRW1699 CONSUL TER UN A GENT COMMERCIAL DE LA SOCIETE. âÂÂNâÂÂUTILISER QUâÂÂUN CORDON DâÂÂALIMENT A TION GARANTISSANT LA SECURITEâÂÂ. UN CORDON DâÂÂALIMENT A TION HOMOLOGUE DOIT ETRE UTILISE A VEC CET APP AREIL. POUR UN COURANT NOMINAL DE JUSQUâÂÂA 6 A, IL F A UT UTILISER UN TYPE DE CORDON QUI NE SOIT P AS INFERIEUR A H05VV -F 3G 0,75 mm 2 OU H05VVH2-F 3G 0,75 mm 2. La génération de bruit de fond acoustique est inférieure à70 dB. [ISO 7779/DIN45635] L âÂÂinterrupteur V eille/ON est àraccordement secondaire et il ne coupe donc pas totalement lâÂÂappareil de lâÂÂalimentation secteur sur la position de veille. Français
4 Ge/It WICHTIG V ORSICHT Dieses Gerät enthält eine Laserdiode mit einer höheren Klasse als 1. Um einen stets sicheren Betrieb zu gewährleisten, weder irgendwelche Abdeckungen entf er nen, noch versuchen, sich zum Geräteinneren Zugang zu verschaff en. Alle W ar tungsarbeiten sollten qualifizier tem Kunden- dienstpersonal überlassen werden. Die folgenden W arnungsetiketten sind am D VD-Spieler angebracht. Lage: Auf der Haube des Pla yers Dieses Produkt entspricht den Niederspannungsrichtlinien (73/ 23/EC), EMV -Richtlinien (89/336/EEC , 92/31/EEC) und den CE-Markierungsr ichtlinien (93/68/EEC). W ARNUNG: UM EINEN BRAND ODER STR OMSCHLAG ZU VERMEIDEN, DIESES GERÃÂT NICHT REGEN ODER FEUCHTIGKEIT A USSETZEN. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS ÃÂTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT N ÃÂKYV àJA N ÃÂKYM ÃÂTT ÃÂM ÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. ÃÂL àKA TSO S ÃÂTEESEN. VRW1699 IMPORT ANTE PRECA UZIONE Questo prodotto contiene un diodo al laser di classe superiore alla classe1. P er motivi di sicurezza, non smontare i coperchi e non procedere ad interventi sulle par ti inter ne. P er qualsiasi r iparazione rivolgersi a personale qualificato . La nota seguente si tro va. Ubicazione: Sul comperchio del lettore Questo prodotto è conforme alla direttiva sul basso voltaggio (73/23/CEE), alle direttiv e EMC (89/336/CEE,92/ 31/CEE) e alla direttiva sul marchio CE (93/68/CEE). AVVERTENZA: PER EVIT ARE IL RISCHIO DI FIAMME O SCOSSE ELETTRICHE, NON ESPORRE QUEST O APP ARECCHIO ALLA PIOGGIA O ALL 'UMIDITàCLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS àTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR àPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TT AESSA AL TISTUT N àKYV àJA N àKYM ÃÂTT àMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. àLàKA TSO S àTEESEN. VRW1699 CONSUL T ARE IL RAPPRESENT ANTE DELLA COMP A GNIA. âÂÂUSARE SOL T ANTO IL CA VO DI ALIMENT AZIONE BREVETT A T O PER LA SICUREZZA. â CON QUEST O APP ARECCHIO SI DEVE USARE UN CA V O DI ALIMENT AZIONE CERTIFICA TO . PER UNA CORRENTE NOMINALE FINO A 6 A, DEVE ESSERE USA T O UN TIPO NON PIàLEGGER O DI H05VV -F 3G 0,75 mm 2 O H05VVH2- F 3G 0,75 mm 2 . La generazione di rumore acustico è inferiore a 70 dB. (ISO 7779/DIN45635) L âÂÂinterruttore di attesa/accensione (ON) è collegato in modo secondario e perciò nella posizione di attesa non separa lâÂÂunitàdallâÂÂalimentazione della rete. âÂÂA USSCHLIESSLICH EIN DEN GEL TENDEN SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN ENTSPRECHENDES NETZKABEL VER WENDEN. â DIESES GERÃÂT MUSS ÃÂBER EIN DEN GEL TENDEN SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN ENTSPRECHENDES NETZKABEL AN D AS STROMNETZ ANGESCHLOSSEN WERDEN. BEI EINEM NENNSTROM V ON MAXIMAL 6 A MUSS EINE NETZKABELGARNITUR V ON MINDESTENS H05VV -F 3 G 0,75 mm2 ODER H05VVH2-F 3 G 0,75 mm2 VER WENDET WERDEN. Der Betriebsgeräuschpegel beträgt weniger als 70 dB [ISO 7779/DIN 45635]. Der Bereitschafts-/Ein-Schalter ist sekundär angeschlossen, und trennt das Gerät in der Bereitschaftsstellung nicht v om Stromnetz. Deutsch Italiano
5 Sp/En IMPORT ANTE PRECA UCIÃÂN Este producto contiene un diodo de láser de clase superior a 1. Par a mantener la seguridad apropiada, no quite ninguna tapa ni trate de acceder al interior del aparato . ConfÃÂe todo el mantenimiento a personal técnico cualificado . En su aparato se han aplicado las siguientes etiquetas precautorias: Ubicación: En la cubier ta del reproductor Este producto cumple con la Directiv a de Bajo V oltaje (73/ 23/CEE), Directivas EMC (89/336/CEE, 92/31/CEE) y Directiv a de Marcaci ón CE (93/68/CEE). AD VERTENCIA: P ARA EVIT AR INCENDIOS Y DESCARGAS ELÃÂCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE AP ARA T O A LA LLUVIA NI A LA HUMED AD . CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DRW1995-A CAUTION : VORSICHT : ADV ARSEL : V ARNING : V ARO! : VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIA TION WHEN OPEN. A VOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE ÃÂFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN! SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR àLING VED àBNING UNDG àUDS àTTELSE FOR STR ÃÂLING. SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR àLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR àPPNAD BETRAKT A EJ STR àLEN. A VA TTAESSA AL TISTUT N àKYV àJA N àKYM ÃÂTT àMÃÂLLE LASERSA TEIL YLLE. àLàKA TSO S àTEESEN. VRW1699 CONSUL TE AL REPRESENT ANTE DE VENT AS DE LA COMP AÃÂÃÂA. "UTILICE SOLAMENTE EL CABLE DE ALIMENT ACIÃÂN APR OBADO Y SEGURO". CON ESTE EQUIPO DEBERàUTILIZARSE UN CABLE DE ALIMENT ACIÃÂN CER TIFICADO. P ARA UNA CORRIENTE NOMINAL DE HAST A 6 A DEBERàUTILIZARSE UNO CUY O TIPO NO SEA MÃÂS LIGERO QUE EL H05VV -F3G DE 0,75 mm2 O EL H05VVH2- F3G DE 0,75 mm 2 . La generación de ruido acústico es inf erior a 70 dB. (ISO 7779/DIN45635) El interruptor de alimentación en espera/encendido está conectado en secundario y , por lo tanto, no desconecta la unidad de la toma de alimentación cuando está en la posición de alimentación en espera. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know ho w to oper ate y our model proper ly . After y ou ha v e fin- ished reading the instructions, put them a w a y in a saf e place f or future reference . ⢠This pla yer is not suitab le for commercial use . Bef ore using Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know ho w to operate your model properly . After you hav e finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. Chec k Accessories Audio cord ........................................................................... 1 Video cord ........................................................................... 1 AC cord ............................................................................... 2 (Europian model) (UK model) Remote control unit ............................................................. 1 Batteries (AA/R6P) .............................................................. 2 Laser barcode sheet ........................................................... 1 Operating Instructions ......................................................... 1 Inser ting batteries into the remote contr ol While pressing the bac k cover , pull out in the direction indicated by the arr ow and insert R6P size dry cell batteries. ÷ Make sure to match the plus ( ) and minus (â ) polarity guides in the batteries with the marks inside the batter y compar t- ment. Note ÷ Do not mix old and ne w batter ies. ÷ Ev en batter ies of the same type will differ in v oltage. Do not mix diff erent type of batteries together . ÷ When not using the remote control for a long period of time (over 1 month), remove the batteries to avoid possible dam- age from battery corrosion. If battery leakage occurs, wipe the battery liquid from the battery component, then insert new batteries. Español
6 En 8 . Barcode/Command stac k This pla yer , when segment commands and barcodes that control are input in advance, enables images to be s witched and play ed back one after the other . This is very convenient when used in demonstrations, presen- tations, etc. Furthermore, the RS-232C connection al- lows uploading/downloading of the set content. (See page 59) ÷ Uploading/downloading can be easily performed when dedicated applications are being used. 9 . Interface with external signals (RS-232C, external option s witch) The de vice is fitted with an RS-232C connection so that commands can be given to support D VD , Video CD and CD . The control protocol is , for the most part, compat- ible with that of LD (Laser Disc) equipment, and LD sig- nals can also be easily transf erred. Other than the RS-232C interf ace connector , a terminal for the e xter nal option switch is pro vided. By simply con- necting a s witch to this terminal, operation is possible f or DVD-VIDEO menu selection and barcode/command stack calls as w ell as operation of the remote control unit. ÷ Consult the Userâ s Manual for detailed inf or mation re- garding this ter minal and RS-232C control commands. (See your dealer f or more inf or mation about the Userâ s manual.) 10 . Video blac kboard function Graphics and characters recorded in adv ance at desired positions on the D VD picture screen will appear during pla ybac k. This function enables demonstr ations and presentations to be more eff ectively perf or med. (See page 76) 11. Video T ext Retriev al With this function, you can use the mouse to clic k on buttons sho wn on-screen during playbac k for displa y of indications of the text file corresponding to the selected button. This is possible only with Video T ext Retriev al com- patible discs. (See page 82) 12. External Synchr onizing Function This terminal allows output of video signals linked to an external sync signal. (See page 82) Component Features and Functions 1. High-reliability , high-endurance play er This pla yer f eatures a high-performance brushless spin- dle motor , and the mechanical components have been sealed against heat and dust, giving this unit improv ed reliability . 2. P AL/NTSC dual playbac k D VD discs in either the P AL format or the NTSC format can be played back. (See page 84) 3. Frame search function When the frame search function is used, searching is possible in units smaller than when searching b y chap- ter and time, and an y point can be f ound. (See page 20) When frame segment pla yback is used, it is possible to pla y bac k from an y point to an y point in a video with still playback at the end. (See page 61, 62) ÷ The frame search function cannot be used with a multi PGC disc (time is not displa yed on the TV screen) or with a Video CD , etc. F rame segment playbac k is pos- sible with the DVD barcode, RS-232C control and a Barcode/Command stack. 4 . High-speed searc h With a 1.3X reading speed and improv ed memor y cache and search algorithm, the search speed has been in- creased. (See page 19, 20) 5 . Enhanced special playbac k This pla yer enables the D VD and Video CD pla yback speed to be changed in sev eral w ays . Slo w forw ard and re verse pla yback, scan pla yback and frame f orward/re- verse can be freely selected. (See page 18, 20, 21) ÷ T o perform rev erse slow pla yback, select F rame from the REV STEP/REV PLA Y page of the AD V .SETUP MENU . Slow pla yback is only possib le in the forw ard direction with a Video CD . 6. Mouse contr ol Instead of the remote control unit, a PS/2* pointing de- vice can be used to control the pla yer if desired. This allows selecting specific locations b y the point-and-clic k method. (See page 49) * PS/2 is a registered trademark of IBM corporation. 7 . W eekly timer/ po wer on start function The times for po wer on/off and f or video playback of a disc can be set for each day within one week or within one da y . Combined with the barcode/command stack, program pla ybac k is also possible. This pla yer is limited to a maximum of 24 setting at one time. (See page 50, 58)
7 En Basic Operations Contents Remote Contr ol Operations ................................................................ 16 Pla ying D VDs, CDs, and Video CDs. ................................................... 16 Chapter (T rack) skip f orward/skip bac k ............................................. 18 Stopping playbac k and switching power off ..................................... 18 Searching f or a desired scene (SEARCH) .......................................... 19 Still frame/Frame adv ance/Frame re verse ......................................... 20 Slow motion Pla y .................................................................................. 21 Repeat Play ........................................................................................... 21 Pr ogram Pla y ........................................................................................ 22 Viewing disc inf ormation ..................................................................... 24 Switching the Angle of the Ima ge (Multi-Angle) ................................ 26 Switching the Subtitles during Pla yback ........................................... 26 Switching the A udio during Pla yback ................................................ 27 Switching the stereo/left/right A udio .................................................. 27 Index of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) ....................................... 28 Operating the Initial Setup Menu ........................................................ 29 Selecting the aspect ratio .................................................................... 29 Changing visual setting ....................................................................... 31 Setting the Language ........................................................................... 33 Setting viewing and listening restrictions (P arental Lock) .............. 37 Making the ordinary settings .............................................................. 39 Setting the Digital Output .................................................................... 40 Setting to Optimize the Audio Quality ................................................ 42 Returning to the default settings at the time of shipment ................ 44 Language code list ............................................................................... 44 Adv anced Feature Operations ............................................................ 45 AD V . SETUP MENU settings ................................................................ 47 Pla yer control using a mouse ............................................................. 49 W eekly timer function operation/displa y ........................................... 50 P ower on start function ....................................................................... 57 Barcode/Command stac k function ..................................................... 59 Barcode/Command stac k setting ....................................................... 60 Gr ouping some Barcode/Command Stac ks ...................................... 67 Using a Bar code/Command Stac ks .................................................... 74 Character Input/Output drawing (D VD video blac kboard) ................ 76 Gr ouping video blac kboar ds ............................................................... 80 Video text retrie val ............................................................................... 82 External synchr onizing function ......................................................... 82 How to displa y total hours pla yed and power on time ..................... 83 Connecting the pla yer .......................................................................... 83 Using a Laser Barcode Scanner (Sold Separatel y) ........................... 89 T roub leshooting ................................................................................... 90 T erms ..................................................................................................... 91 Specifications ....................................................................................... 92 Basic Operations Ad v anced Operations Basic Operations Ad v anced Operations Settings Advanced Operations Connection/etc.
8 En Copyright ÷ Unauthorized pub lic preference , broadcasting, or copying is a violation of applicab le laws. ÷ This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected b y method claims of cer tain U .S. patents and other intellectual proper ty rights owned by Macro vision Corporation and other r ights o wners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized b y Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited vie w- ing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macro vision Corporation. Rev erse engineer ing or disassembly is prohib- ited. Handling the discs 7 Handling ÷ Ne ver pla y clacked, scratchesd or w ar ped disc. This ma y damage the pla yer or cause it to malfunction. ÷ Do not damage or dirty the signal surface of the disc. ÷ Do not affix paper and seals to the disc. ÷ T oo much glue will cause a malfunction. Many rental discs, par ticu- larly , hav e labels affix ed to them, and use the disc after confirming that there is no glue. 7 Stac king ÷ Store the discs carefully . If y ou store discs at an angle, or stack ed on top of each other , discs may become warped even when in their jack ets. ÷ Read the operating instructions included in discs . 7 Cleaning ÷ Fingerprints or other dirt on the disc may affect sound and pic- ture quality . T o remove dirt or finger prints, wipe gently from the inside towar d the outer edges. (Do not wipe in a circular direc- tion.) ÷ Discs must not be cleaned with record cleaning spr ays , or static pre- vention spra ys, etc. Also do not use v olatile liquids such as benzine, or thinner , etc. ÷ T o clean your discs, use a soft clean cloth to wipe them. If necessary , moisten a soft cloth with diluted neutral detergent to remo ve hea vy dir t or finger prints. 7 Discs with special shapes Discs with special shapes (heart shaped discs, hexagonal discs, etc.) cannot be pla yed on this set. Attempting to do so ma y damage the set. Do not use such discs. Lens c leaning The pla yerâ s pickup lens should not become dir ty in nor mal use but if for some reason it should malfunction due to soiling, contact your near- est PIONEER authorized service centre. Lens cleaners are commer- cially available but special care should be exercised in their use since some may cause damage to the lens. Condensation Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly . When this happens, pla yerâ s performance will be impaired. T o prev ent this, let the play er stand in its new surroundings f or about an hour before s witching it on, or make sure that the room temperature rises gradually . Condensation may also f or m during the summer if the play er is ex- posed to the breeze from an air conditioner . In such cases , change the location of the pla yer . Installation ÷ Install the player in a level and stable location. Do not use in shaky , unstab le locations, or locations e xposed to much vibration. ÷ Do not impair the pla yerâ s cooling functions. Av oid placing on long- pile carpets, etc.. Also do not wrap or cov er with towels or cloths when in use. Such cov erings can impede the playerâ s cooling func- tion and result in internal damage. ÷ Do not place objects on top of the pla yer . ÷ Install in a location which is not e xposed to heat sources. Av oid in- stalling the play er abov e an amplifier or other heat-emitting compo- nent. If installing the play er in a component rack, select a rac k with good ventilation, located well belo w the amplifier . ÷ If the pla yer is installed in a rac k, care must be taken to av oid inter nal temperature buildup . P osition it so that the v entilation openings in the top and bottom of the pla yer are not obstructed. As a rule, install so that there is no heat from below and lea v e a gap of 10 cm or more at the left and right and abov e so that air can flow around the device b y natural convection at a room temper ature of 35 ð C or less. If installation is necessary in any other circumstances, ensure that the air temperature at a point 5 cm above the center of the play er in a sufficiently warmed up state is no higher than 35 ð C. When necessary , use forced air cooling. ÷ When multiple pla yers are connected in parallel, a high surge cur- rent will be impressed on the units when e xter nal power is first turned on. Please consult your Pioneer dealer regarding ratings f or the power s witch to be used. ÷ Do not install the pla yer in a closed rack. An inter nal temperature builts up and results in internal damage. Operating En vironment Operating en vironment temperature and humidity: 5ðC - 35ðC ; less than 85% RH (cooling vents not blocked) 7 Do Not Install in the Follo wing Locations: ÷ Locations e xposed to direct sunlight or strong ar tificial light ÷ Locations e xposed to dust or smoke ÷ Locations subject to vibration ÷ Locations subject to strong electro-magnetic fields . ÷ Near sources of heat. ÷ Locations e xposed to high lev els of electronic noise ÷ Locations subject to electrostatic noise ÷ Locations e xposed to high humidity , or poorly ventilated locations ÷ A closed rack Mo ving the Play er When transporting this player to a new location, be sure to use the packaging provided and a void subjecting the pla yer to vibration, shock, or dropping. During transpor t, protect the pla yer from e xposure to heat or water . Before pac kaging the pla yer , remove any disc loaded, since mo ving the pla yer with a loaded discs ma y cause damage to the disc or play- erâ s internal par ts. Precaution regar ding use Special Precautions! Never attempt to move the player while a disc is playing. Discs rotate at very high speeds during play , and lifting or moving the player at such times could cause damage to the disc. Also, subjecting the pla yer to strong impact or vibration when a disc is loaded ma y cause damage to disc or pla yer . Be sure the player is stopped and no disc is loaded before moving the pla y er . Also be sure that no disc is loaded when lifting the pla yer . This component is built using precision optical parts. Be sure to take care to control temper ature and dust inside the room where this pla yer is installed.
9 Fr Installation ÷ Installez le lecteur sur une surf ace horizontale et stable . Ne le placez pas sur une surf ace branlante, instab le ou dans un endroit e xposé àtrop de vibrations . ÷ Ne gênez pas le refroidissement du lecteur . Evitez de le placer sur une moquette épaisse, etc. Ne lâÂÂenv eloppez ni le couvrez de ser vi- ettes ou de vêtements pendant quâÂÂil f onctionne. Cela pourrait nuire aux fonctions de refroidissement du lecteur et lâÂÂendommager internement. ÷ Ne placez pas dâÂÂobjet sur le lecteur . ÷ Installez-le dans un endroit qui nâÂÂest pas e xposé àune source de chaleur . Evitez de lâÂÂinstaller au-dessus dâÂÂun amplificateur ou dâÂÂun autre appareil générant de la chaleur . Si vous lâÂÂinstallez dans un meuble , sélectionnez un emplacement a y ant une bonne v entilation, situé bien au-dessous de lâÂÂamplificateur . ÷ Si le lecteur est installé dans un meuble , il f aut prendre des précautions pour éviter une montée de la température interne. P ositionnez-le de sor te que les or ifices de ventilation sur les panneaux inférieur et supérieur du lecteur ne soient pas obstr ués. En règle générale, installez le lecteur de sorte quâÂÂil nâÂÂy ait pas de chaleur depuis le bas et laissez un espace dâÂÂau moins 10 cm sur la gauche, la droite et au-dessus afin que lâÂÂair puisse circuler autour de lâÂÂappareil par conv ection naturelle àune température ambiante de 35 ðC ou moins. SâÂÂil est nécessaire dâÂÂeffectuer lâÂÂinstallation dans dâÂÂautres conditions, assurez-v ous que la température àun point se trouvant 5 cm au-dessus du centre du lecteur , lorsque celui-ci est en état de préchauff age suffisant, ne dépasse pas 35 ðC. Si nécessaire, utilisez une v entilation forcée. ÷ Lorsque plusieurs lecteurs sont raccordés en par allèle, un courant de pointe élevé ser a sor ti aux appareils lorsque la tension externe est tout dâÂÂabord appliquée. Consultez votre distributeur Pioneer pour les caractéristiques nominales de lâÂÂinterrupteur dâÂÂalimentation àutiliser . ÷ NâÂÂinstallez pas le lecteur dans un meub le fermé. Cela provoquerait des dommages internes lorsque la température inter ne sâÂÂélèv e. Ambiance de fonctionnement T empérature et humidité de lâÂÂambiance de f onctionnement : 5 ðC - 35 ðC ; moins de 85% dâÂÂhumidité relative (orifices de refroidissement non obstrués) 7 N â effectuez pas l â installation dans les emplacements suiv ants: ÷ Endroits e xposés aux ray ons directs du soleil ou àune forte lumière ar tificielle ÷ Endroits e xposés àde la poussière ou fumée ÷ Endroits soumis àdes vibrations ÷ Endroits soumis àde f or ts champs électromagnétiques ÷ Près de sources de chaleur ÷ Endroits e xposés àde hauts niv eaux de parasites électroniques ÷ Endroits soumis àdes par asites électrostatiques ÷ Endroits e xposés àune f or te humidité ou mal aérés ÷ Un meuble fermé D é placement du lecteur P our transporter le lecteur, utilisez toujours lâÂÂemballage f our ni et évitez de soumettre le lecteur àdes vibrations, des chocs ou de le laisser tomber . P endant le transpor t, protégez le lecteur pour ne pas lâÂÂexposer àla chaleur ou àlâÂÂeau. A vant dâÂÂemballer le lecteur , retirez tout disque chargé car un déplacement du lecteur lorsquâÂÂun disque est chargé peut endommager le disque ou les pièces internes du lecteur. Dr oits d â auteur ÷ La présentation pub lique, la diffusion ou la copie non autorisées sont une violation des lois applicables . ÷ Ce produit incorpore une technologie àprotection de droits dâÂÂauteur qui est protégée par des titres de méthode de certains brevets américains et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle détenus par Macrovision Corporation et dâÂÂautres a yant droits . L âÂÂutilisation de cette technologie àprotection de droits dâÂÂauteur doit être autorisée par Macrovision Corporation et elle nâÂÂest destinée quâÂÂàdes utilisations privées et autres visionnements limités sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L âÂÂingénierie àrebours ou le désassemblage est interdit. Manipulation des disques 7 Manipulation ÷ NâÂÂutilisez jamais un disque fêlé, ra yé ou déformé. Cela pourrait endommager le lecteur ou pro voquer un f onctionnement défectueux. ÷ NâÂÂendommagez ni ne salissez la surf ace de signal du disque. ÷ NâÂÂapposez pas de papier et dâÂÂautocollant sur un disque . ÷ T rop de colle peut provoquer un f onctionnement défectueux. De nombreux disques de location, en particulier, portent des étiquettes nâÂÂutilisez ces disques quâÂÂaprès av oir vér ifié quâÂÂil nâÂÂy a pas de colle. 7 Empilage ÷ Rangez les disques a vec soin. ÃÂvitez que les disques ne demeurent inclinés ou ne soient empilés, ce qui peut les v oiler, même lorsquâÂÂils sont dans leur coffret. ÷ Lisez les instructions dâÂÂutilisation f our nies av ec les disques. 7 Nettoy age ÷ Les empreintes digitales et les tac hes que peut porter la sur- face du disque peuvent, selon leur importance, Pour enle ver la salet é ou les traces de doigts, essuyez doucement de l âÂÂint érieur vers le bor d ext é rieur . (N âÂÂessuy ez pas dans le sens cir culaire). ÷ NâÂÂutilisez aucun produit de netto yage pour les microsillons . P areillement, ne tentez pas de nettoyer un disque a vec de lâÂÂessence, du diluant pour peinture ou tout autre solv ant volatil. ÷ P our nettoyer un disque , essuyez-le au moyen dâÂÂun chiff on doux. Si le disque est très sale , humectez dâÂÂeau un chiffon et, après lâÂÂav oir bien essoré, éliminez les taches en procédant a vec soin et sans frotter . 7 Disques de f orme sp é ciale Les disques de f orme spéciale (disques en forme de cà Âur, disques he xagonaux, etc.) ne peuvent pas être lus sur cet appareil. NâÂÂessa yez pas dâÂÂutiliser de tels disques car ils pourraient endommager lâÂÂappareil. Netto ya ge de la lentille En principe, il nâÂÂy a aucune raison pour que lâÂÂoptique du capteur se salisse; toutefois, si cela devait se produire et entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement, consultez le centre dâÂÂentretien PIONEER. Des produits et des dispositifs de nettoyage de lâÂÂoptique sont vendus dans le commerce, mais nous ne saurions trop vous conseiller dâÂÂêtre pru- dent dans leur usage car certains peuvent faire plus de mal que de bien. Condensation La vapeur dâÂÂeau peut se condenser àlâÂÂintérieur des parties nobles de lâÂÂappareil si vous le transporter dâÂÂune pièce froide vers une pièce chaude, ou encore si la température de la pièce dans laquelle il se trouve augmente rapidement. La condensation de lâÂÂhumidité a pour eff et dâÂÂaltérer les performances de lâÂÂappareil. P our lâÂÂéviter, conserv ez lâÂÂappareil dans son nouvel environnement pen- dant au moins une heure avant de le mettre sous tension, ou bien veillez àce que la température nâÂÂaugmente que progressivement. L âÂÂété, lâÂÂhumidité peut également se condenser si lâÂÂappareil est placé dans le courant dâÂÂair fr ais dâÂÂun climatiseur . En ce cas , changez la place de lâÂÂappareil. Pr é cautions sp é ciales ! NâÂÂessay ez jamais de déplacer le lecteur pendant quâÂÂun disque est en cours de lecture. Les disques tour nent àtrès grande vitesse pendant la lecture et v ous pouvez endommager le disque si v ous soule vez ou déplacez le lecteur àce moment-là. Un choc impor- tant ou des vibrations pendant quâÂÂun disque est chargé peuv ent également endommager le disque ou le lecteur . Vérifiez toujours que le lecteur est arrêté et quâÂÂaucun disque nâÂÂest chargé av ant de déplacer le lecteur . Assurez-vous aussi quâÂÂaucun disque nâÂÂest chargé av ant de soulev er le lecteur . Cet appareil incorpore des pièces optiques de précision. Contrôlez la température et la poussière àlâÂÂintérieur de la pièce où ce lecteur est installé. Fran çais Précautions àprendre concernant lâÂÂutilisation
10 Ge Hinweise zum Urheber schutz ÷ Eine öff entliche V erbreitung oder ÃÂber tragung sowie das K opieren von urhebergeschütztem Material ohne schriftliche Genehmigung des Inhabers der Urheberrechte ist strafbar . ÷ Dieses Produkt ist mit einer Urheberschutz-V orrichtung ausgestattet, deren T echnologie durch US-P atente und geistige Eigentumsrechte im Besitz von Macro vision Cor poration und anderen Inhabern v on Urheberrechten geschützt ist. Der Gebrauch dieser Urheberschutz- V orrichtung muss durch Macrovision Corporation genehmigt werden und ist ausschlieÃÂlich für die private Nutzung v orgesehen, sofern dem Benutzer k eine w eitergehende Genehmigung von Macro vision Cor poration erteilt worden ist. Untersuchungen dieses Gerätes zum Zweck eines unbefugten Nachbaus so wie Zerlegen sind untersagt. Hinweise zum Umgang mit Discs 7 Handhab ung ÷ A uf keinen F all eine gespr ungene, zerkratzte oder verw ellte Disc in diesem Pla yer abspielen. Derar tige Discs können den Play er beschädigen oder Funktionsstörungen verursachen. ÷ Die Abspielfläche der Disc nicht beschädigen oder Schmutz aussetzen. ÷ K eine Etiketten oder A ufkleber an der Disc befestigen. ÷ Bei V erwendung von Leih-Discs, an denen A ufkleber mit zuviel Klebstoff angebracht worden sind, können Funktionsstörungen auftreten. V or dem Abspielen einer der ar tigen Disc sicherstellen, dass kein Klebstoff unterhalb des A ufklebers ausgetreten ist. 7 A ufbewahrung ÷ Beim A ufbew ahren der Discs vorsichtig v orgehen. W enn die Discs schräg positionier t sind oder gestapelt werden, können sich die Discs verziehen, selbst w enn sie sich in der Hülle befinden. ÷ Die Anweisungen in der Begleitliter atur von Discs bef olgen. 7 Reinigung ÷ Fingerabdr ü cke und andere V erschmutzung auf der Disc kann die Bild- und T onqualit ät nac hteilig beeinflussen.Zum Entfernen von Schm utzflecken und Fingerabdr ü cken die Disc mit einem weichen, troc ken T uch sacht abreiben, das von der Mitte gerade nach au àen gef ührt wird. (Das T uch nicht in einer kreisf ö rmigen Bewegung ü ber die Oberfl ä c he der Disc f ü hren.) ÷ V erwenden Sie k eine Plattenreinigungs-Sprays oder Antistatik-Mittel an diesen Discs. Achten auch darauf, daàflüchtige Chemikalien, wie Benzol, V erdünner usw ., nicht auf die Disc gelangen. ÷ Zur Reinigung einen weichen, troc kenen Lappen v erw enden. W enn erf order lich, kann der Lappen leicht mit neutralem Haushaltsreiniger angef euchtet werden, um starke V erschmutzung zu entf er nen. 7 Nicht normgerechte Discs Mit diesem Play er können keine anderen als kreisförmige Discs (herzför mige, achtec kige Discs usw .) abgespielt werden. Wird versucht, eine nicht kreisförmige Disc abzuspielen, kann der Pla yer dadurch beschädigt werden. AusschlieÃÂlich normgerechte Discs verw enden. Reinigen der Abtasterlinse Eine Reinigung der Pickup-Linse des Geräts dürfte bei normaler V erwendung nicht erf orderlich werden. Sollte aber durch V erschmutzung eine Funktionsstörung auftreten, ziehen Sie eine PIO- NEER-Kundendienstwerkstatt zu Rate. Linsen-Reinigungsmittel sind zwar im Fachhandel erhältlich, doch kann eine unsachgemäÃÂe Anwendung eine Beschädigung der Linse zur Folge haben. K ondensatbildung Wenn das Gerät v on einem kalten Or t in einen war men Raum gebracht wird, oder wenn die T emperatur im Raum innerhalb kurzer Zeit stark ansteigt, kann sich im Betriebsbereich des CD-Spielers Feuchtigk eit abschlagen. In diesem Fall ist ein einw andfreier Betrieb unter Umständen nicht mehr möglich. Um dies zu verhindern, muàdas Gerät in der neuen Umgeb ung vor dem Einschalten etwa eine Stunde stehengelassen werden, oder dar auf achten, daàdie Raumtemperatur nach und nach erhöht wird. K ondensationsbildung kann auch im Sommer auftreten, wenn das Gerät der Kühlluft einer Klimaanlage ausgesetzt ist. In diesem F all muàein anderer A ufstellor t für das Gerät gewählt werden. A ufstellung ÷ Den Pla yer auf einer w aagerechten, stabilen Unterlage aufstellen. Den Play er nicht auf einer schrägen oder unstabilen Unterlage oder an einem Or t aufstellen, der starken mechanischen Schwingungen ausgesetzt ist. ÷ Die Kühlv orrichtungen des Players nicht behindern, z.B. durch Aufstellung auf einem langf asr igen T eppich us w . Den Player beim Betrieb nicht mit einem Handtuch oder einer Decke umwic k eln oder abdeck en. Durch eine derar tige Abdeckung kann die Wärmeabfuhr bloc kiert und eine Beschädigung des Players v er ursacht werden. ÷ K einerlei Gegenstände auf den Play er stellen. ÷ Den Pla yer an einem Or t aufstellen, an dem er keinen Wär mequellen ausgesetzt ist. Eine Aufstellung des Play ers auf einem V erstär ker oder anderen Wärme abgebenden Gerätes vermeiden. Bei Einbau des Play ers in einem HiFi-Schrank ein Regal mit guter Belüftung und möglichst weit unterhalb des V erstär kers aus wählen. ÷ W enn der Play er in einem HiFi-Schrank aufgestellt wird, muss für ausreichende Wärmeabfuhr gesorgt werden. Den Play er so plazieren, dass die Entlüftungsschlitze an der Ober- und Unterseite des Gerätes nicht bloc kier t sind. Dabei darf keine Wärme von oben auf den Play er abgestrahlt werden, und es muss ein F reiraum von mindestens 10 cm über und an beiden Seiten des Play ers eingehalten werden, damit bei einer Zimmer temperatur von weniger als 35 ðC ein natür licher Luftkonv ektionsstrom im Umfeld des Gerätes gewährleistet ist. F alls eine Aufstellung unter anderen Bedingungen unv er meidbar ist, sicherstellen, dass die Lufttemper atur in einem Abstand von 5 cm über der Mitte des betr iebs warmen Players 35 ðC nicht überschreitet. Gegebenenfalls muss eine Zwangskühlung vorgesehen werden. ÷ W enn mehrere Play er parallel angeschlossen sind, werden die Geräte beim erstmaligen Einschalten der e xter nen Stromversorgung einem hohen Stromstoàausgesetzt. Bitte den Pioneer-F achhändler zu den minimalen K ennwerten des zu verwendenden Stromschalters k onsultieren. ÷ Den Pla yer nicht in einem durch Türen verschlossenen HiFi-Schrank aufstellen. Anderenf alls kann es zu einem Wärmestau und somit zu einer Beschädigung von Bauteilen im Geräteinneren k ommen. Betriebsumgebung Betriebstemperatur und -luftfeuchtigk eit: 5 ðC bis 35 ðC , weniger als 85 % rel. Feuchte (Entlüftungsschlitze dürf en nicht bloc kier t werden.) 7 Eine Aufstellung an den folgenden Orten vermeiden: ÷ Orte, die direkter Sonneneinstrahlung oder starkem K unstlicht ausgesetzt sind ÷ Orte, die einer hohen Staubkonzentration oder Rauch ausgesetzt sind ÷ Orte, an denen mechanische Schwingungen auftreten ÷ Orte, die star ken elektromagnetischen F elder n ausgesetzt sind ÷ In der Nähe v on Wärmequellen ÷ Orte, die starken elektronischen Rauscheinstreuungen ausgesetzt sind ÷ Orte, an denen elektrostatisches Rauschen auftritt ÷ Orte, an denen eine hohe Luftfeuchtigk eit herrscht, sowie unzureichend belüftete Orte ÷ In einem geschlossenen HiFi-Schrank T ranspor t des Player s Den Pla yer zum T ranspor t an einen anderen Or t unbedingt wieder in seinem Original-V er packungskarton verpacken. Den Play er vor starken Erschütterungen und StöÃÂen schützen und beim T ransport nicht fallen lassen. Während des T ransports den Player v or Hitze und W asser schützen. V or dem V er pack en des Play ers darauf achten, eine e vtl. eingelegte Disc zu entf er nen. Wird der Pla yer mit eingelegter Disc transportier t, kann dies eine Beschädigung von Disc und Bauteilen im Geräteinneren v er ursachen. V or sichtshinweise zum Gebrauc h Zur besonderen Beachtung! Den Play er auf keinen F all bewegen, während eine Disc abgespielt wird. Da die Disc mit hoher Drehzahl im Geräteinneren rotiert, kann sie durch Anheben oder T ransportieren des Players an einen anderen Ort beschädigt werden. Wird der Play er star ken StöÃÂen oder Erschütterungen ausgesetzt, während eine Disc eingelegt ist, können Disc und Pla yer dadurch beschädigt werden. V or einem T ransport des Players sicherstellen, dass der Pla yer auf Stopp geschaltet und keine Disc eingelegt ist. Auch v or einem Anheben des Play ers nachprüf en, dass k eine Disc eingelegt ist. Bei diesem Gerät finden optische Bauteile Anwendung, die mit höchster Präzision gefertigt wurden. Daher unbedingt darauf achten, dass die Umgebungstemperatur den zulässigen Bereich nicht überschreitet und k eine hohe Staubkonzentr ation am Aufstellungsort vorliegt. Deutsch
11 It Installazione ÷ Installare il lettore in una posizione orizzontale e stabile . Non usarlo in posizioni traballanti e instabili o in posizioni soggette a molta vibrazione. ÷ Non danneggiare le funzioni di raffreddamento del lettore . Evitare di collocarlo su unâÂÂalta pila di tappeti, ecc. Inoltre non avvolgere o coprire con asciugamani o panni durante lâÂÂuso . T ali coper ture possono ostacolare le funzioni di raffreddamento del lettore e pro vocare danni interni. ÷ Non mettere oggetti sopra al lettore . ÷ Installare in una posizione che non è esposta a f onti di calore. Evitare di installare il lettore sopra ad un amplificatore o un altro componente che emette calore. Se si installa il lettore in uno scaffale per componenti, selezionare uno scaff ale con buona ventilazione e collocarlo molto sotto allâÂÂamplificatore. ÷ Se il lettore viene installato in uno scaff ale, prestare attenzione al fine di e vitare lâÂÂaumento della temperatura interna. P osizionar lo in modo che le aper ture di ventilazione sulla parte superiore e sul fondo del lettore non siano ostruite. Come regola, installare in modo che non ci sia calore da sotto e lasciare una distanza di 10 cm o più a sinistra e a destra e sopr a perché lâÂÂaria possa circolare intor no al dispositivo per con vezione naturale ad una temperatur a ambiente di 35 ð C o meno. Se lâÂÂinstallazione è necessaria in qualsiasi altra circostanza, assicurarsi che la temperatura dellâÂÂaria ad un punto pari a 5 cm sopra al centro del lettore in una condizione di sufficiente riscaldamento non sia superiore a 35 ð C. Quando è necessar io, usare il r affreddamento forzato dellâÂÂaria. ÷ Quando più lettori sono collegati in parallelo , una elevata sovracorrente momentanea viene applicata alle unitàquando si attiv a lâÂÂalimentazione esterna la pr ima volta. Consultare il rivenditore Pio- neer riguardo i dati nominali per lâÂÂinterruttore di alimentazione da usarsi. ÷ Non installare il lettore in uno scaff ale chiuso. La temperatura interna aumenta e prov oca danni interni. Ambiente operativ o T emperatura e umiditàdellâÂÂambiente oper ativo: 5 ð C- 35 ð C; inf eriore allâÂÂ85% di umiditàrelativa (aperture di raffreddamento non bloccate) 7 Non installare nei seguenti luoghi: ÷ Luoghi esposti alla luce diretta del sole o a f or te luce ar tificiale ÷ Luoghi esposti alla polv ere o al fumo ÷ Luoghi soggetti a vibrazione ÷ Luoghi soggetti a f or ti campi elettromagnetici ÷ Vicino a f onti di calore ÷ Luoghi esposti ad alti liv elli di r umore elettronico ÷ Luoghi soggetti al rumore elettrostatico ÷ Luoghi esposti ad ele vata umiditào luoghi scarsamente v entilati ÷ Uno scaff ale chiuso Spostamento del lettore Quando si trasporta il lettore in una posizione nuova, assicur arsi di usare lâÂÂimballaggio in dotazione ed e vitare di sottoporre il lettore a vibrazioni, urti o cadute. Durante il trasporto, proteggere il lettore dallâÂÂesposizione al calore o allâÂÂacqua. Prima di imballare il lettore, togliere qualsiasi disco caricato , poiché spostando il lettore con un disco caricato si possono causare danni al disco o alle par ti inter ne del lettore. Diritti d â autore ÷ La tr asmissione o la copiatura non autorizzata di materiale pubb lico di propria preferenza è una violazione delle leggi applicabili. ÷ Questo prodotto incorpora la tecnologia di protezione dei diritti dâÂÂautore che è protetta dai reclami tecnici di cer ti brev etti statunitensi e altri diritti di proprietàintellettuale in possesso della Macrovision Corporation e altri possessori dei dir itti. L âÂÂuso di questa tecnologia di protezione dei diritti dâÂÂautore de ve essere autorizzata dalla Macrovision Corporation ed è destinata allâÂÂuso domestico e di altre visioni limitate salv o autorizzazione contraria della Macrovision Corporation. àvietato eseguire le operazioni in verse e lo smontaggio . Modo di maneggiare i disc hi 7 Modo di maneggiare ÷ Non eseguire mai la lettura di un disco crepato , graffiato o def ormato. Ciò può danneggiare il lettore o causare un malfunzionamento . ÷ Non danneggiare o sporcare la superficie del disco con i segnali. ÷ Non attaccare la carta e gli adesivi al disco. ÷ T roppa colla causa un malfunzionamento. Molti dischi a noleggio , in par ticolare, hanno le etichette attaccate e quindi usare il disco dopo av er confermato che non ci sia la colla. 7 Accatastamento ÷ Conservare i dischi con la do vuta cura. Se vengono conservati ad una certa angolazione o uno sopra lâÂÂaltro, possono def or marsi perfino se contenuti nelle loro custodie . ÷ Leggere le istruzioni per lâÂÂuso incluse nei dischi. 7 Pulizia ÷ Le impr onte digitali e lo sporco sul disco possono influenzare la qualit àdel suono e delle immagini. Per togliere lo sporco o le impr onte digitali, strofinare delicatamente dall âÂÂinterno verso i bor di esterni. (Non str ofinare in direzione circolare.) ÷ I dischi non de v ono venire puliti con spra y per la pulizia di dischi o antistatici. Non usare neppure liquidi volatili come benzina e diluente . ÷ P er pulire i propri dischi, usare un panno soffice e pulito. Se necessario , inumidirlo con detergente neutro diluito con acqua e togliere sporco tenace. 7 Dischi con forme speciali I dischi con f orme speciali (dischi a forma di cuore, dischi esagonali, ecc.) non possono essere letti con questo apparecchio . Se si tenta di leggerli si può danneggiare lâÂÂapparecchio . Non usare tali dischi. Pulizia della lente La lente della testina di lettura del lettore non dovrebbe sporcarsi, ma se per qualche ragione non dovesse funzionare bene a causa di sporco accumulatosi su di essa, entrare in contatto col più vicino centro assistenza PIONEER. I pulitori per lenti sono in vendita, ma devono venire usati con particolare cura, dato che possono danneggiare la lente. Condensa Se il lettore viene portato improvvisamente da una stanza ad una fredda o se la temperatur a ambiente sale velocemente, al suo interno si possono formare gocce di condensa. Se ciò accade, il lettore non può funzionare bene. P er evitare che ciò accada, lasciare che il lettore riposi per circa unâÂÂora prima di tentare di usarlo o far salire la temperatura ambiente in modo graduale . La condensa si può f ormare anche se durante lâÂÂestate il lettore viene esposto ad aria fresca prodotta da un climatizzatore. In tali casi, spostare il lettore. Precauzioni riguar do l â uso Precauzioni speciali! Non tentare mai di spostare il lettore mentre un disco è in corso di lettura. I dischi ruotano a velocitàmolto alta durante la lettura e se si sollev a o si sposta il lettore in quel momento si possono causare danni al disco . Inoltre, se si sottopone il lettore a forti ur ti o vibrazioni quando un disco è caricato si possono causare danni al disco o al lettore. Assicurarsi che il lettore sia in modo di arresto e nessun disco sia caricato prima di spostare il lettore. Assicurarsi anche che nessun disco sia caricato quando si sollev a il lettore. Questo componente è costruito usando par ti ottiche di precisione. Assicurarsi di f are attenzione a controllare la temperatura e la polv ere allâÂÂinter no della stanza in cui il lettore viene installato. Italiano
12 Sp Instalaci ó n ÷ Instale el reproductor en un lugar niv elado y estable . No lo utilice en lugares poco firmes o inestables, ni en lugares expuestos a una vibr ación excesiv a. ÷ No altere las funciones de refrigeración del reproductor . Evite colocarlo encima de alfombras de pelo largo , etc. Y no lo envuelva ni cubra con toallas o paños cuando lo utilice. Si lo cubre con tales cosas se anulará la función de refrigeración del reproductor y se producirán daños en su interior . ÷ No ponga objetos encima del reproductor . ÷ Instálelo en una posición que no esté e xpuesta a fuentes de calor . Evite instalar el reproductor encima de un amplificador u otro componente que emita calor . Si instala el reproductor en un estante de componentes, seleccione uno que esté bien v entilado y coloque el reproductor muy por debajo del amplificador . ÷ Si el reproductor se instala en un estante deberá e vitarse la acumulación interna de calor . Póngalo de forma que las aber turas de ventilación de la parte superior e inferior del reproductor no estén tapadas. P or regla general, instálelo en un lugar a donde no llegue calor procedente de la parte inferior, y deje un espacio libre de 10 cm o más por los costados derecho e izquierdo y por la par te superior , para que el aire pueda circular alrededor del aparato mediante conv ección natural a una temperatura de la sala de 35 ð C o menos. Si resulta necesario hacer la instalación bajo otras circunstancias, asegúrese de que la temperatura del aire a un punto ubicado a 5 cm por encima del centro del reproductor , estando éste calentado lo suficiente, no sea superior a 35 ð C. Cuando sea necesar io , utilice refrigeración de aire f orzada. ÷ Cuando se conecten en paralelo múltiples reproductores , al conectar por primera vez la alimentación e xter na se aplicará a las unidades una corriente inicial alta. Consulte a su concesionario Pioneer en cuanto a los valores nominales par a la conmutación de la alimentación que se v ay a a utilizar . ÷ No instale el reproductor en un estante cerrado . El calor se acumula en el interior del aparato y se producen daños internos. Ambiente de funcionamiento T emperatura y humedad del ambiente de funcionamiento: 5 ð C- 35ð C; menos del 85% de humedad relativa (orificios de ventilación sin b loquear) 7 No instale el aparato en los lugares siguientes: ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a la luz solar directa o a una luz ar tificial intensa. ÷ Lugares e xpuestos al polvo o al humo. ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a la vibración. ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a campos electromagnéticos intensos. ÷ Cerca de fuentes de calor . ÷ Lugares e xpuestos a altos niveles de ruido electrónico. ÷ Lugares expuestos a ruido electrostático. ÷ Lugares expuestos a una humedad alta o mal ventilados. ÷ Un estante cerrado. T raslado del reproductor Cuando transporte este reproductor a un nuev o lugar , asegúrese de utilizar el embalaje suministrado y e vitar someter lo a vibraciones, golpes o caÃÂdas. Dur ante el transpor te, proteja el reproductor contra el calor y el agua. Antes de embalar el reproductor , retire el disco cargado, y a que mover el reproductor con un disco cargado puede estropear el disco y las par tes internas del reproductor. Derechos de autor ÷ La emisión o la copia de programas sin autorización viola las le yes aplicables. ÷ Este producto incorpora tecnologÃÂa de protección de los derechos de autor que a su vez está protegida por reclamaciones de métodos de cier tas patentes de los EE.UU . y otros derechos de propiedad intelectual propiedad de Macrovision Corporation y otros propietarios de derechos. La utilización de esta tecnologÃÂa de protección de los derechos de autor debe contar con la autorización de Macrovision Cor poration, y ha sido propuesta para ser utilizada en el hogar y en otros locales de visión limitada a menos que Macrovision Corpora- tion autorice lo contrario. La inv ersión de ingenierÃÂa o el desmontaje están prohibidos. Manejo de los discos 7 Manejo ÷ Nunca reproduzca discos rajados, r a yados o def or mados. ÃÂstos pueden estropear el reproductor o hacer que funcione mal. ÷ No estropee ni ensucie la superficie de las señales de los discos . ÷ No ponga papel ni pegatinas en los discos . ÷ El e xceso de cola causará problemas en el funcionamiento . Muchos discos de alquiler , en par ticular , tienen pegadas etiquetas, asàque utilÃÂcelos después de confirmar que no tengan cola. 7 Instalaci ón en pila ÷ Siga las instrucciones suministradas con los discos. ÷ Guarde los discos cuidadosamente. Si los guarda inclinados, o apilados uno encima de otro, los discos podrán def or marse aunque estén guardados en sus cajas. 7 Limpieza ÷ Las huellas dactilares o la suciedad en los discos pueden afectar al sonido y a la calidad de la imagen.Para quitar la suciedad o las huellas dactilares, limpie suavemente desde el interior hacia el borde exterior . (No limpie los discos en sentido circular .) ÷ Los discos no deben limpiarse con aerosoles de limpieza de discos de vinilo , con aerosoles que evitan la electricidad estática, etc. No utilice tampoco lÃÂquidos volátiles tales como bencina, diluy ente , etc. ÷ P ara limpiar sus discos, utilice un paño b lando y limpio . De ser necesario, humedezca un paño b lando en detergente neutro diluido para quitar la suciedad o las huellas dactilares difÃÂciles de quitar . 7 Discos con formas especiales Los discos con formas especiales (discos en forma de corazón, dis- cos hexagonales , etc.) no pueden reproducirse en este aparato . Intentar reproducir estos discos puede estropear el aparato . No utilice tales discos. Limpieza de la lente La lente fonocaptora del reproductor no deberá ensuciarse con un uso normal, pero si por alguna razón funcionara mal porque está sucia, póngase en contacto con su centro de servicio PIONEER autorizado más cercano. En el comercio se encuentran a la venta limpiadores de lentes, pero deberá tenerse mucho cuidado al utilizarlos porque algunos podrÃÂan estropear la lente. Condensaci ó n La humedad puede formarse en la sección de funcionamiento del reproductor si éste se pasa de un lugar frÃÂo a otro caliente o si la temperatura de la sala aumenta repentinamente. Cuando pase esto, el rendimiento del reproductor se reducirá. Para impedir esto, deje el reproductor en su nuevo ambiente durante una hora aproximadamente antes de conectar su alimentación, o asegúrese de que la temperatura de la habitación aumente gradualmente. La condensación también puede formarse durante el verano si el reproductor se expone al aire frÃÂo de un acondicionador de aire. En tales casos, cambie la ubicación del reproductor . Precauciones relacionadas con la utilizaci ó n Precauciones especiales Nunca intente trasladar el reproductor mientras se reproduce un disco . Los discos gir an a alta v elocidad durante la reproducción, y lev antar o trasladar el aparato en esos casos puede estropear el disco . Además, someter el reproductor a un impacto o vibr ación fuer te estando un disco cargado puede causar daños en el disco o en el reproductor . Asegúrese de que el reproductor esté parado y no ha ya ningún disco cargado antes de trasladar el reproductor . Asegúrese también de que no hay a ningún disco cargado cuando lev ante el reproductor. Este componente ha sido construido utilizando piezas ópticas de precisión. T enga cuidado para controlar la temperatur a y el polvo en el interior de la sala donde esté instalado este reproductor. Espa ñol
13 En Diameter/Play able sides DVD VIDEO 12 cm /single sided 1 layer 2 la yer 12 cm /double sided 1 layer 2 la yer D VD VIDEO 8 cm /single sided 1 layer 2 la yer 8 cm /double sided 1 layer 2 la yer VIDEO CD 12 cm /single sided VIDEO CD single 8 cm /single sided CD 12 cm /single sided CD single 8 cm /single sided T ypes of play able discs and their marks DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD ÷ The marks shown below are found on disc labels or on disc jackets. ÷ This player can play all discs bearing the marks below with- out the read f or an adaptor . ÷ This pla yer can pla y discs recorded in either P AL or NTSC format. Use those discs which indicates âÂÂNTSCâ or âÂÂP AL â on the jack et. 7 DV D identification markings The f ollowing markings are display ed on D VD discs and pack- aging to indicate the type of video or audio recorded on that disc and the functions that can be used: 7 Disc operation methods The D VD operation method depends on the intention of the disc creator , and there are some discs that prohibit specific operations. For this reason, depending on the disc, the op- eration method diff ers and specific operations ma y not be possible . If a specific operation has been prohibited on the disc, the âÂÂDisc prohibitionâ mark is displayed on the screen of the pla yer . Fur ther more, with a disc that is capable of interac- tive oper ation in the menu and during pla ybac k, some opera- tions such as repeat and program ma y not be not possible . In this case, the âÂÂProhibition due to the pla yerâ mark is displayed on the screen. Disc prohibition mark Prohibition due to the play er mark Disc types compatib le with this unit Mark Meaning The number of the audio The number of the subtitle language The number of angles The picture aspect ratios that can be selected The region number where playback is possible This pla yer can pla y back discs which include region number â 4â and discs on which âÂÂALLâ is inscribed. ÷ Discs indicates belo w cannot pla yed on this pla yer . D VD audio , D VD-ROM, CD-R OM, D VD with regional number (see page 91) other than 2 or ALL. ÷ Do not use an 8cm adaptor . 3 16 : 9 LB 2 2 4 ALL
14 En Names and Functions 7 Remote contr ol unit * When using a wired remote control unit (sold separately: CU-V155), the reading of the names of some of the k e ys needs to be changed. Refer to the home page on bac kcov er of this operation manual f or details. STD-BY (Stand by)/ON b utton REPEA T button DISPLA Y button RPT (Repeat) A-B b utton RECALL button A UDIO button MEMOR Y button ANGLE button SUBTITLE button MENU button T OP MENU button SETUP button Number buttons (0-9, >10) ST OP button ( 7 ) PLA Y button ( 3 ) P AUSE b utton ( 8 ) STEP buttons ( e , E ) SCAN b uttons ( 1 , á ) Chapter skip/Next b utton ( â , NEXT) Chapter skip/Previous b utton ( 4 , PREV) Direction b uttons ( 5 , 3 , â , 2) ENTER b utton RETURN b utton Title/Chapter/Frame/Time Button (TITLE/CHP/FRM/TIME) Frame/Time button (FRM/TIME) SEARCH button CLEAR b utton STD-BY/ON PLAY PAUSE DISPLAY REPEAT MEMORY AUDIO SCAN STEP RECALL RPT A-B ANGLE SUBTITLE PREV NEXT SETUP ENTER RETURN SEARCH CLEAR 12 3 456 7 8 9 01 0 > TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME MENU TOP MENU FRM/TIME STOP
15 En 7 Fr ont panel 7 Rear panel SIGNAL GND Terminal This terminal is the SIGNAL GND ter minal. Under cer tain environmental conditions which create a lot of noise, the mouse, etc., ma y fail to oper ate. The SIGNAL GND terminal is provided in such a case that the ground (GND) connections are link ed among the devices used. It is not a safe grounding terminal. 1 4 á â eE ^ DOLBY D I G I T A L SCAN/SKIP DISPLAY STILL/STEP PROGRAM PLAY/PAUSE KEY LOCK PAL / NTSC STOP OPEN/CLOSE DVD PLA YER DVD-V7300D EXT CONT LEVEL MOUSE /KEY BOARD PHONES DVD / CD àSTANDBY ON MIN MAX ç INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B PR L AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND AC IN TV SYSTEM ST ANDBY Indicator P ower b utton Remote sensor Disc table DISPLA Y button Forward b utton [ áâ ] Reverse b utton [ 41 ] P AL/NTSC indicator Indicates the TV type of the current disc. Lights orange during P AL disc playback, g reen during NTSC disc playback STEP [ e , E ] button KEY LOCK indicator When this indicator is lighted, the unit cannot be operated using the front-panel controls or the remote control unit. Settings can be changed b y RS-232C. PLA Y/P A USE [ ^] button PROGRAM indicator Lights when repeat pla y , prog ram play or command stack function is operated ST OP OPEN/CLOSE button MOUSE/KEYBO ARD connector Disc illumination Lights green during D VD playbac k, orange during CD or video CD pla ybac k. External control jac k (EXT . CONT) Headphone v olume control Headphone jack DIGIT AL OUT connector Noise may result if output setting s are not correct. Set as noted in the abov e table A UDIO OUT jacks INTERF ACE CONNECT OR Video terminator switch External Sync input Component video output Video output connector (BNC) Monaural audio out connector Video output pin-connector S-Video output connector Video output selector TV system selector A C IN power cor d connecton terminal Y our amp Regular A V amp Dolby Digital com- patible amp Settings Select [Dolby Digital 3 PCM] from the SETUP MENU. (See page 40) Select [Dolby Digital] from the SETUP MENU . (See page 40)
16 En Remote Contr ol Operations Wireless Remote Operation When operating the remote control, point it at the remote sen- sor located on the pla yerâ s front panel. The remote control can be used up to 7 m from the player and within a 30ð angle each side of the sensor . ÷ Exposing the remote sensor to direct sunlight or strong light may cause f aulty operation. Wired Operation Wired operation is possible with the separ ately sold remote control. Connect the remote controlâ s supplied cord to the ex- ter nal control jack (EXT .CONT) on the playerâ s front panel. Pla ying D VDs, CDs, and Video CDs DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Press STD-BY/ON . ÷ The pla yer â s standb y indicator changes from orange (stand by) to green (pow er on). Press STOP OPEN/CLOSE ç . ÷ The disc tab le comes out. Load a disc ÷ Load a disc with the label side f acing up , using the disc table guide to align the disc. Press PLAY . ÷ The disc tab le will close and pla yback will begin. ÷ Press ^ PLAY/PAUSE on the front of the pla yer . ÷ Depending on the disc, a men u is display ed. If a menu is display ed, refer to the ne xt page. Note: ÷ D VD discs that do not have the matching region n umber that allows pla yback can not be pla yed (ref er to the â Te r m s â section on page 91). (This unit âÂÂs region n umber is â 2â .) ÷ During operation, the f ollowing mar ks may appear on the TV screen. : Appears when this player cannot perf or m the se- lected function. : Appears when the disc cannot perform the selected function. 1 4 á â eE ^ ç D O L B Y D I G I T A L SCAN/SKIP DISPLAY STILL/STEP PROGR AM PLAY/PAUSE KEY LOCK NTSC/PAL STOP OPEN/CLOSE D V D P L A Y E R D V D - V 7 3 0 0 D EXT CON T LEVEL MOUSE /KEY BOARD PHONES DVD / C D àSTAN DBY ON MIN MAX 30 ð 30 ð 7m 1 4 á â eE ^ ç D O L B Y D I G I T A L SCAN/SKIP DISPLAY STILL/STEP PROGRAM PLAY/PAUSE KEY LOCK NTSC/PAL STOP OPEN/CLOSE D V D P L A Y E R D V D - V 7 3 0 0 D EXT CONT LEVEL MOUSE /KEY BOARD PHONES DVD / CD àSTANDBY ON MIN MAX Basic Operations
17 En Basic Operations DV D . I Video CD . When the menu screen has been displa yed D VDs and Video CDs, depending on the disc, feature se- lection menus. This play er lets you choose a desired title and m usic by selecting from a men u. 7 During D VD playback Press to select the selected item and press ENTER . Example) 7 During Video CD playbac k Select with the number b uttons. ÷ When the menu screen consists of two pages or more , press PREV NEXT to turn the pages. Example) 7 T urning the menu screen display off/on The wa y to display the menu screen diff ers depending on the disc, but menu screen is returned with DVD by pressing MENU or TOP MENU during playbac k, and with Video CD , by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. ÷ Regarding operations on the menu screen, see the opera- tion method accompanying the disc. DV D . I Video CD . Returning to menu displa y during playbac k 7 During D VD playbac k Press TOP MENU . ÷ Press MENU again for a menu of title contents. ÷ Oper ate according to disc menus . 7 During Video CD playbac k Press RETURN . Pressing RETURN during PBC playback will display the menu. Because the pla yerâ s operation method and functions depend on the PBC , playbac k will diff er according to the disc. For details, please ref er to the discâÂÂs instruction man ual. Note ÷ When using a men u f or Video CD pla yback; the repeat Play and T rack/Time Search functions do not oper ate. ÷ Men u details diff er depending on the disc. Play a disc by making menu selections using , ENTER and the number b uttons. ÷ Y ou can also pla y Video CDs without calling up a menu by pressing PREV NEXT or a number b utton dur ing ST OP . For e xample, to start playback from tr ack 1, press 1 1 2 3 4 5 POP TITLE MENU JAZZ COUNTR Y R&B CLASSICAL 1 2 3 4 5 POP JAZZ COUNTR Y R&B CLASSICAL
18 En Chapter (T rac k) skip f orward/skip bac k DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Skipping f orwar d to the ne xt chapter (trac k) Press NEXT . ÷ Press to skip f orward to the ne xt chapter (track). ÷ á â on the front panel has the same function. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Skipping bac k to the previous c hapter (track) Press PREV . ÷ Press once to skip back to the start of the chapter (track) currently pla ying. ÷ Press again to skip back to the start of the previous chapter (trac k). ÷ 1 4 on the front panel has the same function. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . F ast f orward Press and hold SCAN . ÷ Release SCAN when you reach the desired location. Normal playback resumes. ÷ á â on the front panel has the same function. ÷ When the âÂÂScanâ indicator on the screen changes from flash- ing to lit, fast forward will continue even if the button is re- leased. When the desired location has been reached, press SCAN . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . F ast rever se Press and hold SCAN . ÷ Release SCAN when you reach the desired location. Normal playback resumes. ÷ 1 4 on the front panel has the same function. ÷ When the âÂÂScanâ indicator on the screen changes from flash- ing to lit, fast rewind will continue even if the button is re- leased. When the desired location has been reached, press SCAN . Stopping pla yback and s witching power off DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Press STOP . ÷ On the front panel, press STOP OPEN/CLOSE ç . ÷ Pla yback stops . Press STOP OPEN/CLOSE ç . ÷ The disc table comes out. Remove the disc. Press STD-BY/ON . ÷ The disc table goes back in, po w er s witches OFF , and the ST ANDBY indicator changes from green to orange.
19 En Basic Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Sear ching b y chapter/trac k number . 7 Using the TITLE/CHP/FRM/TIME button Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ DVD: Chapter numbers flash on screen when pressed twice. Video CD/CD: T rack n umbers flash on screen when pressed once. Select chapter/trac k n umber s directl y with the number b uttons. Example 1: T o select chapter/track number 31 Press 3 â 1 . Example 2: T o select chapter/track number 117 Press 1 â 1 â 7 . Press SEARCH . ÷ Playback of the selected chapter/track begins. ÷ Pressing NEXT or PLAY is also available except SEARCH . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Chapter/T rack direct sear ch If you press number buttons to select the chapter/track number during playback, playback starts from beginning of the chap- ter/track you selected. Example 1: T o select chapter/trac k number 3 Press 3 . Example 2: T o select chapter/track number 17. Press 10 > â 1 â 7 . Note ÷ If appears when the numbers are entered, it is not pos- sible to search. DV D . Direct search with title numbers during playback Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME during pla yback. Selecting title number s directly with the number b uttons. ÷ When selecting title number 3, press 3 . ÷ When selecting the title number 10, press 1 â 0 . Press SEARCH . ÷ Pressing PLAY is also av ailab le. DV D . Direct sear ch with the title number s in the stop mode If you press n umber buttons to select the title number in the stop mode, playback starts from beginning of the title you se- lected. T o select title number 3 Press 3 . T o select title number 10 Press 10 > â 1 â 0 . Sear ching f or a desired scene (SEARCH) Title : 3 Title : 1
20 En Sear ching f or a desired scene (SEARCH) DV D . I Video CD . Searching by time/frame number (T ime search/Frame search) Press FRM/TIME to select the frame input mode or the time input mode . ÷ With Video CD , only time search is av ailable. Select the desired time/frame number with the number b uttons. Example : T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds 2 â 1 â 4 â 3 ÷ With DVD, search cannot be performed for time/frame numbers which overlap titles. Press SEARCH . ÷ Pressing NEXT or PLAY is also av ailable except SEARCH . ÷ Pla yback star ts from the selected elapsed pla y time. ÷ For fr ame searching, the still frame mode is set at the speci- fied frame. (The accuracy in ter ms of frame may not be achiev ed exactly depending on the disc in use .) Example) Discs in which slideshow is recorded movie D VDs (24 frame). ÷ Time Search/F rame Search are not possib le with discs that do not provide pla yback time indications within a title when you press DISPLAY (see page 25). Po i n t ÷ T o cancel the Title, Chapter/T rack/Time displa y that is flash- ing, press CLEAR twice. ÷ Using a menu to select is also possible f or some titles. In this case, press MENU to displa y the menu screen and select while the display is being displa yed . Note ÷ With D VD , Time search may be impossible with certain ti- tles. In this case, the mark is display ed. ÷ When performing D VD or Video CD Time Search, playbac k may start from a slightly different time than that specified. ÷ On D VD discs, Time search is not possible during the stop mode. ÷ Search using the abov e operation is not possib le during PBC pla ybac k of Video CDs . ÷ An error may occur when a frame search is conducted us- ing several frames before or after the breaks in titles and chapters: this happens because of the way in which DVD are constructed. Still frame/ Frame ad v ance/ Frame re ver se DV D . I Video CD . Frame adv ance/Frame rever se (Playback the picture by 1 frame) Press STEP . : The picture will be advanced b y one frame each time the button is pressed. : The effect diff ers according to the following set- tings. (D VD only) REV STEP/REV PLA Y in AD V . SETUP (see page 48) is set to F rame : The picture will be re versed b y one frame each time the STEP button is pressed. VOBU*:The picture will be reversed in VOBU each time the STEP button is pressed. ÷ The picture may not be advanced/reversed by 1 frame de- pending on such disc as movie DVD (24 frame) for exam- ple. ÷ If still images appear shaky when playing back DVD stop- motion frames, see page 31 and set the Still Picture to âÂÂFieldâÂÂ. (V er tical resolution becomes half but eliminates b urriness of the picture when in the picture.) ÷ If VOBU is selected, each time the STEP is pressed, pla y- back is re versed by 0.4 seconds to 1 second. * V OBU = Video Object Unit: In D VD-VIDEO, it is the smallest unit that f or ms a stream and, at the time of playback of 1 VOBU, is from 0.4 seconds to 1 second. DV D . I Video CD . Still picture Press STEP . Note ÷ There is no sound when viewing still fr ames or when ad- vancing one fr ame at a time. ÷ P ause ma y not be possib le with cer tain discs. In this case, the mark is display ed. ÷ When you press PAUSE , pla yback is paused and bac kground color (for e xample, blue) appears on the TV screen. Frame : 0/219113 Time : 0.00 STEP STEP
21 En Basic Operations Slo w motion Pla y DV D . I Video CD . Forwar d slow pla yback Press and hold STEP during playbac k. T o chang e the speed of slow pla yback During slow pla yback, slow pla yback speed can be adjusted to any one of f our speeds by pressing STEP and STEP . Slow F ast For D VD STEP1 ( 1 / 30 ) â 1 / 16 â 1 / 8 â 1 / 4 â 1 / 2 â 1 / 1 For Video CD 1 / 16 â 1 / 8 â 1 / 4 â 1 / 2 (units: seconds) DV D . Re verse slo w pla ybac k Press and hold STEP during pla yback. T o chang e the speed of slow pla yback The action differs depending on the setting of the REV STEP/ REV PLA Y item of the AD V SETUP menu (page 48). Fast Slow For fr ame: 1 / 1 â 1 / 2 â 1 / 4 â 1 / 8 â 1 / 16 â STEP1 ( 1 / 30 ) (units: seconds) For VOBU*: Rev erse slow playbac k in VOBU units . * V OBU = Video Object Unit: In D VD-VIDEO , it is the smallest unit that f or ms a stream and, at the time of pla yback, is from 0.4 seconds to 1 sec- ond. DV D . I Video CD . T o return to normal playbac k Press PLAY . Note ÷ No sound will be heard during slow motion pla y . Repeat Pla y DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Repeat pla y of a chapter/trac k During playbac k of the chapter or track y ou wish to repeat, press REPEAT so that Repeat Chapter is displayed. ÷ With CDs and Video CDs, Repeat T rack is displa yed. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Repeat pla y of a title During pla yback of the title y ou wish to repeat, press REPEAT so that repeat Title is display ed. ÷ With D VD discs, the title contin ues playing until the end, and then pla yback star ts once more from the begin- ning of that title. ÷ With CDs and Video CDs, the disc is one title, there- fore the entire disc is repeated. DV D . Repeat pla y of all titles During playbac k, press REPEAT so that Repeat All is display ed. ÷ This operation is eff ective only when the men uâ s TITLE PLA Y MODE is set to All (see page 47.) ÷ When pla yback has contin ued until the end of the final title, pla yback begins again from title 1. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Repeat play of a specified section Press RPT A-B at the beginning and end of the section y ou want to repeat. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Return to a specified location Press RPT A-B at the desired location. T o return, press PLAY . ÷ Press CLEAR to clear a specified location. Tips ÷ T o cancel Repeat Play , press CLEAR the button. The Repeat pla y mode will be cancelled, but pla ybac k will continue normally . Note ÷ With some D VD discs, there ma y be times when Repeat pla yback is not possible because of the title . In this case, the mark will appear on the screen. ÷ With Video CDs, Repeat pla y is not possible during play- back with the menu displa yed (PBC pla yback). T o perform Repeat pla y , star t playback without displa ying a menu (see page 17), and press REPEAT . ÷ PROGRAM indicator on the main unit lights during repeat play . STEP STEP STEP STEP
22 En Press MEMORY three times. PROGRAM is displayed on the television screen. Press ENTER . The program screen is displayed. With , select the mode . Program Chapter: When programming with chapter units Program Title: When programming with title units With , the cursor (the place where the color is changed) is moved to the pr ogram input screen. With the number b uttons, the chapters and titles are designated in the desired playbac k sequence. Example) T o program titles or chapters in the sequence 9, 7, 18, press 9 , 7 , 10 > , 1 , 8 . 7 T o input chapter s and titles during playbac k Press ENTER . With , move the cur - sor to the chapter or title where y ou want to start playbac k Press PLAY . Playback starts in the programmed sequence. ÷ When RETURN is pressed, the programming ends with- out playing back. Pr ogram Pla y The contents of one disc can be arranged in the desired order . Pr ogramming is possible up to a maxim um of 24 steps. DV D . Note ÷ If the current title number (upper side) on the display is dif- ferent from the title n umber (low er side), inputting chapters using ENTER is not possible . In such cases, numeric buttons to input chapters. ÷ In case of DVD, program play is not possible depending on disc. In such cases, or mark will appear on the screen. ÷ programming chapter is possib le when those chapters are in the same title only . ÷ When the chapter is being changed to the ne xt chapter dur- ing program pla y , the display of the chapter which is not programmed appears on the TV screen. It is not malfunc- tion. Video CD . I CD . Press MEMORY three times. PROGRAM is displa yed on the television screen. Press ENTER . The program screen is displayed. With the number b uttons, the trac ks are designated in the desired playbac k sequence . Example) T o program tracks in the sequence 9, 7, 18, press 9 , 7 , 10 > , 1 , 8 . With , move the cur - sor to the track where y ou want to star t playbac k. Press PLAY . Pla ybac k starts in the programmed sequence. ÷ When RETURN is pressed, the programming ends with- out pla ying back. Note ÷ During Video CD PBC playbac k, program pla yback is not possible . Program Chapter Pro gra m T itle Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program T rack Current: T rack T otal Time 0.00 1(/10) RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program Chapter Pro gra m T itle Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program input screen
23 En Basic Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Erasing the contents of a pr ogram one b y one With , designate the number s that you want to erase. Press CLEAR . The designated numbers are erased and the ne xt num- bers are mov ed forw ard one by one . ÷ T o star t progr am playback, press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Adding a pr ogram With , designate the place where y ou want to inser t. Press the number b utton. The designated number mov es back and a ne w number is inser ted. ÷ T o star t program playback, mo v e the cursor to the number where you w ant playbac k to star t and press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . ÷ When all of the program (24 steps) has been input, add af- ter erasing with CLEAR . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . T o stop program pla y Press CLEAR during play . Normal playback starts from the chapter/track currently playing. Notes ÷ When the disc table is opened, the program will be com- pletely erased. With D VD , a program that y ou want to sa ve can be recorded in this play er (page 24). ÷ When CLEAR is pressed while stopped, the entire program is erased. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Pr ogramming a pause Press PAUSE in the pr ogram input screen. â 8 â is display ed and a pause is programmed. ÷ When a pause is programmed, it pauses at the star t of the title, chapter/trac k programmed ne xt. T o continue program pla yback, press PLAY . Notes ÷ It is not possible to progr am a pause at the beginning and at the end of a program. ÷ It is not possible to prog ram a pause two or more times in a row . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Chec king a pr ogram Press MEMORY three times. â PROGRAMâ is display ed on the TV screen. Press ENTER . With a DVD, press again and select â Pro- gram Chapter â or â Progr am Title â . ÷ T o star t program pla yback, press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 19 Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 19 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 10 Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Move 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 19 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 10 Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 Chapter 1 1 (Chapter 1~ 30) Program Memory â Off RETURN Exit PLAY Play Mov e 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 10 19 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 06
24 En Pr ogram Pla y DV D . Recor ding the pr ogram (pr ogram memory) This play er can record D VD programs up to a maximum of 24 discs, e ven if the disc is remov ed. When a progr am is recorded, program pla ybac k star ts when the same disc is played bac k ne xt. When the number of recorded discs exceed 24, the pro- grams are automatically erased starting with the oldest discs. With , select â ONâ of â Program Memoryâ and press ENTER . ÷ T o star t progr am playbac k, mov e the cursor to the number where you w ant playbac k to star t and press PLAY . T o end a program, press RETURN . DV D . Erasing the Pr ogram of the disc which is used Press to select [Off] of [Pro- gram Memory] and press ENTER . ÷ Ho we ver , the numbers remain as the y were on the program input screen, program of the disc is erased. Viewing disc inf ormation while stopped Press DISPLAY while stopped. The disc information screen is display ed. DV D . The titles and the number of chapters within the respective titles are display ed. 1/2 shows that there are two pages of information, and that this screen is the first of those pages. When there are two or more pages of disc information, the next screen is displa yed when the cursor button (right direction) is pressed. Video CD . I CD . The tracks and the respectiv e track times are displa yed. 1/2 shows that there are two pages of information, and that this screen is the first of those pages. When there are two or more pages of disc information, the next screen is displa yed when the cursor button (right direction) is pressed. T o switch off the disc inf ormation Press DISPLAY again. The disc information screen disappears. Viewing disc information Program Chapter Pr ogram Title Current: Title Title 1 (Chapter 1 ~ 49) Program Memory PROGRAM Exit Move 09 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ 07 18 âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ On Off 7 Chapter 1 Information: Compact Disc T otal Time T rack Time Trac k Time DISPLA Y Exit 6.51 3.18 6.50 4.16 3.22 5.23 4.55 6.13 5.45 5.10 01 02 03 04 05 1/2 06 07 08 09 10 72.04 Information: DVD Title Chapter Title Chapter DISPLA Y Exit 01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 05 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 1 1~ 4 1~ 1 1~ 1 1/2
25 En Basic Operations Vie wing disc information during pla yback Press DISPLAY repeatedly during pla y- bac k. When pressed, the f ollowing kind of disc inf or mation is displa yed in the upper part of the screen. DV D . When pressed once, the present frame inf or mation is dis- play ed. Present title number - Present chapter number Elapsed time of the title Present number of frame T otal frame of the title When pressed twice, the present title information is displa yed. Present title number - Present chapter number Elapsed time of the title Remaining time of the title T otal time of the title When pressed three times, the present chapter inf or mation is display ed. Present title number - chapter number Elapsed time of the present title Elapsed time of the chapter T otal time of the chapter When pressed four times , the present chapter information is fur ther display ed. Present title number - chapter number Elapsed time of the present title Remaining time of the chapter T otal time of the chapter When pressed five times, the transfer rate* level meter is displayed. Present title number - present chapter n umber Elapsed time of the present title T ransf er rate le vel meter T ransf er rate le vel * It is the value that shows the amount of information of the picture recorded on the D VD . The higher the lev el of the transfer rate, the greater the amount of information, but the picture quality may not always be good. When pressed six times, the displa y screen disappears. Play Chapter 1.19 2.18 1.19/ 1 âÂÂ1 Play Chapter 1.19 2.18 â 0.59/ 1 âÂÂ1 Play T r . Rate : 1.19 8.9 1 âÂÂ1 Play Title 1 âÂÂ1 1.19 41.19 â 40.00/ Play Frame 1 âÂÂ1 1.19 83445 2389/ Video CD . When pressed once, the present inf or mation of the video CD is display ed. Present trac k number/total trac k number Elapsed time of the disc Remaining time of the disc T otal time of the disc When pressed twice, the present trac k information is dis- play ed. T rack n umber Elapsed time of the disc Elapsed time of the track T otal time of the track When pressed three times, the present trac k information is fur ther display ed. T rack number Elapsed time of the disc Remaining time of the track T otal time of the trac k When pressed four times , the display screen disappears . ÷ Disc information can â t be viewed during PBC pla yback of a Video CD . CD . When pressed once, the present trac k inf or mation is display ed. T rack number Elapsed time of the trac k Remaining time of the track T otal time of the track When pressed twice, the present inf or mation of the CD is displa yed. Present trac k number/total trac k number Elapsed time of the trac k Remaining time of the disc T otal time of the disc When pressed three times, the displa y screen disappears. Play All 5/10 20.19 22.57 â 2.38/ Play T rack 20.19 4.40 2.38/ 5 Play T rack 5 20.19 4.40 â 2.02/ Play T rack 1 0.03 3.32 â 3.29/ Play All 1/10 0.03 66.32 â 66.29/
26 En Switching the Angle of the Ima g e (Multi-Angle) DV D . With D VDs featuring recor dings of pictures shot from dif- ferent angles, you can c hoose any desired vie wing angle during playbac k. The mark is placed on the jacket of a D VD that has multiple angles. If the mark is displa yed during pla yback, press ANGLE . Press ANGLE again to select the desired angle. The angle changes each time ANGLE is pressed. Note ÷ is displa yed on the screen when y ou come to a place where multiple angles ha ve been recorded. ÷ When the angle is s witched dur ing a pause, the pause is cleared. ÷ In some D VDs the angle can be switched also in the disc menu screen. ÷ When you do not want to be display ed, set the [Angle Indicator] to off in the initial setup menu (page 32). Switching the Subtitles during Pla yback DV D . When a DVD with subtitles that ha ve been recorded in multiple languages is being pla yed bac k, the subtitles dis- played can be c hanged. Press SUBTITLE during pla yback of the DV D . The currently selected subtitles are display ed. Press the SUBTITLE b utton again. The subtitle displa y changes each time SUBTITLE is pressed. Note ÷ T o cancel the subtitles, press CLEAR after pressing SUBTITLE , or press SUBTITLE and select [OFF]. ÷ In some D VDs subtitle can be switched also in the disc menu screen. In that case, press MENU and select after the menu is displayed. (page 17) ÷ The subtitle language here is temporar y . When pla yback has been stopped, it returns to the subtitle language se- lected by [Subtitle Language] (page 33) of the initial setup menu. HELLO! Subtitle :1 Spanish Subtitle :2 English HOLA ANGLE : 4/4 \ \ \ \
27 En Basic Operations Switching the A udio during Pla yback DV D . When a D VD with audio that has been recor ded in multi- ple languages is being play ed back, the audio played bac k can be changed. Press AUDIO while playing bac k the D VD . The currently selected audio is display ed. Press AUDIO again. The audio changes each time AUDIO is pressed. Note ÷ Switching the audio of the D VD may also be perf or med in the menu screen. In that case, press MENU and select after the menu is displayed. (page 17) ÷ The audio language switched here is tempor ar y . When pla y- back has been stopped, it returns to the audio language selected by [Audio Language] (page 33) of the initial setup menu. ÷ The picture may momentarily stop when the audio changes depending on the disc. Switc hing the stereo/ left/right A udio Video CD . I CD . The type of audio of Video CDs and CDs can be switched. Press AUDIO during playbac k of a Video CD or CD . Each time the b utton is pressed, the audio changes to stereo , 1/L (left) and 2/R (r ight). Note ÷ With Karaok e, etc., perf or m the above-mentioned operation and set to the type of audio written on the disc jack et, etc. to mak e the audio the accompaniment only . Audio :1 Spanish Dolby Digital Audio : 2 English HOLA HELLO Dolby Digital 2CH 2CH Audio :Stereo Audio :1/L Audio :2/R
28 En Inde x of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) On this play er, v ar ious settings can be selected while watching menu screens. Here we will e xplain how to access menu screens . Because menu screen access differs according to the type of disc being used, or the playbac k mode (stop mode etc.), ref er to the f ollowing menu map when accessing. TV Screen 4:3 ( Letter Box ) ....................... 4:3 ( Pan & Scan) 16:9 ( Wide ) Still Picture Field ............................................. Frame Auto On Screen Display On ........................................... ........................................ Off OSD Position Wide ............................................ Normal Angle Indicator On ................................................. Off Audio Language English ..................................... . Other Subtitle Language English ..................................... . Other Auto Language O n .............................................. Off DVD Language w/ Subtitle Language ............... English Other Subtitle Display On .............................................. Off Assist Subtitle Subtitle Off With Audio ............................... Selected Subtitle Audio DRC Large ........................................... Medium Virtual Surround Off VDD/Tru Surround Small Off Parental Lock Level Change ......................... . Password Change Screen Saver Off ............................................. Black Background Color Background Color ........................................ . Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital ........................... Dolby Digital 3 PCM DTS Out Off ................................................ DTS 96kHz PCM Out 96kHz 3 48kHz ..................... 96kHz MPEG Out MPEG .......................................... MPEG 3 PCM Digital Out On ................................................. Off 2 A udio1 Video Language General 1 A udio2 Video Language General 2 A udio1 Video Language General 2 A udio1 Video Language General 2 A udio1 Video Language General page 40 page 40 page 41 page 41 page 42 page 42 page 43 page 29 page 31 page 31 page 32 page 32 page 33 page 33 page 34 page 35 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 39 page 39 â indicates the setting when shipped
29 En Settings Operating the Initial Setup Menu DV D . I Video CD . I CD .. The initial setup me nu enables v arious settings to be made . The basic operating method for the initial setup men u and the locations of the buttons used are e xplained next. 7 Displa ying the initial setup menu Press STD-BY/ON . When the power has been turned on, proceed to . Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Example) The buttons that can be operated from the screen. 7 Settings that work immediatel y after chang- ing, depending on the type of disc Depending on the type of disc, whether D VD , Video CD or CD , some settings work immediately after changing. This pla yer provides confirmation by the color of the indicator to the left of the selected setting. See the follo wing table. 7 Settings that cannot be changed during pla y- back Those settings that cannot be changed during playbac k are dis- pla yed in gra y . Selecting the aspect ratio DV D . Set the aspect ratio to match the tele vision connected to this pla yer . This setting is unnecessary when connected to a wide- screen television. Most D VD movies suppor t a wide-screen television and the screen size ratio (usually called the aspect r atio) is set to 16:9 (horizontal:vertical). Consequently , if a D VD is viewed on a television of the con ventional siz e, the 4:3 aspect r atio has the eff ect of increasing the height of the image. Set the as- pect ratio to 4:3 when viewing on a tele vision of the conven- tional size to eliminate this distortion. This setting cannot be changed during playback. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [TV Screen]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . 4:3 (Letter Box): Select when a tele vision of the conventional siz e is con- nected and you w ant to view in the letter bo x format (see the next page). 4:3 (P an & Scan): Select when a tele vision of the conventional siz e is con- nected and you w ant to view in the pan & scan f ormat (see the next page). 16:9 (Wide): Select when a wide-screen television (16:9) is connected (Setting when shipped). Press SETUP . ÷ If a 16:9 disc with 96 kHz PCM sound is conv er ted to letter bo x format and played bac k, the sampling frequency of the sound will be downgraded to 48 kHz. T o enjoy the sound at 96 kHz, set the screen aspect ratio to wide-screen. ÷ Whether the aspect can be changed or not depends on the disc. Check the disc jac ket, etc. for details . Color of the indicator Blue Y ellow Green T ype of disc D VD only D VD/Video CD only Not aff ected by the type of disc Gra y Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 English English Other DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - English On TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit 16:9(Wide) Normal On 4:3(Pan&Scan) 4:3(Letter Box) SETUP DTS Out â 96kHz PCM Out â 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t â MPEG 3 PCM Digital Ou t â Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out âÂÂ
30 En Selecting the aspect ratio DV D . The images which appear in the TV Regular TV (4:3) Wide TV (16:9) Image recor ded on DVD 16:9 discs 4:3 discs Settings of this pla yer 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (P an & Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (P an & Scan) 16:9(Wide) W ay to vie w the image There are bands at the top and bottom,but it can be pr operly viewed The left and right sides of the screen are cut off, but it can be properly vie wed When you don âÂÂt want to view the pic- ture in this wa y , s witch the setting of this player to [4:3 (Letter Box)]. Appears to be lengthened verti- cally When the picture appears in this wa y , switch the settings of this player to [4:3 (Letter Box)] or [4:3 (Pan & Scan)]. It can be viewed pr operly Image recorded on D VD 16:9 discs 4:3 discs Settings of this pla yer 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Wide) W ay to vie w the image It can be viewed pr operly There are bands at the top and bot- tom depending on the disc. There are bands at the right and left, but it can be pr operly viewed Appears to be lengthened horizon- tally When the picture appears in this wa y , adjust the setting of TV to nor mal. Refer to the operating instruction of TV for details. NO TE When following operation is operated during playback in the letter box or Pan & Scan modes, the screen size is forcibly change d to the wide-screen mode ÷ When setup menu is displayed. ÷ When command stack is displayed. ÷ When video text is displayed. ÷ When AD V .SETUP menu is display ed. ÷ When video blackboard is displayed. ÷ When player control panel is displayed. ÷ When program is displayed.
31 En Settings DV D . Switching still pictures Eliminating the burriness of a picture when the DVD has paused, and viewing the picture clearly is possible. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [Still Picture]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Field: Eliminates the burriness of the picture when in the still picture state. F rame: Normal mode. (Setting when shipped) ÷ Scenes that the picture mov es dynamic, jittering occurs in the still picture. Auto: Field and F rame automatically switch. Press SETUP . Note ÷ Depending on the disc, there are times when the picture quality ma y not become clear , e ven if â Fieldâ is selected. Changing visual settings DV D . I Video CD . I CD .. Switching the screen displa y on/off The setting can be changed when you don â t want to ha ve the displa y when this play er is operated such as â Playâ and â Stopâ displa yed in the tele vision screen. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [On Screen Displa y]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: Displays screen. (Setting when shipped) Off: Does not display screen. Press SETUP . TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Frame Auto On Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit On Off On Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP
32 En DV D . Selecting the position of the OSD The OSD position of the initial startup screen such as â Playâ or â Stopâ , etc. which this player displays can be set to suit the type of television. Set the screen ratio of the DVD disc to 4:3. (for details check the disc jacket, etc.) Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [OSD P osition]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Wide: This setting a voids cutting off par t of the OSD when zoom has been selected with the wide-screen tel- e vision setting. Normal: Select this when normal or full hav e been selected with the wide-screen tele vision setting (Setting when shipped). Press SETUP . DV D . T urning the mark on/off Change the setting when you don âÂÂt w ant to display the mark that is display ed on the screen during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Video]. Select [Angle Indicator]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: Display the mark on the screen. (Setting when shipped) Off: Does not display the mar k on the screen. Press SETUP . TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit On Wide Normal Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP TV Screen Still Picture - On Screen Display - OSD Position - Angle Indicator - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit On Wide On Off Field 16:9(Wide) SETUP Changing visual settings
33 En Settings DV D . Setting the audio language Select the audio language. This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [A udio Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . English: The audio language is English. (Setting when shipped). Other : Select the desired audio from among 136 languages. See âÂÂWhen [Other] is selected by the subtitle language/ audio language/ D VD language setting â on the ne xt page for details. Press SETUP . DV D . Setting a subtitle language Select the subtitle language display ed. This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [Subtitle Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . English: Displays English language subtitles. (Setting when shipped) Other : Select the desired subtitle from among 136 languages. For details, see â When [Other] is selected by the subtitle language/ audio lan- guage/ D VD language setting â on the next page. Press SETUP . Setting the Langua g e Some D VD discs have m ultiple subtitles and audio tracks and ha ve a function that enables the user to select the one he/ she wants to suit his/her needs. The settings related to the various languages and subtitles in (Language) of the initial setup screen are explained here. Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English Other DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - English On Selected Subtitle SETUP Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English Other On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - English On Selected Subtitle SETUP
34 En 7 When (Other) is selected by the subtitle language/ audio language/ DVD language setting Operate while viewing the language code tab le on page 44. Select [Other]. Press ENTER . The language setting screen is displayed. Example) A udio Language is display ed Select [List of Languages] or [Code]. 7 Selecting the langua ge with the â List of Languagesâ (When selecting â F rench âÂÂ) Press twice. 7 Selecting a language with the â Codeâ (When selecting â F rench âÂÂ) Press the remote control number buttons 0 6 1 8 ÷ The n umbers can also be selected by pressing f or each digit. Pressing the shifts the digit. ÷ The numbers in the ( ) of the code show the range of the numbers that can be set. Press ENTER . DV D . A utomatically setting the audio and subtitles Y ou can select whether the audio and subtitles are selected automatically or by the initial startup setting. This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [A uto Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: This is effectiv e when the audio language and the subtitle language are the same and when the sub- title display is On. With a foreign movie DVD, the original language is selected for the audio and the language selected in the [Subtitle Language] menu option is selected for the subtitles ; with a domestic movie DVD, the original language is selected for the audio and the subtitles are off; (Setting when shipped). Off: Automatic setting of the audio during playbac k is cancelled, and the audio and subtitle language is set as already set by [Audio Language] and [Subti- tle Language]. Press SETUP . /â Audio Language Audio1 General Language Video 2 SETUP Move Exit ENTER Select Return ja: Japanese List of Languages Code (0~2) 10 01 RETURN Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - Off On Selected Subtitle SETUP Setting the Language
35 En Settings DV D . Setting the DVD menu language Some D VDs hav e a menu. Select the language from this menu. This setting cannot be set during playback. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [D VD Language]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . w/Subtitle Language: Men u screen is displayed with the language selected by the subtitle language. (Setting when shipped) English: The menu screen is displayed in English. Other : Select the desired language from among 136 languages. F or details, see â When [Other] is selected by the subtitle language/ audio language/D VD language setting â on page 34. Press SETUP . Note When a language that is not recorded on the D VD has been set, the menu screen is displa yed with one of the languages recorded. DV D . T urning the subtitle displa y on/off Select whether subtitles are to be displa yed or not, or whether â Assist Subtitleâ is to be display ed. This setting cannot be changed during playback. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [Subtitle Display]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: The subtitles are displayed (Setting when shipped). Off: The subtitles are not display ed. Howe ver , some D VDs enforce the displa y of subti- tles (See the next page). Assist subtitle: An assist subtitle is one which, for e xam- ple, helps to e xplain a scene for persons who are hearing impaired. The assist subtitles are display ed when this setting is selected, but only if the y hav e been re- corded on the disc. Press SETUP . Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - w/Subtitle Language English Other SETUP Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - On Off Assist Subtitle SETUP English
36 En DV D . Setting the language of the subtitles with enf or ced displa y Some D VDs enf orce the display of subtitles e v en when subti- tle display â Off â has been selected. Howe ver , the language of the subtitles can still be selected in the nor mal wa y . This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [Language]. Select [Subtitle Off]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . With A udio: Subtitles are display ed in the language of the audio that is being pla yed back. Selected Subtitle: Subtitles are display ed in the language selected by â Subtitle Languageâ on the initial setup menu (Setting when shipped). Press SETUP . Audio Language - Subtitle Language - Auto Language - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit English English On DVD Langua ge - Subtitle Display - Subtitle Off - Selected Subtitle With Audio SETUP On English Setting the Language
37 En Settings Setting vie wing and listening restrictions (P arental Loc k) Some D VDs that contain violent scenes incorporate viewing restriction le vels (great and small). This information is displayed on the disc jac ket. If the level of this pla yer has been set to a level lower than the level of a disc, (it is not possible to view and listen to that disc.) For e xample, if the le vel of this player has been set to 6, a special code number has to be input before discs of le vels 7 and 8 can be play ed back. DV D . Setting the restriction le vel The le vel of the vie wing and listening restrictions and the spe- cial code number are set manually . Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [General] with . Select [P arental Lock] with . Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select [Level Change] with , and then press ENTER . 7 When a code number has not yet been registered: The code number registration screen is displa yed. 7 When the code number has already been registered: The code number input screen is displa yed. Press the number b uttons and input the code number as 4 digits. ÷ Pressing f or each digit and selecting the numbers is also possible . Pressing mov es the digit. Press ENTER . The viewing and listening restriction le vel setting screen is display ed. ÷ The setting at the time of shipment is lev el 8 (unre- stricted). With , select the appropriate number f or the level. For e xample, if lev el 6 has been selected, viewing and listening restrictions are applied with respect to any discs of le vels 7 and 8. Press ENTER . The lev el of the viewing and listening restrictions is set. Notes: W e recommend you make a note of the code n umber . If you f orget the code number , retur n to the setting when shipped (page 44) and then reset it. Background Color - Parental Loc k - Screen Saver - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Level Change Password Change Blue SETUP / â Parental Lock: Register Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN Parental Lock: Level Change Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Select 1 234 67 8 5 Return Lev el SETUP ENTER RETURN Parental Lock: Level Change Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Select 1 234 67 8 5 Return Lev el SETUP ENTER RETURN / â Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN Parental Lock: Input Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit 10 19 Return / â SETUP ENTER RETURN
38 En DV D . When a D VD with a set P arental Lock le vel is loaded When a DVD with a set Parental Lock level is loaded, pass- word input screen may be displayed. Playback cannot be started until the password has been correctly input. Press the number b uttons and input the code number as 4 digits. ÷ Pressing f or each digit and selecting the numbers is also possible . Pressing mov es the digit. Press ENTER . Pla yback starts. Note: Some discs will skip while playing bac k only the scenes that hav e had their viewing and listening restricted. See the op- eration method f or with the disc to get details. DV D . Changing the code number P erform the operations of pr ocedures ~ â Setting the restriction levelâ on the previous pa ge Press , select [P ass wor d Change], and press ENTER . The code number input screen is displa yed. Press the number b uttons and input the present code number with 4 dig- its. ÷ Pressing f or each digit and selecting the numbers is also possible . Pressing mov es the digit. Press ENTER . The code number changing screen is displa yed. Press the number b uttons and input the new code n umber as 4 digits. Press ENTER . The code number is changed. / â Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN / â Parental Lock: Password Change Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN Setting vie wing and listening restrictions (P arental Loc k) / â Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ Return SETUP RETURN
39 En Settings DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the screen saver The screen sav er is a function to pre vent the burning in (the afterglow phenomenon) of an image when the same image has been display ed for a long time such as during a pause. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [General]. Select [Screen Saver]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Off: The screen saver function does not work. (Setting when shipped) Black: Screen sav er set to blac k. Backg round color : Screen sav er set to background color . Press SETUP . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Select the bac kgr ound color Select the color of the screen when the disc has stopped. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [General]. Select [Backgr ound Color]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Press ENTER . Adjust the coloring with the screen below and press ENTER . Press SETUP . Making the or dinar y settings Background Color - Parental Loc k - Screen Saver - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Level 8 Off SETUP Background Color Audio1 General Language Video 2 â / SETUP Move Exit ENTER Select Return RETURN Background Color - Parental Loc k - Screen Saver - Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Level 8 Off Black Background Color SETUP
40 En DV D . Dolb y Digital Output When the connected amplifier does not suppor t Dolby Dig- ital*, set to [Dolby Digital 3 PCM]. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [Dolby Digital Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Dolby Digital: Select when connected to an am- plifier or decoder that suppor ts Dolby Digital. (Setting when shipped) Dolby Digital 3 PCM: Con ver ts a Dolby Digital signal to a linear PCM signal and outputs. Select when connected to an am- plifier that does not suppor t Dolby Digital. Press SETUP . DV D . DTS Output When the connected amplifier suppor ts DTS**, set to [DTS]. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [DTS Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Off: Select when connected to an amplifier that does not suppor t DTS. (Setting when shipped) DTS: Select when connected to an amplifier or decoder that suppor ts DTS. Press SETUP . Setting the Digital Output The type of digital signal that corresponds to the amplifier connected to this pla yer can be selected. Be careful because noise may occur when the appr opriate setting is not made. Read this together with the operation manual of the amplifier that y ou have. DTS Out - 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM Digital Ou t - Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Dolby Digital 3 PCM Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - 96kHz PCM Out - DTS MPEG Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM DTS Out - Digital Ou t - Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - ** â DTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital â are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
41 En Settings DV D . 96 kHz PCM Output When the connected amplifier suppor ts 96 kHz, set to (96 kHz). This setting cannot be changed during playbac k. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [96kHz PCM Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . 96 kHz 3 48 kHz: Down-samples a 96 kHz signal to 48 kHz and outputs. Select when con- nected to an amplifier that does not suppor t 96 kHz. (Setting when shipped) 96 kHz: Select when connected to an ampli- fier or D AC that supports 96 kHz. Press SETUP . DV D . MPEG Output When the connected amplifier suppor ts MPEG, set to (MPEG). Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [MPEG Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . MPEG: Select when connected to an amplifier or decoder that suppor ts MPEG. MPEG 3 PCM: Conv er ts an MPEG signal to a linear PCM signal and outputs. Select when connected to an amplifier that does not suppor ts MPEG. (Setting when shipped) Press SETUP . 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - MPEG DTS Out - Digital Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - 96kHz DTS Out - Digital Ou t - Off Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out -
42 En Setting the Digital Output DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the Digital Output Can be set so that an audio signal is not output from the dig- ital audio output terminal. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 1]. Select [Digital Out]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . On: Outputs audio from the rear digital output terminal. (Setting when shipped) Off: A udio is not output from the rear digital output ter mi- nal. Press SETUP . Settings to Optimize the A udio Quality DV D . I Video CD . Surround Setting This play er automatically switches to Vir tual Dolby Digital and T r uSurround in line with the playbac k audio . Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 2]. Select [Virtual Surround]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select [VDD/T ruSurr ound]. Press ENTER . Off : Does not work. (Setting when shipped) VDD/T ruSurround : Surround sound setting Press SETUP . 96kHz PCM Out - 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG Ou t - MPEG 3 PCM DTS Out - Digital Ou t - On Audio1 General Language Video 2 Move Exit Off Off Dolby Digital SETUP Dolby Digital Out - Audio DRC - Audio2 General Language Video 1 Move Exit SETUP VDD/T ruSurround Virtual Surround - Off
43 En Settings Audio DRC - Audio2 General Language Video 1 Move Exit SETUP Large Medium Small Off Virtual Surround - Off DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Dynamic Range Compression Setting Adjust the dynamic range of the audio soundtrack. This function makes loud v olume lower , and low v olume louder . When Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) is on, mo vie soft sounds such as dialogue can be heard more clearly with- out making loud sounds ev en louder. Press SETUP . The initial setup menu is displa yed. Select [A udio 2]. Select [A udio DRC]. Press the cursor b utton (right direction). Select the preferred item. Press ENTER . Large: Maximum compression of audio source Medium: Moderate compression of audio source Small: Minimum compression of audio source Off: Cancel the audio DRC (Setting when shipped) Press SETUP . Note ÷ A udio DRC is only effectiv e with Dolby Digital audio sources. ÷ Audio DRC eff ects depending on the speakers and amp that you connected. Adjust the setting of the amp and speaker to set them most eff ective. T ruSurround and Vir tual Dolby Digital This play er , b y means of the T ruSurround* technology of SRS Labs Inc., processes surround encoded stereo au- dio and multi-c hannel audio and reproduces Virtual Sur- round with onl y the two fr ont speakers. P ar ticularly , when the playback audio is Dolb y Digital multi-c hannel audio, the Vir tual Dolby Digital function automatically w orks, and a surround sound with a greater sense of presence will be reproduced. * T r uSurround and the symbol are tr ademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. in the United States and selected foreign coun- tries. T r uSurround technology has been commercialized b y means of a license from SRS Labs, Inc. Note ÷ This function does not w ork when the DTS audio and 96 kHz PCM audio of D VD is play ed back or when a CD is pla yed back. ÷ When AUDIO of the remote control is pressed in the Vir tual Dolby Digital mode , VDD is displa yed in the upper left of the screen. ÷ When [Dolb y Digital Output] of [A udio 1] of the âÂÂInitial Setup Screen â is set to [Dolby Digital 3 PCM] in Vir tual Dolby Dig- ital mode, audio is not output from the digital output termi- nal. (See page 40) ÷ The surround eff ect of some discs may be small depending on the disc.
44 En Language code list DV D . Returning to the default settings at the time of shipment DV D . I Video CD . I CD . All the settings can be returned to the default state at the time of shipment. With power to the unit in the standb y status, Press and hold 1 4 of the pla yer and press STANDBY ON of the play er . Some of the settings are returned to the default status at the time of shipping but the other does not returned. Setting which is returned to the default status SETUP menu, AD V . SETUP menu, program memory , parental lock. Setting which is not returned to the default status Command stack, Video blac kboard data, clock When this operation is performed, all the data stored in the memory (page 24) will be simultaneously erased. Be sufficiently careful bef ore returning to the default settings. Language (Language code) Japanese (ja) English (en) F rench (fr) German (de) Italian (it) Spanish (es) Dutch (nl) Russian (ru) Chinese (zh) K orean (ko) Greek (el) Af ar (aa) Abkhazian (ab) Afrikaans (af) Amharic (am) Arabic (ar) Assamese (as) A ymara (a y) Azerbaijani (az) Bashkir (ba) Byelorussian (be) Bulgarian (bg) Bihari (bh) Bislama (bi) Bengali (bn) Tibetan (bo) Breton (br) Catalan (ca) Corsican (co) Czech (cs) W elsh (cy) Danish (da) Bhutani (dz) Esperanto (eo) Estonian (et) Language (Language code) Basque (eu) P ersian (fa) Finnish (fi) Fiji (fj) F aroese (fo) F risian (fy) Irish (ga) Scots-Gaelic (gd) Galician (gl) Guarani (gn) Gujarati (gu) Hausa (ha) Hindi (hi) Croatian (hr) Hungarian (hu) Ar menian (h y) Interlingua (ia) Interlingue (ie) Inupiak (ik) Indonesian (in) Icelandic (is) Hebrew (iw) Yiddish (ji) Ja vanese (jw) Georgian (ka) Kazakh (kk) Greenlandic (kl) Cambodian (km) Kannada (kn) Kashmiri (ks) Kurdish (ku) Kirghiz (ky) Latin (la) Lingala (ln) Laothian (lo) Language (Language code) Lithuanian (lt) Latvian (lv) Malagasy (mg) Maori (mi) Macedonian (mk) Malay alam (ml) Mongolian (mn) Moldavian (mo) Marathi (mr) Mala y (ms) Maltese (mt) Burmese (my) Nauru (na) Nepali (ne) Norwegian (no) Occitan (oc) Oromo (om) Oriya (or) P anjabi (pa) P olish (pl) Pashto, Pushto (ps) P or tuguese (pt) Quechua (qu) Rhaeto-Romance (rm) Kirundi (r n) Romanian (ro) Kiny arwanda (rw) Sanskrit (sa) Sindhi (sd) Sangho (sg) Serbo-Croatian (sh) Sinhalese (si) Slov ak (sk) Slov enian (sl) Samoan (sm) Language (Language code) Shona (sn) Somali (so) Albanian (sq) Serbian (sr) Sis wati (ss) Sesotho (st) Sundanese (su) Swedish (sv) Swahili (s w) T amil (ta) T elugu (te) T ajik (tg) Thai (th) Tigriny a (ti) T ur kmen (tk) T agalog (tl) Sets wana (tn) T onga (to) T ur kish (tr) Tsonga (ts) T atar (tt) T wi (tw) Ukrainian (uk) Urdu (ur) Uzbek (uz) Vietnamese (vi) V olapük (vo) W olof (wo) Xhosa (xh) Y or uba (yo) Zulu (zu) Input code 1001 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 1412 1821 2608 1115 0512 0101 0102 0106 0113 0118 0119 0125 0126 0201 0205 0207 0208 0209 0214 0215 0218 0301 0315 0319 0325 0401 0426 0515 0520 Input code 0521 0601 0609 0610 0615 0625 0701 0704 0712 0714 0721 0801 0809 0818 0821 0825 0901 0905 0911 0914 0919 0923 1009 1023 1101 1111 1112 1113 1114 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 Input code 1220 1222 1307 1309 1311 1312 1314 1315 1318 1319 1320 1325 1401 1405 1415 1503 1513 1518 1601 1612 1619 1620 1721 1813 1814 1815 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 Input code 1914 1915 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 2001 2005 2007 2008 2009 2011 2012 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 2023 2111 2118 2126 2209 2215 2315 2408 2515 2621
45 En Settings Advanced Operations Ad v anced Feature Operations In the Basic Operation edition, basic handling of this unit is explained. In this Advanced Fea- tures edition, however , original features of this unit are e xplained. ÷ Using the AD V .SETUP Menu This pla yer , in addition to the SETUP menu, has an AD V .SETUP menu f or setting special functions such as the weekly timer and pow er-on star t. ÷ Pla yer contr ol using mouse Control method using the mouse is e xplained in this section. ÷ Bar code/command stac k function V arious barcodes or commands used to control the D VD-V7300D can be stored in this play erâ s memory in advance. Memorized content can be recalled f or successive or step b y step e xecution. With this function, program pla ybac k is possible using the play er alone without the need f or a computer , controller or adv ance registration of barcodes. (Memor ized data is not erased e ven if the AC po wer cord is unplugged.) Uses ÷ Sale promotion presentation ÷ Picture ref erence/Picture e xhibition ÷ Education/training á â eE ^ ç 1 4 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 001 01:02-03 002 03:001234-002365 003 02:05-08 004 01:045867-123456 005 STEP FWD á â eE ^ ç 1 4 A utomatic playbac k ÷ Provided remote control unit ÷ External option switch ÷ Successive playback/repeat with W e ekly timer/P ow er on star t Input Command input with pro- vided remote control unit Input Barcode input with barcode reader Manual pla yback Step by step pla yback with pro- vided remote control unit T OP MENU MENU TOP MENU MENU Input Playbac k â¡
46 En ÷ Video blac kboard function Using the mouse and ke yboard, pictures, lines and characters (alphabet, numbers, symbols) can be dr awn during video pla yback or displa yed alone . F ree lines can be dra wn on the picture during playbac k, and pre-drawn dra wings or characters can be superimposed on the image and displa yed at a specified position during pla yback. (Memorized data is not erased e ven if the A C power cord is unplugged.) How to use ÷ A pointer ÷ For picture subtitle ÷ For picture e xplanation ÷ For picture masking Uses ÷ Sale promotion presentation ÷ Education/tr aining ÷ External sync hronizing function ÷ Pla ybac k time/P o wer supply time displa y Cur ved lines can be dr awn with the mouses Pre-drawn dr awings or char acters can be automatically superimposed on the picture 1 4 á â eE ^ ç 1 4 á â eE ^ ç 1 4 á â eE ^ ç
47 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . T o access the ADV . SETUP menu Press and hold SETUP for one second. The screen displa ys the special menu shown in the figure on the left (hereafter called the AD V .SETUP menu). T o set a parameter , for e xample, the weekly timer , select WEEKL Y TIMER with ,setting ON/OFF , etc. with . If a parameter is set to ON, press ENTER and per- form the setting instructions as prompted on the screen. Like wise, f or power-on star t, select PO WER ON ST ART with , setting ON/OFF , etc. with , If a param- eter is set to ON, press ENTER , set ON/OFF to ON and perform the setting instructions as prompted on the screen. A similar procedure is used to set the other parameters with and set ON/OFF , etc. with . 4 REPEA T MODE Select OFF/CHAPTER/TITLE/DISC from the menu. When TITLE PLA Y MODE is set to ALL,DISC is be selected. OFF: The D VD play er plays bac k in the normal status and does not repeat. CHAPTER: One selected chapter only is repeated (D VD). One selected trac k only is repeated (Video CD , CD). TITLE: Playing bac k repeats only one title (D VD). Pla ying back repeats the entire disc (Video CD , CD). DISC: Playing back repeats the entire disc (D VD only). 5 B A UD RA TE This sets the baud rate of the RS-232C interf ace. T wo baud rates of 4800 bps and 9600 bps can be selected. 6 TRA Y LOCK When set to ON, the opening and closing action of the disc tra y is lock ed. 7 BLA CKBO ARD LOCK When set to ON, entering the video blac kboard input mode is pre v ented. 8 ST A CK MODE OSD This controls ON/OFF s witching of the OSD when e xecuting a stack. ON: The ST A CK display appears on the screen when e x- ecuting a stack and when searching. OFF: The ST ACK displa y does not appear on the screen. 1 WEEKL Y TIMER The time f or turning the power on and off can be set f or each da y of the week; moreover , the title and chapter where play- back is to start can also be set. The player is limited to a maxiamm of 24 settings at one time. This function mak es unmanned operation possib le. OFF: The WEEKL Y TIMER function does not operate . ON: The WEEKL Y TIMER function operates. 2 PO WER ON ST ART This function sets whether or not automatic pla yback is to start when the power is s witched on. OFF: The PO WER ON ST ART function does not operate . ON: The POWER ON ST AR T function operates. It is also necessary to set the playbac k title and chapter to iden- tify the star ting point for pla yback. If this star ting point is not identified, the pla yer w aits in the playbac k stop status. 3 TITLE PLA Y MODE Single: When a single title has been selected in this mode, the D VD pla yer stops when this one title has been pla yed back. All: When this mode has been selected, the pla yer pla ys back each title on a D VD disc in tur n until all hav e been play ed. In order to set up the unique functions of the D VD-V7300D, there are settings f or 15 parameters that are made by the remote contr ol unit. AD V . SETUP MENU settings ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP ADV .SETUP page 2/2 PLA YER CONTRL P ANEL Selectable SETUP LOCK(MOUSE) ON EXTERNAL OPTION SW Standard SYNC OUT (DURING SQ) OFF EXTERNAL SYNC OFF A V SYNC COMPENSA TE ON Exit SETUP Above picture indicates the initial settings.
48 En 9 REV STEP/REV PLA Y This selects the image units f or re verse pla y . VO B U : This depends on the disc being play ed back, but usu- ally reverses in blocks of 0.4 - 1 second. Frame: Rev erses at inter vals of one frame. 0 PLA YER CONTROL P ANEL This selects the displa y mode of the icon panel that can be controlled with a mouse. Selectable: Press (click) the left and right buttons of the mouse simultaneously , or with the left button pressed, click the right button, and the icon control panel is displayed. Alwa ys On: The icon control panel is alw ays displa y ed. Ho w- e ver , there are times when the panel will not be displa y ed due to the various setup screens . Alwa ys Off: The icon control panel is not displa yed. - SETUP LOCK (MOUSE) This sets whether or not the SETUP or AD V .SETUP menu can be activated from the icon control panel. ON: The SETUP or AD V .SETUP menu cannot be activ ated from the icon control panel. OFF: When the SETUP button on the icon control panel is left- click ed with the mouse, the SETUP menu is acti- vated, and when the AD V .SETUP button is left-click ed, the AD V .SETUP menu is activated. = EXTERNAL OPTION SW This is used to set the ke y of the external option switch. Standard: Input of all e xter nal option ke ys is possible . Limit: Only the follo wing input is possible among the e x- ter nal option ke ys: Up/down/left/right cursor , ENTER, number ke ys 1-6, ST ACK GR OUP 1-6, TOP MENU , and MENU AD V . SETUP MENU settings ~ SYNC OUT (DURING SQ) This function sets whether or not a video synchronization sig- nal is output to a blac k screen or to a blue bac kground when the play er is not outputting video . OFF: Video is alwa ys output (the synchronization signal remains). ON: Video is not output at times other than dur ing playbac k and during menu screen display . ! EXTERNAL SYNC This selects the synchronized TV signal f ormat when external synchronization is input. OFF: This setting prohibits the external synchronizing func- tion. P AL : When the D VD disc is to be play ed back in P AL format. NTSC: When the D VD disc is to be played bac k in NTSC format @ A V SYNC COMPENSA TE This is set when a method that uses e xter nal synchronization is used, when the play er is used b y itself, and when m ultiple units are operated side b y side and the video frames are aligned. ON: When using the pla yer b y itself OFF: When multiple units are operated side b y side and the video frames are aligned Note Setting below items can not be changed during playback. Operate them in the stop mode. ÷ REV STEP/REV PLA Y ÷ EXTERNAL SYNC ÷ A V SYNC COMPENSA TE
49 En Advanced Operations Pla yer contr ol using a mouse Mouse operation is possible by connecting a PS/2 mouse and turning power ON. DV D . I Video CD . Button Selection Y ou can use the mouse to select D VD Menu b uttons and but- tons display ed on the screen. When the mark cursor is placed on a button, it changes to the mark. While the cursor is displa yed as the mark, clicking on a b utton with the left b utton on the mouse lets y ou perform operations in the same w ay as with the remote con- trol. * Menu selection with the mouse is not possib le with Video CDs. DV D . I Video CD . I CD .. Pla yer contr ol icon Pressing the mouse â s left and right button simultaneously or clicking the right b utton while holding the left button displa ys the play er control icons on the bottom left of the screen. When the mouse pointer is placed on a pla yer control icon, the pointer changes from to . While the pointer is in the form of , clicking with the left mouse b utton perf orms the same operation as the remote control unit b utton. ÷ The buttons appearing in video images recorded on com- mercially av ailable D VD video discs may not be located in the recognized positions . With such discs , please use the remote control unit instead of the mouse. Discs Function â á E 3 e 1 4 T OP MENU MENU DV D YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Video CD YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO NO CD YES YES NO YES NO YES YES NO NO NO T OP MENU MENU TOP MENU MENU SKIP SCAN STEP PLA Y STEP SCAN SKIP RETURN FWD REV A When the play er control icon already mentioned is left- click ed with the mouse, an action is perf ormed similar to that when each button of the remote control unit is pressed. During playbac k In the case of a D VD In the case of a Video CD In case of left click, this unit w orks as the icon indicatedVideo titles cannot be directly selected with a mouse. Right- clic king the pla yer control icon, as in the figure , displays a n umber at the upper right of the screen, and pressing the the title of the number that has been input to be selected. ÷ When SETUP LOCK (MOUSE) on the AD V . SETUP menu is set to OFF , the SETUP and AD V . SETUP buttons appear on the pla yer control panel. Y ou can click these b uttons with the mouse to enter the corresponding SETUP menu. ÷ When SETUP LOCK (MOUSE) is set to OFF and point â Aâ is dragged with the left mouse button held down, the location of the player control panel can be changed. Once the location is changed, the new loca- tion will be maintained until the power is turned off . The default panel position is restored when the power is turned off , then bac k on again. Initialization is also performed when the OSD position is changed and when the video blac kboard is display ed. NO TE ÷ The position of the pla yer controls cannot be changed during pla y- back of P AL discs. ÷ The position of the play er control panel cannot be changed when the [OSD P osition] in the SETUP MENU is set to [Wide] or when the video blac kboard is display ed. T rack n umber 4 The numbers consecutiv ely decrease by one . ENTER The numbers consecutiv ely increase by one . In the case of the rignt click Note If the title of the number that has been input is not present or mouse operation is prohibited, it cannot be executed.
50 En DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting/correcting the current time Set the current date and time. 1. Move the â° (pointer) to âÂÂWEEKL Y TIMERâ b y pressing or . 2. Press or and set to ON. 3. Press ENTER . ÷ The Weekly Timer setting screen is displa yed. 4. Press ENTER . ÷ The date/time setting screen is displa yed b linking. 5. Set the time of the day . ÷ Set figures in order of year (2 digits), month, da y , day of the week, hour , minute and second. These figures can be input in an y of the fol- lowing tw o methods. Example) T o set to 8:15:00, Satur da y April 29, 2000 T o correct the date or time When the setting screen appears in step 3 above, press ENTER so that the figures of the year start to blink. Then press NEXT 4 times so that the figures of hour blink, and set them with the same method as abov e. A . Input using the numeric buttons and NEXT B . Input using or and ENTER ÷ â Aâ and â Bâ in the f ollowing description refers respec- tively to the tw o operation methods abov e. A : Press 0 = 0 = NEXT = 0 = 4 = NEXT = 2 = 9 = NEXT = 5 = NEXT = 0 = 8 = NEXT = 1 = 5 = NEXT = 0 = 0 = NEXT . * The days of the week can be set using the fol- lowing numeric b uttons. MON: 0, TUE: 1, WED: 2, THU: 3, FRI: 4, SA T: 5, SUN: 6. B: Press the or to select 00 and press ENTER to start the setting of the next set of figures (the month in this case). Set the month, date , day of the week, hour , minute and second, and press ENTER to complete the setting operation. Note ÷ The internal clock has a tolerance of approximately ñ2 minutes per month. (The amount varies depending on the usage environment.) ÷ The built-in cloc k is powered b y a capacitor. The cloc k of this unit functions ev en when it is in the ST ANDBY mode, pro vided that the AC cord is plugged into a po wer outlet. If the AC cord is unplugged, the cloc k can con- tinue functioning for 7 to 10 days (when the capacitor is fully charged and at 25 ðC) . ÷ W eekly timer setting is kept remembered as if A C cord is unplugged for long times. W eekly timer function operation/display 5 00âÂÂ00âÂÂ00 âÂÂâÂÂâ 00:00.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 00âÂÂ04âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 3 -4 1 2 ON ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER ON POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP 1/3 shows that there are three pages of setting, and that this screen is the first of these pages.
51 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the weekl y timer 1. When the setting screen appears in step 3 on the previous page, press or to mo ve â° (pointer) to the day of the week and press ENTER . ÷ P ower ON/OFF time setting displa y appears. 2. Set the power ON/OFF time. Example 1) T o turn power ON at 10:30 on W ednesday ÷ Mov e â° (pointer) to â WEDâ and press ENTER . ÷ If the power OFF time is not set, the timer simply turns po wer ON. Example 2) T o turn power ON at 10:30 on Wednesda y and turn it off at 17:45 NO TE: It is also possible to set only the po wer OFF time without set- ting the power ON time . In this case, when pow er is tur ned ON manually , it will be tur ned OFF at the set time. A : Press 1 = 0 = NEXT = 3 = 0 = NEXT = NEXT . B: Press or to select 10 and press ENTER the item to set the setting of the next set of figures. Now Press or to set it to 30 and press ENTER twice. A : Press 1 = 0 = NEXT = 3 = 0 = NEXT = 1 = 7 = NEXT = 4 = 5 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 10 and press ENTER item to set the setting of the ne xt set of figures. Set the subsequent sets of figures to 30, 17 and 45 by repeating the above. ÷ Y ou can set the WEEKL Y TIMER with the mouse as well as with the remote control. ÷ Where is displa yed, clic king with the left mouse but- ton lets you change selections or settings . ÷ Each time you clic k the left mouse button, the numerical value is increased b y one, Each time y ou click the right button, the numerical v alue is decreased by one. 1 2 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER RETURN ENTER ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen.
52 En 3. Set the operation to be performed at the moment timer playbac k star ts. 1. TOP MENU: Setup for pla ying from top of the menu. 2. TITLE: Setup for pla ying the specified title and chap- ter . ÷ Ref er to âÂÂPlaying the specified title and chapter â . 3 . BARCODE/COMMAND ST A CK: Setup f or recalling the display of the bar code command stack gr oups from memory . ÷ Refer to âÂÂSetup for recalling the barcode/command stack groups from memory â (See page 53). ÷ Select one of the abov e with or , and press ENTER . NO TE ÷ This step cannot be performed if the power ON time has not been set. ÷ The data is written in memor y at the moment the timer setup screen is e xited. The timer setup will not be stored in memor y if power is turned off before or without e xiting the screen. ÷ On a D VD disc that has been setup to star t playbac k automatically , the setup made abov e will not be applied to the disc. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Clearing the set time With the TIMER ON/OFF time input screen (shown left) displayed, press CLEAR and then press ENTER of the remote control unit. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Pla ying the specified title and chapter ÷ Mov e â° (pointer) to â 2 TITLE â and press ENTER . Example) T o begin playback with Chapter 2 of Title 6 NO TE ÷ When a title and chapter are selected, pla yback continues after the selected chapter only when there is one or more chapter after it. Playbac k completes at the end of the se- lected title. If repeat playbac k is set in the AD V SETUP menu, the se- lected chapter is play ed first then the set repeat pla yback star ts. ÷ When setting tracks on a CD or Video CD , please enter the track number in the CHAPTER in the abo ve setting. At this time TITLE and BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACKs settings will not operate. A: Press 0 = 6 = NEXT = 0 = 2 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 06 and press ENTER to star t the setting of the ne xt set of figures. Now press or to select 02 and press ENTER . TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER 3 1 2 TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN ALL 10 30 17 45 T06:C02 3 TIMER ON/OFF WED 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER P ointer W eekly timer function operation/displa y ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. For y our reference Memorized data is not erased e ven if A C pow er cord is unplugged.
53 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting to turn on pla yer po wer only When selecting a title, enter a title which is not on the disc. Example: Enter title 99. DV D . Setup f or recalling the bar code/command stac k gr oups fr om memory ÷ Mov e the pointer to 3. BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK and press ENTER . Example) T o recall and ex ecute Barcode/Command stack group â 5â NO TE When a Barcode Command stac k group is selected, the com- mand stack within the g roup will be ex ecuted repeatedly re- gardless of whether the repeat mode in the AD V SETUP menu is set to ON or OFF . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the timer function not to operate with the weekl y timer setting left as is 1. Move the â° (pointer) to WEEKL Y TIMER on the AD V SETUP menu screen with or and set to OFF with the remote contr ol unit â s or . A : Press 5 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 005 and press ENTER . Now the timer setting is complete. TIMER ON/OFF SAT 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK 17 45 10 30 CLEAR RETURN ENTER 00 âÂÂ04 â 29 WED 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 10 30 17 45 GROUP005 ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP
54 En DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the WEEKL Y TIMER and Expandable Functions Y ou can change the day f or the WEEKL Y TIMER settings. This setting allows f or the power to be turned on and off more than two times in the same da y . In addition, with the ALL setting, the pla yer can be set to turn on and off at the same time every da y . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the da y for the WEEKL Y TIMER 1. Select the WEEKL Y TIMER setup screen. ÷ F or information on how to select this screen, see page 50 and 51. 2. When the setting area below ON is b link- ing, press PREV . ÷ The setting that indicates the da y of the week will begin to blink. 3. Select a day b y using or . 4. Press NEXT . ÷ For information on how to turn the timer ON/OFF and other settings, see page 51. In step 3 above, as you press or , the follo wing 8 possible settings will be dis- play ed: MON,TUE, WED , THU , FRI, SA T , SUN, and ALL. For information on how the WEEKL Y TIMER operates when ALL is se- lected, see pa g e 55. Y ou do not have to use the remote control, the mouse can be used as well. P osition the cursor o ver the day setting and c lick the left mouse button to c hange the da y . W eekly timer function operation/displa y ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. TIMER ON/OFF SUN 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF SUN 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF MON 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER TIMER ON/OFF MON 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK CLEAR RETURN ENTER 1 2 ë 3 4 ë MON ALL Display changes ë or Blink Blink Blink
55 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the po wer to turn on and off more than tw o times in the same da y Example 1) When set as seen in Example 1, the power turns on at 7:30 a.m. on Sunday and playbac k begins from the fir st title chapter (trac k) 1. Then the power turns off at 12:00 noon. At 1:00 p.m. on Sunday , the power turns on a gain and playbac k begins from the second title c hapter (track) 1. The power then turns off at 5:30 p.m. In this w a y , the play er can be set the time to turn on and off a maximum of 24 times on the same da y . DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the pla yer to turn on and off at the same time e very day Example 2) Refer to page 54 while setting the da y setting to ALL. After this is set, the time at which the play er will turn on and off every da y can be entered. In Example 2, the power turns on everyday at 7:30 a.m. and playbac k begins from the first title c hapter (track) 1. The power then turns off at 5:30 p.m. Example 3) As can be seen in e xample 2, if y ou want the power to turn on everyda y except Sunday , set the time in the OFF column f or Sunday exactl y the same as the time for the ON column of ALL. Leave the time setting in the ON col- umn for Sunda y blank. In Example 3, on Sunday the power is alwa ys off, while on the remaining da ys the power turns on at 7:30 a.m. and playbac k begins from the first title c hapter (track) 1. The power then turns off at 5:30 p.m. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the po wer to turn on and off in the other da y Example 4) As can be seen in e xample 4, the power turns on at 11:00 p.m. on Monday and turned off at 2:00 a.m. on T uesday (Monda y midnight). 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SUN SUN ALL 13 00 17 30 T02 : C01 07 30 12 00 T01 : C01 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 07 30 17 30 07 30 T01 : C01 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 23 00 02 00 T01 : C01 00 âÂÂ04 âÂÂ29 SAT 08:15.00 (1/3) RETURN MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SUN ALL 07 30 17 30 T01 : C01 Example 1) Example 2) Example 3) Example 4) List displa y List displa y List displa y
56 En DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Examples of when the times set for the WEEKL Y TIMER o verlap However when the ON time and the OFF times do overlap, please understand that the player will operate as indicated in the e xamples below . Example 5) In 1 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 2 the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. In this case, the OFF setting for 1 will be ignored, and the play er will tur n off at the time that was set for 2 . Example 6) In 2 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 1 the player beings to operate according to the time set for ON. In this case, the OFF setting for 2 will be ignored, and the play er will tur n off at the time that was set for 1 . Example 7) In 1 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 2 the player begins to operate according to the time set f or ON. In this case, the play er will tur n off at the time that was set for 2 . Example 8) In 2 , the player begins to operate according to the time set for ON. Next, in 1 the pla yer will turn off momentarily accord- ing to the time set f or OFF . Then, in 3 the play er begins to operate again at the time set f or ON. Lastly , the play er will tur n off at the time that was set f or 3 . Example 9) In 1 ALL(ev er yda y), the play er begins to operate according to the time set for ON e xcept for Sunda y . These settings re- sult in the play er turning on and off according to the times set for ON and OFF in 1 . The pla yer therefore will not oper ate on Sunday . Notes When the ON and OFF times are set to the same exact time, the play er will react differently according to pre viously desig- nated settings. In Example 9, when the ON and OFF times are set the same, the power is OFF and the player is in standby up until that designated time. When the ON and OFF times are set the same, in the case when the players is ON up until that time, the OFF time set for 2 will be ignored. REFERENCE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 12 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 2 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ALL SUN ON ON OFF OFF ON 1 2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 1 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 Result 1 2 Result 1 2 Result 1 2 3 Result 1 2 Result Except Sunday ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 2 1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Example 5) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 6) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 7) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 8) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or the same day . Example 9) When the f ollowing settings are selected f or ALL and SUN. (The times set for 1 ON and 2 OFF are the same time.) W eekly timer function operation/displa y
57 En Advanced Operations DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting the power on start function 1. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to âÂÂPO WER ON ST ARTâ b y pressing or . 2. Set it to ON b y pressing or . 3. Press ENTER . ÷ The POWER ON ST ART setting screen is displa yed. 1. Playing the top menu ÷ Move the â° (pointer) to 1. T OP MENU and press ENTER . 2. Playing the specified title and chapter ÷ Mov e the â° (pointer) to 2. TITLE and press ENTER . Example) T o begin playbac k with Chapter 2 of Title 6 NO TE ÷ When setting trac ks on a CD or Video CD , please enter the trac k number in the CHAPTER in the abov e setting. At this time TITLE and BARCODE/COMMAND ST A CKs settings will not operate. P o wer on star t function 1.T OP MENU: Playing from the top men u screen. 2.TITLE: Playing the specified title and chapter . 3.B ARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK: Recalling and executing the Bar code/Command stack gr oups in memory . ÷ Select one of the above with or , and press ENTER A : Press 0 = 6 = NEXT = 0 = 2 = NEXT . B: Press or to select 06 and press ENTER item to start the setting of the next set of figures. Now press or to select 02 and press ENTER . Y ou can set the PO WER ON ST ART FUNCTION with the mouse as well as with the remote control. ÷ Where is displayed, clicking with the left mouse but- ton lets you change selections or settings. ÷ Each time you click on a number with the left mouse button, it increases by 1. Each time you click on a number with the right mouse button, it decreases by 1. POWER ON ST ART 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK RETURN ENTER 1-2 3 ë POWER ON ST ART 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE TITLE 06 CHAPTER 02 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK RETURN ENTER ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART T06:C02 TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP In the case of 1 In the case of 2 In the case of 3 ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and exit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and retur n to the previous screen. Selecting the special title and chapter
58 En 3. Recalling and executing the Barcode/Com- mand stac k groups in memory ÷ Mo ve the â° (pointer) to 3. BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK and press ENTER . Example) T o e x ecute Bar code/Command stack gr oup 5 ÷ The AD V SETUP menu setup screen is displa yed again, in which the PO WER ON ST ART setting is sho wn. Now the setting of the operation to be perf or med at power ON is complete. NO TE With a disc with which pla yback star ts automatically , the op- eration ma y differ from the setting. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . Setting to turn on pla yer power onl y When selecting a title, enter a title which is not on the disc. Example: Enter title 99. DV D . I Video CD . I CD . T urning off the PO WER ON ST ART FUNCTION 1. On the AD V SETUP menu screen, move the â° (pointer) to PO WER ON ST ART with the remote control unit â s or and select OFF with the remote contr ol unit â s or . A : Press 5 = NEXT . B : Press or to select 005 and press ENTER . POWER ON ST ART 1.TOP MENU 2.TITLE 3.BARCODE/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 005 RETURN ENTER ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART GROUP 005 TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP P o wer on star t function Setting the Barcode/Com- mand stack ADV .SETUP page 1/2 WEEKL Y TIMER OFF POWER ON ST ART OFF TITLE PLA Y MODE Single REPEA T MODE OFF BAUD RA TE 4800bps TRA Y LOCK OFF BLACKBOARD LOCK OFF ST ACK MODE OSD ON REV STEP/REV PLA Y VOBU Exit SETUP For y our reference Memorized data is not erased e ven if A C pow er cord is unplugged. ÷ Select ENTER on the screen to enter the setting and e xit the screen. Select RETURN to cancel the setting and return to the previous screen. Setting is possible b y the mouse instead of the re- mote control. When the â° pointer is on MENU, click left button, ADV . SETUP menu is disappeared.
59 En Advanced Operations DV D . Ad vanced usa g e With the barcode stack/command stac k function of this unit, groups can be divided and memorized without influencing pre- viously input commands. This is con venient f or separate memorization of contents of more than one disc , or when one play er is being jointly used b y many people. T o register a group separate to the already pre viously memo- rized content 1. Register a ne w group \ Pag e 6 7 â GR OUP 002 â on the top right of the barcode stack/com- mand stack input screen is the g roup number that will be memorized. As the group number will be important for e xecution, please mak e a note of it so that you do not f orget it. 2. Input the bar code with the barcode reader and transmit to pla yer \ Pag e 6 1 ÷ Input can also be done with the remote control unit. \ P age 60-64 3. Repeat step 2 in the desired pla yback or - der . 4. When input is finished, store in the player â s memory \ Pa g e 6 5 5. Execution \ P age 74, 75 At this time please select the group number that w as noted in step 1. NO TE: Commands stored in the pla yer â s memory can be grouped together or divided \ P age 70-73 . Please note, ho wev er , that the order of commands can not be changed. This play er can be used as follows using the Barcode stac k/ Command stack function ÷ Commands in the barcode book included with the disc can be memorized in the play er in advance. (Barcode stack func- tion.) ÷ Barcodes can be set using the provided remote control f or discs that do not hav e barcodes, or for commands that y ou want to use that are not pro vided with barcodes. (Command stack function.) ÷ The remote control can be used f or recall and successive execution or step by step execution of memorized content. NO TE: ÷ The maximum number of steps that can be memorized in the player is 300 steps including video blackboards. ÷ Memorized data is not erased even if power to the unit is s witched OFF .Barcode/Command screen DV D . Basic usage How to use the barcode stac k/command stack function is in- dicated as f ollows: Details of those settings, ref er to the pages after â \â . 1. Displa y the barcode stac k/command stack setup screen with the remote contr ol \ Pag e 6 0 2. Input the barcode with the bar code reader and transmit to play er \ Pag e 6 1 ÷ Input can also be done with the remote control unit. \ Pa ge 60-64 3. Repeat step 2 in the desired pla yback or - der . 4. When input is finished, store in the player â s memory \ Pa g e 6 5 5. Execution \ P age 74, 75 Bar code/Command stac k function NO TE: The Barcode stack/Command stac k function will not op- erate with CD or Video CDs.
60 En The player can store commands input using LASERBARCORD and D VD barcodes. The stored commands can be recalled for either successive or step-by-step execu- tion. Memorized data is not erased e ven if AC po wer cord is Un- plugged. DV D . Displa ying the Barcode/ Command stac k screen 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla y er control panel. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. ÷ If barcodes hav e already been input, their data are shown in the screen. Select whether barcodes are to be input by er asing ex- isting barcodes or by adding them to the e xisting barcodes. ÷ T o input new barcodes from the beginning, select â YESâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ T o add new barcodes to e xisting barcodes, select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ Press ENTER to display the Barcode/Command Stack In- put screen. ÷ When barcodes have not been input, the Barcode/Com- mand Stack input screen will be displayed. ÷ The setting procedure of this screen will be described in the subsequent pages. ÷ Barcode/Command Stacks can be set directly using a barcode reader (optional) or set using the remote con- trol unit. 2 1 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME 000000 SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT Bar code/Command stac k setting Barcode/Command screen
61 En Advanced Operations DV D . Direct setting using a bar code reader 1. Read a bar code with a barcode reader . 2. Send it to the pla yer . Example 1) Read â PLA Y â and send it. Example 2) Read â Pla y Title 8 Chapters 5 to 12 with Subtitle 3, A udio 2 and Angle 1 â and send it. DV D . Setting using the remote contr ol unit Five commands including Pla y 3, P ause 8 , e Still/Step E and Stop 7 and W AIT and GO T O GROUP can be set using the remote control unit. The chapter search, chapter pla y , frame search and frame segment play* commands can also be set using the remote control unit. * Frame segment play is to play between two specific frames. Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ The TITLE number will blink and the input mode will be se- lected. Example 1) T o set â Playâ Press PLAY . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stac k Input screen shows â PLA Y â and increments to the ne xt Input screen. Example 2) enter the wait time 1. Press and hold PAUSE . ÷ â W AIT 000 sec â appears on the screen. 2. Use the number buttons to enter the wait time in seconds. ÷ The maxim um time v alue that can be entered is 999 3. Press NEXT . (completes the procedures) 1 2 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 PLA Y 30 ð 30 ð 7 m BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004: 006 WAIT 000sec.
62 En Example 3) T o â Play Title 3 Frames 123000 to 129000 â Example 4) T o â Play Title 5 Chapters 3 to 7 with Subtitle 3, A udio 2 and Angle 1 â 1 . Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ The TITLE number will blink. 2 . Press 3 = NEXT . ÷ Title 3 is set, and the mode s witches to F rame Input. 3 . Press 1 = 2 = 3 = 0 = 0 = 0 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the star t frame number . ÷ If the operation up to the present has been performed during playback, the input start frame is searched now . 4 . Press 1 = 2 = 9 = 0 = 0 = 0 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the end frame number . ÷ If the operation in steps 3 and 4 is performed during playback, you can press ENTER in place of specifying the frame number in steps 3 and 4 above. In this case, the frame number being played is input auto- matically . 1 . Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ The TITLE number will blink. 2 . Press 5 = NEXT . ÷ This sets title 5 and the chapter input mode starts. 3 . Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME to select SEARCH CHAPTER. ÷ This item sets the chapter number where pla yback should star t. ÷ Each press s witches â CHAPTERâ and â FRAMEâ al- ter nately . 4 . Press 3 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the star t chapter number . 5 . Press 8 = NEXT . ÷ This sets the end chapter number . 6. Press 3 = NEXT . ÷ This sets Subtitle 3. 7. Press 2 . (Do not press NEXT .) ÷ This sets Audio 2. 8 . Press 1 . (Do not press NEXT .) ÷ This sets Angle 1. Now go to the next step . For your ref erence T o play chapter 7 till the end as sho wn in Example 4), enter â 8â , obtained b y adding 1 to 7, in MARK CHAPTER. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 08 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Displa y when the example on the right is input Displa y when the example on the right is input Bar code/Command stac k setting Note The diff erence between search frames and mark frames can- not be set to 24 frames or less . The entry must be 25 frames or greater .
63 En Advanced Operations Example 5) T o input the command for setting Subtitle 1, A udio 2 and Angle 3 ÷ With a play command that specifies the start and end frames, it is not possible to set the subtitle , audio and angle simulta- neously . Howe ver , by placing the subtitle , audio and angle setting command as described above bef ore the frame sec- tion pla y command, the section playbac k can be ex ecuted with the specified setting. The input as shown abo ve allo ws to pla y title 3 frames 10000 to 15000 by setting Subtitle 1, A udio 2 and Angle 3. With commands other than the frame section play command, such as the frame search, chapter search and chapter sec- tion play commands, the specified setting is valid within each command. Example 6) T o repeat â Play Title 3 frames 123000 to 129000 â in Example 3 1 . When the wor d TITLE is blinking, enter â 00â in the TITLE. ÷ (Do not press NEXT .). 2 . Press SUBTITLE while the TITLE digits are blinking. 3 . When the SUBTITLE digits star t to blink, press 1 then NEXT . 4 . When the A UDIO digit star ts to blink, press 2 . 5 . When the ANGLE digital star ts to blink, press 3 . 1. Perf orm steps 1 to 4 in Example 3. ÷ The barcode/command stack input screen of the next step appears. 2. Press RPT A-B while the TITLE number is blinking. ÷ The REPEA T indicator appears on the screen. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE 01 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 3 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 SUBTITLE 01 AUDIO 2 ANGLE 3 002 03:10000 âÂÂ15000 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Press DISPLAY switches o ver to the follo wing displa y Item displa y List displa y 1. 2. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 002 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 002 REPEA T
64 En Example 7) Inputting a command to jump to another group. T o change a previously input â GO T O GROUP â command group number , press RECALL during Detailed or List display , and input the new n umber . Using this command enables consecutiv e jumping to different groups. < Conceptual representation > Y ou can also create standby display g roups. If you do this, you return to the standby displa y after jumping to another group . < Conceptual representation > DV D . Setting the Subtitle, A udio and Angle SUBTITLE ÷ â 00â turns the screen color to the color specified in â Back- ground color â in the GUI menu and makes the pla yed image invisib le. ÷ â 01â to â 32â displays the corresponding subtitle . ÷ â 33â plays with Subtitle OFF . ÷ â 34â is used to make the pla yed image made in visible with â 00â visible again. ÷ â 99â retains the pre vious condition. This is used to change other setting than SUBTITLE while maintaining the SUBTI- TLE setting the same. ÷ â 35â to â 98â are inv alid. A UDIO ÷ â 0â plays image with A udio OFF . ÷ â 1â to âÂÂ8 â selects and plays the corresponding audio . ÷ â 9â retains the previous condition. ANGLE ÷ â 1â to âÂÂ8 â selects and plays the corresponding angle . ÷ â 9â retains the previous condition. ÷ â 0â selects and pla ys Angle 9. NO TE ÷ When â retain the previous conditionâ is selected, â â½ â is dis- play ed in the input screen. ÷ The barcode/command stack cannot be e x ecuted if a value that does not exist in the disc is input. DV D . T o use only the c hapter sear ch or frame sear ch In item â MARK CHAPTERâ or â MARK FRAMEâ , simply press NEXT without setting anything. A still image is display ed after search. DV D . T o change a v alue during input Press the numeric button of the correct number (including 0). T o retur n to a previous setting point, press PREV . DV D . T o cancel input in the middle Mov e the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction) and press ENTER . 1 . When the TITLE number is flashing, press RECALL . 2 . The displa y changes to that indicated in the fig- ure on the left. Input the number of the gr oup you want to jump to, and press NEXT . GO TO GROUP - 002 * * * * GROUP - 001 GO TO GROUP - 004 * * * * GROUP - 002 GO TO GROUP - 010 * * * * GROUP - 004 REPEA T * * * * GROUP - 001 GO T O GROUP - 001 GROUP - 002 * * * * GO T O GROUP - 001 * * * * GROUP - 004 GO T O GROUP - 001 * * * * GROUP - 003 example RECALL 002 PLA Y or External option switch Group 002 example RECALL 003 PLA Y or External option switch Group 003 example RECALL 004 PLA Y or External option switch Group 004 Jump Bar code/Command stac k setting BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004: 003 GO T O GROUP - 000
65 En Advanced Operations DV D . Saving Bar code/ Command stac k When input has been completed to the end using the ex- ample operation, the barcode stack/command stack in- put screen for the ne xt step appears in a f ew seconds. When this screen appears, press or to move â° (pointer) to SA VE and press ENTER . NO TES: ÷ The input information is not saved if â° (pointer) is moved to SA VE and ENTER is pressed before the bar code stac k/com- mand stack input screen f or the next step appears. ÷ The input inf ormation is not sav ed if â° (pointer) is mov ed to EXIT and ENTER is pressed. DV D . T o delete a previousl y imput Bar code/ Command stac k 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displayed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stac k Input screen is display ed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â DEL â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction). 6. Select the step to be deleted b y pressing or . 7. Press ENTER . ÷ The selected step is deleted and the numbers of the sub- sequent steps are decremented by 1. 8. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT : Even if y ou have come to step 7 in the abo ve deletion proce- dure, y ou can still abort deletion by moving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing the cursor button (right direction) then pressing ENTER . The deletion is entered in memory when the â SA VE â operation is perf or med in step 8. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 001 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 08 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 001 001 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 002 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 002 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME 000000 SUBTITLE * A UDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT Step displa y ÷ The display disappears and the input inf or mation is sav ed. The displa y disappears.
66 En DV D . Correcting a pre viously input Bar code/ Command Stac k Example) T o change the Audio setting of step 003 fr om 2 to 1 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen is displa y ed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Select â 003 â°â by pressing or . 6. Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ This initiates the Barcode/Command Stack input mode. 7. Press NEXT 4 times to select item â A UDIO âÂÂ. 8. Press 1 . 9. Press NEXT . ÷ The next step â s Barcode/Command Input screen is dis- pla yed. 10. Move the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing and press ENTER . NO TE: T o save the corrected inf ormation, press NEXT repeatedly until the last item flashes (ANGLE in this example). Press NEXT one more time to mov e to the page f or the ne xt step . In this âÂÂne xt step âÂÂ, move â° (pointer) to SA VE and press ENTER to sav e data. The corrected information is not sav ed if â° (pointer) is mov ed to SA VE and ENTER is pressed bef ore the end of correction (in the middle of the step being corrected). DV D . Adding a step in a pre viously input Bar code/Command Stac k 1. Perf orm steps 1 to 4 of â Correcting a previ- ously input Bar code/Command Stac k âÂÂ. 2. Select the step where a new step is to be inserted by pressing or . 3. Move the â° (pointer) to â INSâ by pressing or and press ENTER . ÷ This inser ts a new step bef ore the selected step and the numbers of subsequent steps are incremented b y 1. 4. Press TITLE/CHP FRM/TIME . ÷ This initiates the Barcode/Command Stack input mode. 5. Set a step in the same way as â Setting a Barcode/Command Stac k settings â . (See page 61- 64) 6. Move the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing and press ENTER . BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 003 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 05 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 1 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001: 003 TITLE 05 SEARCH CHAPTER 03 MARK CHAPTER 05 SUBTITLE 03 A UDIO 2 ANGLE 1 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 003 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 004 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Bar code/Command stac k setting
67 En Advanced Operations DV D . Methods of Gr ouping Grouping some Bar code/Command Stacks A group can be formed with several Barcode/Command Stacks , and more than one group can be formed and stored. When e x ecuting a group of commands, select a group from the stored groups and e xecute them either consecutiv ely or step by step . It is also possib le to divide or delete a group . The f ollowing procedure consists of inserting a group delimiter after a group of barcode commands. Inserting a group 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displayed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press the ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stac k Input screen is display ed when the ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. ÷ Mak e sure that the â° (pointer) is located at the step im- mediately f ollowing the last entry . 5. Press NEXT . ÷ The input screen f or the first step of the ne xt Barcode/ Command Stac k group appears. ÷ The Barcode/Command Stacks of the ne xt group can be set from here. Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stac ks 1 2 3 4 5 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 002: 001 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT
68 En DV D . Switching the Bar code/ Command Stac k gr oup 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press the ENTER . ÷ The Barcode Input screen is display ed when the button is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Press PREV NEXT . ÷ Pressing NEXT switches o v er to the next g roup . ÷ Pressing PREV switches o v er to the pre vious group . DV D . Deleting a gr oup 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is displa yed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode Input screen is displa yed when ENTER is pressed. 2 3 1 NEXT PREV J SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/002 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 002/ 002 001 SUBTITLE 01 AUDIO 2 ANGLE 3 002 03:10000 âÂÂ15000 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stacks
69 En Advanced Operations 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y appears. 5. Select the gr oup to be deleted b y pressing PREV NEXT . 6. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â GROUPâ on the first line b y pressing . 7. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â DEL â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction). 8. Press ENTER . ÷ This deletes the selected group . 9. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction) and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT Even if y ou have come to step 8 in the abo ve deletion proce- dure, y ou can still abor t deletion by mo ving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing the cursor button (right direction) then pressing ENTER . The deletion is entered in memor y when the SA VE â operation is performed in step 9. 7-8 4 9 5 6 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT
70 En DV D . Dividing a previousl y input gr oup 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is display ed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen is displa yed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list display appears . 5. Select the step where the existing gr oup is to be divided by pressing or . ÷ Mov e the â° (pointer) the first step of the group created by division. 5 2 3 1 4 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME - - - - - - SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stacks
71 En Advanced Operations 6. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â INSâ by pressing or . 7. Press ENTER . ÷ This inser ts a vacant step bef ore the selected step and the numbers of subsequent steps are incremented b y 1. 8. Press NEXT . ÷ This divides the e xisting group at the v acant step . ÷ A new g roup is created. The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen of the first step of the newly created g roup is displa yed. 9. Mov e the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â b y pressing the cursor but- ton (right direction) and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT Even if y ou have come to step 8 in the abo ve g roup proce- dure, y ou can still abor t g roup by mo ving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ by pressing then pressing ENTER . The group is entered in memory when the SA VE â operation is perf or med in step 9. 6 8 7 9 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001/ 001 001 PLA Y 002 003 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 004 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 002: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 002: 001 TITLE 03 SEARCH FRAME 123000 MARK FRAME 129000 SA VE DEL INS EXIT
72 En DV D . Joining tw o Barcode/ Command Stac k groups 1. Press MEMORY . ÷ â BARCODE/COMMANDâ is display ed. 2. Press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack screen is displa yed. 3. Select â NOâ with or and press ENTER . ÷ The Barcode/Command Stack Input screen is displa yed when ENTER is pressed. 4. Press DISPLAY . ÷ The list displa y of the last group that was input is dis- play ed. 5. Change the group with PREV . ÷ Mov e the â° (pointer) to the next step of the pre viously input number with or . This becomes the divi- sion point. 2 3 1 4 5 BARCODE/COMMAND BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004/004 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 ALL CLEAR? YES NO BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004: 004 TITLE 00 SEARCH FRAME 000000 MARK FRAME 000000 SUBTITLE * AUDIO * ANGLE * SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 004/004 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 003 05:03 âÂÂ07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 004 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 âÂÂ23 â â â 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT Gr ouping some Bar code/Command Stacks
73 En Advanced Operations 6. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â DEL â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction). 7. Press ENTER . ÷ This deletes the group delimiter and joins the current group with the ne xt group to it. ÷ The numbers of the groups after the current g roup are decremented by 1. 8. Mo ve the â° (pointer) to â SA VE â by pressing the cursor b utton (right direction) and press ENTER . IMPOR T ANT Even if y ou hav e come to step 7 in the above g roup Joining, you can still abort group by mo ving the â° (pointer) to â EXITâ b y pressing the cursor button (right direction) then press- ing ENTER . The group is entered in memory when the SA VE â operation is perf or med in step 8. 7 6 8 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 004 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 âÂÂ23 â â â 003 004 005 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 003 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 âÂÂ23 â â â 003 PLA Y 004 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 005 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 003/ 003 001 02:000150 âÂÂ002050 002 06:22 â 23 â â â 003 PLA Y 004 03:123000 âÂÂ129000 005 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 006 007 008 SA VE DEL INS EXIT
74 En DV D . Recalling/ex ecuting barcode commands in memory T o excute a bar code command group: Load the disc to excute them. 1. Press RECALL . 2. Press PREV . 3. Input the number of the command gr oup to be recalled/executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT twice. ÷ This recalls and ex ecutes the selected group. T o execute steps in a command gr oup: Load the disc to excute them. 1. Press RECALL . 2. Press PREV . 3. Input the number of the command gr oup to be recalled/executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT . ÷ T o re-enter the group number , press PREV . 5. Input the number of the step to begin e x- ecution using the numeric b uttons. 6. Press NEXT . ÷ This recalls and ex ecutes the selected and subsequent steps in the selected group . NO TES: ÷ Pressing REPEAT repeats the e xecution of the set GROUP . ÷ If you press STEP in place of NEXT in step 6 above, command steps will be ex ecuted step by step . After one step has been executed, press NEXT to advance to the next step. Pressing PREV allows you to return to the previous step. Using a Bar code/Command Stacks BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 BC/COMMAND ST ACK GROUP 001: 001 Switching the command group Recall screen Recall screen Switching the command step NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla y er control panel.
75 En Advanced Operations DV D . Recalling/executing previously input barcode/command stack from the list view 1. Press RECALL . 2. Press DISPLAY . ÷ This displa ys a list of commands. 3. Select a gr oup by pressing PREV NEXT . ÷ Select the command group containing the command(s) to be e x ecuted. 4. Select a step b y pressing . ÷ Select the command step to begin e xecution with. If the command step number is left to âÂÂ001â on this step , the commands in the entire command group will be executed. 5. Press PLAY or STEP . ÷ Pressing PLAY starts consecutive ex ecution. ÷ Pressing STEP star ts step-by-step e xecution. Some titles may not be ab le to be recalled and e x ecuted. Example) The search command cannot be e xecuted with a title that does not show the chapter , time and similar inf or mation on the screen or with a disc that is not permitted to use the search function. BC/COMMAND ST ACK GR OUP 001/ 003 001 PLA Y 002 03:123000 â 129000 003 05:03 â 07 03 2 1 004 005 006 007 008
76 En The video blac kboard function of this unit allows y ou to dra w characters and pictures just lik e on a blac kboard. The drawn characters and pictures can be displa yed alone or superim- posed on the disc video . DV D . Operation using the mouse or ke yboard Connect the PS/2 mouse or PS/2 ke yboard to the mouse/ keyboard connector of this unit. (See page 84) DV D . Activ ating the blac kboard function T urn the power on. Clic k the right button an ytime to display the Blac kboard screen. Blackboar d screen ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT DV D . Inputting character s 1. Move the cur sor to ABC and c lick the mouseâ s left button. 2. Move the cur sor to the position where y ou want to input the first c haracter . ÷ The cursor changes to the I cursor in the area where character input is possib le. 3. Click the mouseâ s left button. ÷ â _â brinks. Y ou can input a character from this point. 4. Input a character . ÷ Characters can also be input from the PC k eyboard pro- vided that this is connected. The PC ke yboard can input characters by distinguishing the numerals , symbols and uppercase/lowercase alpha- bet as well as carriage returns. 5. Click the mouseâ s right button after com- pleting the input. ÷ The Blackboard screen is displa yed again. ÷ T o sav e the characters, use the procedure in â Saving characters or pictures â on page 78. Character Input/Output drawing (DVD video blackboard) 1-3 4 5 P IONEER_ ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT P IONEER_ 1 2 1 2 NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla yer control panel. Input âÂÂPIONEER â â Yâ cable
77 En Advanced Operations DV D . Using the drawing tools ÷ Use the mouse â s left button to select icon below . (LINE):Draws a straight line. (BO X): This tool can be switched b y click- ing to a tool for dra wing a line-en- closed rectangle, solid-painted rectangle or a rectangle the out- side of which is painted. : Paints in inside. : Paints in outside. (R OUND): This tool can be switched b y clic king to a tool f or drawing an ellipse, solid-painted ellipse or an ellipse the outside of which is painted. : Paints in inside. : Paints in outside. : This tool can be switched b y clic king to a tool for dra wing a thin, medium or thick line. : Each clic k switches the color to Red, Blue, Green, Y ellow , White, Blac k, Gray or Purple. : Saves the drawn picture. (See page 78 for the saving method.) : Cancels the drawn picture. Eac h click cancels the last drawn picture. Press with the mouse for more than 1 second to clear the entire drawing in the screen. : Clic k the mouse to exits the current screen . NO TE ÷ The Direction buttons ( ) and ENTER on the remote control unit can also be used f or the abov e op- eration. ÷ The blac kboard function will not function in a disc âÂÂs men u screen. DV D . Drawing a picture Press the mouse â s left button at the point you w ant to star t dra wing and mov e the cursor (without releasing the mouse button). (This operation is ref erred to as dragging.) 1. Select a drawing tool. 2. Move cur sor to the drawing start position. 3. Drag. ÷ A picture is dra wn as you mo ve the cursor . 4. Release finger from the mouse. ÷ Dra w other pictures by repeating the abo ve. ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT 1 2 3 4 ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT ABC COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT COLR SA VE UNDO EXIT Dra wing tool
78 En DV D . Saving c haracter s or pictures 1. Click SA VE on the screen. ÷ The Sav e screen is display ed. 2. Display the video where y ou want to begin displaying the object or te xt. ÷ â INâ blinks . ÷ Display the video b y controlling the play er control icon at the bottom left of the screen. 3. Click SA VE on the screen. ÷ This sets the display start position. ÷ â OUTâ starts to blink. 4. Display the video where y ou want to stop displaying the object or te xt. ÷ Display the video b y controlling the play er control icon at the bottom left of the screen. 5. Click the A UTO DISP on the screen. ÷ This sets the display end position. ÷ The characters or pictures are sa ved in the pla yer â s memor y . ÷ The group and step where they are sa ved are shown. 6. Click EXIT . ÷ The Blackboard screen is displa yed again. NO TE: ÷ By saving the characters and dra wing without playing a disc, the drawing can be displayed in a desired scene. (See page 80-81 for executing method.) ÷ Stored data is not erased e ven if po wer to the unit is s witched OFF . NO TE: ÷ With a D VD , the star t point (IN) and end point (OUT) can be set only within the same title. The time displa y of the IN and OUT points will be shown in ( ) or [ ]. In some cases the image may not be sa ved e xactly as they are in the original. ÷ The Direction buttons ( ) and ENTER on the remote control unit can also be used f or the abov e operation. DV D . Details on the blac kboar d Displa y mode (See next page) RED : Red BLU : Blue GRN : Green YL W : Y ellow WHT : White BLK : Blac k GR Y : Gr ay PUR : Purple 1 : Line width fine 2 : Line width medium 3 : Line width thick i : Painted inside o : Painted outside L : Line B: B o x R : Round Displa y end min.sec. Displa y star t min.sec. Displa y title 1 6 5 2-4 ABC COLR UNDO EXIT SA VE A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE GROUP 001 NEXT DISPLA Y AREA IN OUT GROUP 001 001 Râ 3, RED 02-015. 29~015. 36 A A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE GROUP 001 001 Râ 3, RED 02-015. 29~015. 36 A A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE GROUP 001 001 Râ 1, YL W 02-002. 41~032. 06 A 002 B â 3, GRN 01-027. 30~035. 08 A Character Input/Output dra wing (D VD video blac kboar d)
79 En Advanced Operations DV D . T o change the display mode 1. Move the cursor to the line y ou want to c hang e and clic k the left button of the mouse. 2. Move the cursor to A UTO DISP and c lick the left b utton of the mouse. Indicator display on the right edge of screen A : Displayed at the same time as the disc pla yback, from the set star t point through the set end point. A S : The video becomes a still image at the set start point. â A S : The video becomes a still image immediately be- f ore the set star t point. No display : The set characters or pictures are not displa yed. Pressing ENTER in this section star ts drawing. S : The video becomes the still image at the set star t point b ut objects are not display ed. Press ENTER on the remote control unit to star t pic- ture dra wing. â½ : The â½ mar k is display ed on the top right of the screen during playbac k. Pressing ENTER in this section star ts drawing. â½ S : The video becomes a still image , in which only the â½ mark is display ed, at the set start point. Press ENTER on the remote control unit to star t pic- ture dra wing. Meaning of display ed symbols â Sâ stands f or âÂÂStill image â and pla ys a still image at the IN point. â A â stands f or âÂÂA uto display â , which displa ys drawing in the screen set with A UTO DISP . â â½â displays only the â½ marking. âÂÂâÂÂâ displays a still image immediately bef ore the start of the IN point. DV D . P encil tool/freehand drawing Clic k the right button of the mouse in the video blac kboard input screen to turn the pointer into the pencil tool. Freehand dra wing is possible b y holding the mouse â s left button. Clicking the right button again displa ys the Blackboard screen. T o change the color or line width, select COLR or the tool on the Blackboard screen. (See â Dra wing T ools â on page 77.) NO TE: ÷ Pictures can be dra wn using the pencil tool but the y can- not be sa ved later . GROUP 001 001 R â 3, RED 02-015. 29~015. 36 A A UTO DISP DEL EXIT SA VE Indicator on the top of right Notes ÷ It takes time to dr aw a graphical image , so if you are using it to hide par t of the video image, the image-dra wing IN point must be set sufficiently in adv ance of the desired scene. Drawing time varies according to the type of drawn graphic and the number of dra wings. As a r ule of thumb , the dra wing time is usually in the range of 10 to 30 fr ames. ÷ If diff erent graphics are recorded in adjacent frames , they ma y not be drawn on the screen during continuous pla y- back due to dr awing speed constr aints. ÷ Operation will not be perf ormed according to the setting during frame rev erse or reverse pla yback. Dra w by dragging with the left b utton pressed.
80 En DV D . Gr ouping blac kboards Blackboards can be registered by dividing them into groups according to the disc and title to enable selectiv e use later . This makes it possible to store drawn characters and pictures in positions matching the played images. Pictures and characters comprising groups are also stored as steps. When executing the blackboards, arbitrary registered black- board groups can be selected and displayed. Groups also can be deleted. Selecting a group is done as f ollows. When â DISPLA Y AREA IN OUT â is displayed on the screen or when the â° (pointer) is display ed to the left of GR OUP , the group that you want can be selected by clicking on the NEXT or PREV displa y with the mouse. The group can be entered by selecting it and clic king on SA VE on the screen. DV D . T o select the gr oup 1. Press RECALL twice. ÷ The step section blinks . ÷ The step section should continue displa ying 000. ÷ When the step is 000, the entire group will be e x ecuted. ÷ When a step is selected, only the selected step in the group will be ex ecuted. 2. Press PREV . ÷ Group part blinks. 3. Input the number of the gr oup to be recalled/ executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT twice. ÷ This star ts ex ecution according to the selected black- board. DV D . T o ex ecute steps in a gr oup 1. Press RECALL twice. 2. Press PREV if y ou want to switc h the group. ÷ If you do not w ant to change the group , go to step 5 below . 3. Input the number of the gr oup to be recalled/ executed using the n umeric buttons. 4. Press NEXT . 5. Input the number of the step to begin e x- ecution using the numeric b uttons. 6. Press NEXT . ÷ This star ts ex ecution of the selected step in the selected group . ÷ The step setup is released after the step has been ex- ecuted. Gr ouping video blac kboar ds BLACKBOARD GROUP 001: 000 BLACKBOARD GROUP 001: 000 GROUP 001 001 R â 1, 02-002. 41~032. 06 A 002 B â 3 01-027. 30~035. 08 A YLW GRN Step Group Select the group Select the step NO TE The system cannot enter this mode during display of the pla yer control panel.
81 En Advanced Operations DV D . Recalling/e xecuting pre viously input b lac kboar ds while observing their list 1. Press RECALL twice. 2. Press DISPLAY . ÷ This displa ys a list of commands. 3. Select a gr oup by pressing PREV NEXT . 4. Select a step b y pressing . 5. Press ENTER . NO TE Press CLEAR to clear the characters or pictures being displa yed. How e ver , characters and pictures that ha ve been set with the A UTO DISP cannot be cleared with CLEAR . Displa y of the recalled character s and pictures Characters and pictures recalled b y â Ex ecuting an entire group â are not displa yed in the order the y were registered but in or- der of the locations of the set displa y star t points. When a characters or picture is displa yed while another char acter or picture is already displa yed, the ne wly displa yed character/ picture is superimposed abov e the existing char acter/picture, and all characters/pictures are displa y ed until the last displa y end point among the set displa y end points. ÷ When pictures A and B are display ed, picture B appears after the displa y of picture A has ended. ÷ When pictures A and C are displa yed, picture C appears abov e picture A which is already displayed, and the displa y of pictures A and C ends at the picture C end point. ÷ When pictures C and D are displa yed, picture D appears abov e picture C which is already displayed, and the displa y of pictures C and D ends at the picture C end point. GROUP 001 001 R â 1, 02-002. 41~032. 06 A 002 B â 3, 01-027. 30~035. 08 A Example Time Flow (Start point) (End point) (Start point) (End point) (Start point) (End point) (Start point) (End point) YLW GRN Select the group Select the step
82 En Synchr onized use of 2 or more player s ÷ Using a single sync generator to synchronize two or more players ÷ Make sure that the terminator switch is ON on the terminal player and OFF on the other players. ÷ When applying synchronization to one play er , set the ter minator switch to ON. INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND NO TE: When you return to D VD Video playbac k after text file displa y , playback resumes from where you clic ked on the b utton. Video te xt retriev al DV D . This pla yer enab les playbac k of te xt files recorded on D VD Video discs. With the Video T ext Retriev al function, you can use the mouse to clic k on buttons displa y ed during D VD Video disc playback. Thi s provides te xt file indications corresponding to the button, either separately displa yed on-screen or superimposed over a D VD st ill image. ÷ The Video T ext Retrie val function oper ates with Video T ext Retrie v al compatible discs. It does not operate with regular D VDs that do not feature recorded text files. ÷ Video T ext Retrie val is our original format. External synchr onizing function DV D . T o tur n on this this function, set the EXTERNAL SYNC option under the AD V . SETUP menu to OFF , and then set either NTSC or P AL according to the type of disc to be play ed. Fur ther , select NTSC or P AL of the TV SYSTEM selector on the rear panel depending on the disc which is to be played. Through external input of a synchronization signal (black burst), video output signals can be synchronized with external signal s on the D VD-V7300D . (Dur ing D VD disc playbac k.) Through the use of this function, video switch timing can be matched, and switching can be done without causing picture disturbance on the TV without the need for such de vices as a TBC (Time Base Collector). NO TE: ÷ When the external synchronizing function is turned on, discs other than DVD cannot be played. ÷ Loc king to the sub carrier element of the blac k burst signal will not occur . ÷ During the approximately 5 seconds needed for locking to the external synchronizing signal, there will be video disturbance at the video output jacks. ÷ Input the external synchronizing signal before playback of the DVD disc. Synchronization will not operate if input is done afte r playback is started. ÷ In cases where tw o or more D VD-V7300D units are externally syncronized and their videos are started sim ultaneously for frame-synchroniz ed playbac k, tur n off A V SYNC COMPENSA TE on the AD V . SETUP menu. The e xter nal sync function works only with DVD play: it does not work with any other operation. Welcome T o The Islands Of Everlasting Summer! Welcome T o The Islands Of Everlasting Summer! No 1 No 2 No X INPUT BLACK B URST SIGNAL â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . ON OFF ON
83 En Connection/etc. Precautions when connecting the play er This pla yerâ s Analog copy protect technology is cop y guarded. If you connect the pla yer to a TV via a VCR, or record and pla yback the contents of a disc with a VCR, the pla yback picture ma y not be nor mal. Connecting the player Ho w to displa y total hour s pla yed and po wer on time DV D . I Video CD . I CD . This unit is capable of displa ying the total play time and po wer ON time as the working condition and maintenance timing inf or mation. The pla y time and power ON time can be displa yed as de- scribed below . 1. Press and hold DISPLAY on the fr ont panel of the main unit before turning po wer ON, and press STANDBY ON . 2. The screen shows the f ollowing: 3. When an operation (pla yback fr om the re- mote, for e xample) is performed, the time information displa y disappear s and normal operation starts. NO TE ÷ As the time is measured by the CPU cloc k, the inf or mation includes an error of up to 2%. ÷ This is not capable of turning the total play time and power ON time as the working condition and maintenance timing inf or mation to 0. OPERA TING TIME POWER ON 00105:46 PLA Y 00078:13 T otal play time, which is 78 hours 13 munites in this e xample. P ower on time, which is 105 hours 46 munites in this e xample. Right Left â© â© â© ÷ Connect plugs to the terminals that match the plug âÂÂs color (white, red, yello w). ÷ Align the plug with the connector in the proper orientation and inser t, then tighten the lock screws . ÷ Align the plug properly with the tab on the connector , and press in carefully , then rotate to the right to lock. â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . ÷ Connect the TV with S-VIDEO ter minal to the S-VIDEO output terminal of this player . screw Video output Audio output Interface connector (RS-232C) S-video output External Sync input (BNC)/Video output (BNC)/ Component video output (BNC) Advanced Operations
84 En Connection of mouse and keyboard A commercially av ailable PS/2 mouse or PS/2 k e yboard can be connected to this unit â s mouse/ke yboard connector as f ollo ws . 1. T urn this unitâ s POWER off to set it to the standby mode. 2. Connect the PS/2 mouse or PS/2 keyboar d to this unitâ s mouse/keyboar d connector . 3. T urn this unitâ s PO WER ON. Connection is now complete. If you w ant to use both the mouse and ke yboard, connect them using a commercially av ailab le âÂÂY â cable. Note: ÷ The power rating of this mouse/k eyboard connector is no more than 5V 100mA. Do not use a mouse or key- board with a current drain exceeding the rating of 100mA. ÷ Cer tain commercially av ailable PS/2 mouse models , PS/ 2 ke yboard models and â Yâ cables ma y not be compat- ible with this unit. For details, please consult PIONEER technical suppor t. TV SYSTEM selector Video output changes as f ollows according to the pla yback disc â s recorded f or mat. NTSC-P AL, P AL-NTSC conversion is possib le on Video CDs. P AL-NTSC conv ersion is not possible on D VDs. When the TV SYSTEM selector is set to the A UT O position, the disc â s for mat will be output as is. When a CD or disc is not loaded, the previ- ous video output will be selected. About MOD . (Modulation) P AL Most model of the newly de veloped countdo wn P AL TV sys- tem detect 50 Hz (P AL)/60 Hz (NTSC) and automatically switch vertical amplitude, resulting in a display without vertical shrink- age . On some TVs, the picture may shrink v er tically , leaving b lack bands at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not malfunction; it is caused by the NTSC-P AL conv ersion. If your P AL TV does not hav e a V -Hold control, you ma y not be able to view NTSC disc because the picture may roll. If the TV has V -Hold control, adjust it until the picture stop rolling. Disc T ype Format D VD NTSC PA L Video CD NTSC PA L CD , No disc Output f or mat P osition of TV SYSTEM selector NTSC P A L AUTO NTSC MOD. P AL NTSC âÂÂâÂÂâ PA L PA L NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC NTSC P AL P AL NTSC P AL NTSC or P AL AUTO NTSC PAL TV SYSTEM â Yâ cable Connecting the pla yer
85 En Connection/etc. INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND TV SYSTEM Computer Connect one or the other A udio input (L, R) A udio input (monaural) Video input (pin plug) S-Video input (S) T elevision (monitor tele vision) Connect one of these three inputs Video input (BNC) Sync signal output terminal ÷ T elevision (monitor TV) ÷ Control Computer ÷ Sync Generator These instructions indicate the con- nections made when connecting this component directly to a tele vision (monitor TV) to perform disc pla yback. Connection example 1 Set this s witch â ONâ when using 1 play er, and when not con- necting any com- ponents. Set to COMPOSITE RS-232C ÷ Please also refer to the man ual for the TV (monitor TV) that y ou are connection to. Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied AC cord which fits to the household A C outlet) â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer .
86 En INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP b Pr L AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND AC IN TV SYSTEM Connect to the Component Video input ÷ The description of the component video input connectors may diff er de- pending on the TV set or monitor. ÷ If the color of the picture is thin or something wrong, adjust the color setting of the TV you are connection to . BNC cables (sold separ ately) A udio input T o SYNC generator T elevision with the component video out (monitor television) Component video input Set to COMPONENT â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . T o computer Do not connect to the component video input of the high- vision TV (Y , P B , P R ). Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied A C cord which fits to the house- hold AC outlet)
87 En Connection/etc. INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B PR L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT TV SYSTEM A V receiver with digital input for Dolby Digital. When connecting the pla yer to an amplifier with Dolby Digital in- puts. *Make this connection when using this unit with Pioneer â s VSA-E06, VSA-E07 A V amplifier . ÷ Connect this unit â s digital output PCM/ jack to the Dolby Digital input jac k of a Dolby Digital compatib le amplifier . ÷ Select whether or not to use the coaxial digital output according to the amplifier â s input jack. VIDEO IN D VD , LD , A UDIO IN PCM/ /DTS â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . ÷ Some discs may not allow digital output when this pla yer â s output down sampling is set for 96 kHz (see page 41). Connection example 2 Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied AC cord which fits to the household A C outlet)
88 En INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B PR L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND TV SYSTEM INTERFACE CONNECTOR AUDIO OUT EXIT SYNC IN BLACK BURST COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT OFF ON VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPOSITE (MONO) AUDIO OUT PCM/ DIGITAL OUT R YP B P R L AC IN AUTO NTSC PAL SIGNAL GND TV SYSTEM A V amplifier AUDIO IN VIDEO IN ÷ Surround sound can be enjo yed with amplifiers that hav e a built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder . ÷ F or more details, ref er to the connected componentâ s operation manual ÷ Connect this pla yerâ s audio output jacks to an amplifierâ s CD , LD , A UX or other audio input jacks . (Do not connect to PHONO jacks.) ÷ Connect this play erâÂÂs video output jac k to the amplifierâÂÂs video input jac k. Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the supplied A C cord which fits to the household A C outlet) A V amplifier Digital A udio recorder Y ou can connect to a digital audio recorder as MD ,CD-R or D A T . Digital audio input Digital audio recorder (MD play er, CD-R pla yer , or DA T pla yer , etc.) ÷ Connect this pla yerâ s coaxial digital output jacks to MD pla yer , CD-R pla yer , or DA T play er . ÷ Connect this unitâ s digital output PCM/ jac k to the digital audio recorder . NO TE When you record the Dolby Digital DVD, set [Digital Out- put] (see page 34) to [Dolby Digital 3PCM]. If [Digital Out- put] is set to [Dolby Digital] during recording Dolby Digital DVD, noise is recorded. â© Cables can be f ound at your local audio/video dealer . Finally , connect to a home wall outlet. (Connect the sup- plied A C cord which fits to the household AC outlet) By connecting to a regular A V amplifier or stereo amplifier , you can enjoy playback with improved sound quality . Connection example 3 Connection example 4
89 En Connection/etc. When used in wireless mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC When used in wired mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC Using a Laser Barcode Scanner (Sold Separately) Laser Barcode Scanner T o use the optional LaserBarcode Scanner (UC-V108BC or UC-V109BC) in the wired mode to transmit signals , connect the LaserBarcode scannerâ s connection cord to the play erâ s front-panel EXT .CONT jack. T o transmit barcode signals in the wireless mode, aim the re- mote control unit tow ard the play erâ s remote control signal receiver . Consult the LaserBarcode Scannerâ s Operating In- structions for details on operation. Note: ÷ During oper ations using the LaserBarcode Scanner , attempt- ing to operate the pla yer by means of the remote control unit, pla yer operating b uttons, or serial commands from a computer ma y cause malfunctions. When using the LaserBarcode Scanner in the wired mode, the remote control unit is disab led in order to pre vent error commands from the remote control unit. For this reason, it is recommended that the wired mode be used. ÷ When the pla yer is operated via barcodes , the on-screen displa ys when this play er is operated such as âÂÂPlayâ and âÂÂStopâ do not appear. ÷ When a CD or Video CD disc is loaded, barcode commands issued for LD or DVD are ignored. ÷ When a D VD is loaded, commands issued for CDs are ig- nored. 7m 30 ð 30 ð When used in wireless mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC When used in wired mode: Optional LaserBarcode Scanner UC-V108BC Using a Laser Barcode Scanner (Sold Separately) Laser Barcode Scanner T o use the optional LaserBarcode Scanner (UC-V108BC or UC-V109BC) in the wired mode to transmit signals , connect the LaserBarcode scannerâ s connection cord to the play erâ s front-panel EXT .CONT jack. T o transmit barcode signals in the wireless mode, aim the re- mote control unit tow ard the play erâ s remote control signal receiver . Consult the LaserBarcode Scannerâ s Operating In- structions for details on operation. Note: ÷ During oper ations using the LaserBarcode Scanner , attempt- ing to operate the pla yer by means of the remote control unit, pla yer operating b uttons, or serial commands from a computer ma y cause malfunctions. When using the LaserBarcode Scanner in the wired mode, the remote control unit is disab led in order to pre vent error commands from the remote control unit. For this reason, it is recommended that the wired mode be used. ÷ When the pla yer is operated via barcodes , the on-screen displa ys when this play er is operated such as âÂÂPlayâ and âÂÂStopâ do not appear. ÷ When a CD or Video CD disc is loaded, barcode commands issued for LD or DVD are ignored. ÷ When a D VD is loaded, commands issued for CDs are ig- nored. 7m 30 ð 30 ð
90 En T r oubleshooting If you are wondering whether you have a breakdown, please check and find out. A slight mistake in operation can mak e you think that y ou hav e a breakdown. Fur ther more, f actors other than this pla yer can also be considered. Check the tel- e vision, the A V amplifier and the speakers, etc., that y ou use together with this pla yer . When the prob lem is not corrected, e ven after inspecting again according to the items belo w , con- tact the store where you purchased the player or the nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center . P ower does not come on. â¡ Connect the power cord to the outlet properly (page 86 - 89). Even when the disc table is c losed, it comes out. â¡ Set the disc in the disc table properly (page 16). â¡ Clean the disc (page 8). â¡ Check the region no. (page 13, 91). The screen does not appear . â¡ Check the setting of the video output selector at the rear of this pla yer with the connected video terminal (page 85, 86). â¡ Confirm that connections are correct (page 83-88). â¡ Mak e the television or A V amplifier setting, etc., to D VD pla y- back setting. Cannot play bac k. â¡ Clean the disc (page 8). â¡ Set the disc in the disc table properly (page 16). â¡ Remov e the condensation in the play er (page 8). â¡ SECAM f or mat discs cannot be pla y ed back. â¡ Inser t the disc with the proper side up. The contents of the settings disappear . â¡ When the pow er has been tur ned off due to a power outage and the power cord ha ving been pulled out while the power is turned on, the contents of the settings disappear. Make sure to pull out the pow er cord after the pow er b utton of the pla yer or the power b utton of the remote control has been pressed and the indicator has turned orange. The screen stops and the operation b uttons are not accepted. â¡ After pressing STOP , play back once more. The mark appear s on the screen. â¡ The disc prohibits that operation (page 13). The mark appear s on the screen. â¡ The pla yer prohibits that operation (page 13). Cannot use the remote contr ol. â¡ Operate within the usage r ange of the remote control. (page 16) â¡ Replace the dry cell batteries of the remote control with new ones (page 5). External synchr onizing cannot be performed. â¡ Ref er to the EXTERNAL SYNC setting in the AD V . SETUP me nu . (page 48) â¡ Check the notes under â NOTEâ for the external synchroniz- ing function. (page 82). No sound comes from the speaker s or the sound is distorted â¡ Confir m that the audio cable is properly connected (pages 83-88). â¡ Some discs prohibit 96 kHz digital output of Linear PCM audio . With these kinds of discs , ev en if the [96 kHz PCM Out] setting of [Audio 1] of the setup menu screen is set to [96 kHz], it is automatically changed to 48 kHz and output. (page 41). â¡ During playback of a DVD recorded at 96 kHz in 16:9, when [4:3 (Letter Box)] of [Video] is selected, e v en if the setting of [96 kHz PCM Out] of [Audio 1] is set to [96 kHz], it is auto- matically changed to 48 kHz and output (page 29). â¡ Clean the disc (page 8). â¡ If it has been set to the pause or slow pla yback mode, change to the playbac k mode (page 21). â¡ If the volume of the tele vision or A V amplifier , etc., has been set to â minim um â , raise the v olume. â¡ Confir m that the connector plug has been sufficiently in- ser ted and that it has not been disconnected. â¡ If the connector plug and terminal are dir ty , wipe them. The screen is extended vertically or horizon- tally . â¡ Adjust the [TV Screen] setting (page 30). There are difference in v olume between D VD and CD . â¡ This is due to the difference in the disc recording methods . The picture is distor ted or dark during D VD playbac k â¡ This play er has the cop y guard of an analog copy protect system. Some discs have a cop y prohibition signal. When those types of discs are play ed back, a condition such as lateral stripes on par t of the screen appears, but this is not a malfunction. The playbac k screen is distorted when a D VD video has been recorded on a VCR and played back on a VCR â¡ This play er has the cop y guard of an analog copy protect system. Some discs have a cop y prohibition signal and when that kind of disc is play ed back on a VCR, and recorded and play ed back on a VCR, it cannot be play ed back nor mally due to the copy guard. The television, etc., malfunctions â¡ Some tele visions with a wireless remote control function mal- function due to the remote control of this pla yer . Use them separated from this pla y er . When setup menu screen appears, a screen set to letter bo x suddenl y becomes extended vertically . â¡ When setup menu screen appears during playback in the letter box or pan & scan modes, the screen size is forcibly changed to the wide-screen mode, but this is not a malfunc- tion. (See page 30) This play er may not operate normally due to outside influ- ences such as static electricity . At such times it ma y operate normally after the po wer cord has been temporaril y unplugged and plugged in again. When the pr oblem has not been solved by this pr ocedure, consult the store where y ou purchased the play er or the nearest service station.
91 En Connection/etc. Aspect Aspect ratio ref ers to the length to height r atio of TV screens. The ratio of a normal TV is 4:3, while the ratio of a Hi-vision TV or wide TV is 16:9. This allows y ou to enjo y a picture with a wider perspectiv e. Component video output The color signal of the TV is divided into the luminance (Y) signal and the color (P B and P R) signals and then output. In this wa y mutual interference of each signal is a voided. On a TV with component input jacks , these signals are synthesized to produce the picture. P arental level This function was suggested b y parents. Parental le v el con- trol are restrictions incor porated into scenes that allow par- ents to pre vent their children from viewing them if the y desire. Dynamic range Dynamic range ref ers to the difference between the maximum and minimum le vels of the audio soundtr ack as measured in decibels (dB). Dolb y Digital The maximum 5.1 channels of audio used in the surround system (Surround Digital) f or movie theaters is digital data compressed by A C-3. For D VD discs, the digital output PCM/ jac k m ust be con- nected to the amplifier or processor â s digital input AC-3/PCM jack. Pla yback Control (PBC) This ref ers to signals recorded on a Video CD (V ersion 2.0) enabling pla yback control. Y ou can use menus recorded on discs with PBC for easy , in- teractiv e search f or desired scenes and playbac k. Y ou can also enjoy vie wing high-resolution/standard resolu- tion still images. Multi-angle When you w atch regular TV programs you are w atching the image filmed through the TV camera. Because of this, the picture is display ed on your TV from the view point of the TV camera â s position. In a TV studio the image is filmed by man y cameras at the same time . One of those images is selected by the prog ram director and transmitted to y our TV . If all the filmed images were transmitted to y our TV you would be ab le to select the camera image y ou want. Some D VD discs are recorded with the angles of all the camera â s used for filming and you can select among them when using this pla yer . These types of discs are called multi-angle discs. Multi-audio Some DVD has multi audio language. Up to eight diff erent languages (8 streams) can be recorded on a D VD disc , The multi audio function can be used to select the language of your choice. Subtitle Subtitles are language titles superimposed on movies etc. Up to 32 diff erent subtitle languages can be recorded on a D VD disc. The subtitle function can be used to select the language of your choice . Regional restriction codes (Region number) Regional restriction codes are built in to D VD pla yers and D VD discs f or each sales region. If the regional restriction codes of the D VD player does not match one of the regional restriction codes of the D VD disc, pla yback is not possible. The regional restriction code can be f ound on the rear panel of the D VD play er. The illustration below sho ws the regions and corresponding region numbers . Linear PCM This ref ers to D VD audio recording f or mat. It is the same for- mat as that of CD audio , but the sampling frequency is re- corded at 48 kHz and 96 kHz, and audio with a higher sound quality than that of a CD can be enjo y ed. DTS DTS stand f or Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround sys- tem diff erent from Dolb y Digital that has become a popular surround f or mat for movies. MPEG MPEG stand f or Moving Picture Expert Group. This is an in- ternational standard for compression of moving images . On some D VDs, digittal audio has been compressed and recorded in this f or mat. PCM PCM stands f or Pulse Code Modulation and is digital audio . The digital audio of CD or DVD discs is PCM. 5.1 ch This ref ers to multi-channel audio with a special low sound range 0.1 channel added to the fiv e channels of front left/r ight, center and rear left/right. It is used by the Dolby Digital and DTS surround systems. T erms DOLBY D I G I T A L
92 En/Fr Specifications General System .............................................................. D VD system and Compact Disc digital audio system P ower requirements ........................ AC 220-240 V , 50/60 Hz P ower consumption ....................................................... 15 W P ower consumption in standby mode .......................... 0.8W W eight ......................................................................... 4.5 kg Dimensions ....................... 210 (W) x 412 (D) x 119 (H) mm (Not including protruding cables, etc.) Operating temperature .................................. 5 ð C to 35ð C Operating humidity .... No more than 85% (no condensation) Video Output Output lev el ................................................................ 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠when loaded, synchronous negative) Jac ks .................................................................... BNC, RCA S-Video Output Y (luminance) - Output le vel ............................. 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Output le vel .............................. 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Component video Output Y - Output level ....................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC P B - Output level ................................... 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC P R - Output level ................................... 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC S/N ratio ..................................................... more than 60 dB Horizontal resolution ..................................... more than 500 External synchr onizing input Input signal lev el ................................................. Black burst 0.3 Vp-p (75 ⦠) BNC x 2 (loop through) A udio Output Output lev el During audio output .................. 200 mVr ms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) Number of channels ............................................................ 2 F requency response .......... 4 Hz to 22 kHz (D VD fs: 48 kHz) 4 Hz to 20 kHz (CD) S/N ratio ......................................................... 115 dB (EIAJ) Dynamic range ................................................. 98 dB (EIAJ) W ow and flutter .............. ñ0.001% W . PEAK or lower (EIAJ) Other T erminals Coaxial digital output .............................................. RCA jack Communication interf ace .............................. D-SUB , 15-pin Accessories Audio cord .......................................................................... 1 Video cord .......................................................................... 1 AC cord .............................................................................. 2 Remote control unit ............................................................ 1 AA (R6P) dry cell batteries ................................................. 2 Laser barcode sheet .......................................................... 1 Operating Instructions ........................................................ 1 NO TES: ÷ All values listed in these specifications are standard values. ÷ The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. Caractéristiques techniques Généralités Syst è me ........................ D VD et Compact Disc Digital Audio Alimentation ......................................... 220-240 V , 50/60 Hz Consommation .............................................................. 15 W Consommation en veille ............................................... 0,8 W Poids ........................................................................... 4,5 kg Dimensions ............................... 210 (W) x 412 (P) x 119 (H) (Non compris les parties saillantes, c âbles, etc.) T emp é rature de fonctionnement ..................... 5 ðC à35 ðC Humidit é ambiante .... Inf érieure à85% (sans condensation) Sorties vidéo Niveau de sortie .......... 1 Vc-c (75 Ohms, n é gatif synchrone) Prises ................................................................... BNC , RCA Sorties S-vidéo Niveau de sortie de la luminance (Y) ........ 1 Vc-c (75 Ohms) Niveau de sortie de la chrominance (C) ............... 286 mVc-c (75 Ohms) Sortie des vidéo component Niveau de sor tie de Y ................... 1,0 Vc-c (75 Ohms) BNC Niveau de sortie de P B .................. 0,7 Vc-c (75 Ohms) BNC Niveau de sortie de P R .................. 0,7 Vc-c (75 Ohms) BNC Rapport signal/bruit ........................................ plus de 60 dB D é finition horizontale ........................................ plus de 500 Entrée de synchronisation e xterne Niveau du signal d â entré e ...................................... Salv e noir 0,3 Vp-p (75 â¦) BNC x 2 (en boucle) Sortie audio Niveau de sortie Niveau de sortie num é rique ...... 200 mV eff. (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Nombre de voies ................................................................. 2 R é ponse en fr é quence ... 4 Hz à22 kHz (Fs de D VD: 48 kHz) 4 Hz à20 kHz (CD) Rappor t signal/br uit ......................................... 115 dB(EIAJ) Dynamique ........................................................ 98 dB(EIAJ) T aux de pleurage et de scintillement ............ ñ0,001% cr ê te, pond ér é , ou moins (EIAJ) Autres prises Sor tie coaxiale .............................................................. RCA Interf ace de communication ................... D-SUB, 15 broches Accessoires Cordon audio ..................................................................... 1 Cordon vid é o ...................................................................... 1 Cordon d â alimentation ........................................................ 2 T él écommande .................................................................. 1 Piles s èches AA/R6P ......................................................... 2 Feuilles de barres codes laser ........................................... 1 Mode d â emploi .................................................................... 1 Remarque: ÷ T outes les valeurs indiqu ées dans ces car act é ristiques tech- niques sont des valeurs standards . ÷ Les car act éristiques et la pr ésentation peuvent ê tre modifi é es sans avis pr é alable àfin d â amé lior ation. Français
93 Ge/It Connection/etc. T echnisc he Daten Allgemeines System ...................................................... D VD-System und digitales Compact Disc-Audiosystem Stromversorgung ................. 220 - 240 V W echselspannung, 50/60 Hz Leistungsaufnahme ....................................................... 15 W Leistungsaufnahme im Bereitschaftsmodus ................ 0,8 W Gewicht ....................................................................... 4,5 kg Abmessungen ..................... 210x 412 x 119 mm (B x T x H) (Ausschlie àlich hervorstehender Kabel us w .) Betriebstemperatur ...................................... 5 ð C bis 35ð C Luftfeuchtigkeit bei Betrieb .............................. 85% maximal (ohne Kondensationsbildung) Video-Ausgang A usgangspegel ...... 1 Vs-s (75 ⦠, negative Synchronisation) Anschlu àbuchsen .................................. BNC, RCA-Buchsen S-Video-A usgang Y (Leuchtdichte) - A usgangspegel ................... 1 Vs-s (75 â¦) C (F arbsignal) - Ausgangspegel ................ 286 mVs-s (75 ⦠) K omponentensignal-Videoausgang Y - A usgangspegel ................................ 1 Vs-s (75 ⦠) BNC P B - Ausgangspegel ............................. 0,7Vs-s (75 ⦠) BNC P R - A usgangspegel ............................. 0,7Vs-s (75 ⦠) BNC Signal/Rauschabstand ................................. mehr als 60 dB Horizontalaufl ö sung ......................................... mehr als 500 Eingang für externe Sync hronisation Eingangssignalpegel ....................................... Schwarzburst 0,3 Vs-s (75 â¦) BNC x 2 (durchgeschleift) A udio-Ausgang A usgangspegel Bei A udio-Ausgabe .................. 200 mVr ms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) Anzahl der Kan ä le ............................................................... 2 F requenzgang .................. 4 Hz bis 22 kHz (D VD fs: 48 kHz) 4 Hz bis 20 kHz (CD) Signal/Rauschabstand ................................... 115 dB (EIAJ) Dynamikbereich ............................................... 98 dB (EIAJ) To n h ö henschwankungen ....................... ñ0,001% W . PEAK oder niedriger (EIAJ) Andere Anschlüsse K oaxialer Digital-A usgangsanschlu à................ RCA-Buchse K ommunikations-Schnittstelle ....... 15polige D-SUB-Buchse Zubehör Audiokabel ......................................................................... 1 Videokabel ......................................................................... 1 Netzkabel ........................................................................... 2 Fernbedienungseinheit ...................................................... 1 T rockenz ellenbatter ien AA (R6P) ....................................... 2 Laser-Strichcodeblatt ......................................................... 1 Bedienungsanleitung ......................................................... 1 Hinweis ÷ Bei den obigen Angaben handelt es sich um die Standardwer te. ÷ Die technischen Daten und das Design dieses Produkts k ö nnen aus Gr ü nden der Weiterentwic klung ohne vorherige Ank ü ndigung ge ä ndert werden. Dati tecnici Generali Sistema .................................... D VD e audio digitale per CD Alimentazione ....................... A c.a. a 220 â 240 V , 50/60 Hz Consumo ....................................................................... 15 W Consumo nel modo di attesa ...................................... 0,8 W P eso ............................................................................ 4,5 kg Dimensioni ..... 210x 412 x 119 (L x P x A) senza protrusioni T emperatura di la voro ................................... Da 5 ð C a 35 ð C Umidit àdi lavoro ........... Non pi ù dell â 85%, senza condensa Uscite video Liv ello di uscita ............. 1 Vp-p (75 ohm, Negativ o sincrono) Prese .................................................................... BNC , RCA Uscite S-video Y (luminanza) â liv ello di uscita ................... 1 Vp-p (75 ohm) C (colore) â liv ello di uscita .................. 286 mVp-p (75 ohm) Uscite video componente Y â livello di uscita ............................ 1 Vp-p (75 ohm), BNC P B â livello di uscita ......................... 0,7Vp-p (75 ohm), BNC P R â livello di uscita ......................... 0,7Vp-p (75 ohm), BNC Rappor to S/R ...................................................... oltre 60 dB Risoluzione orizzontale ......................................... pl ù di 500 Ingresso esterno di sincronizzazione Liv ello del segnale in ingresso ...................... A raffiche nero 0,3 Vp-p (75ohm) BNC x 2 (anello passante) Uscita audio Liv ello di uscita A udio ........................................ 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Numero di canali ................................................................. 2 Risposta in frequenza ............................... da 4 Hz a 22 kHz (freq. campionamento D VD: 48 kHz) da 4 Hz a 20 kHz (CD) Rappor to S/R ................................................. 115 dB (EIAJ) Gamma dinamica ............................................. 98 dB (EIAJ) W ow & flutter ............... ñ0,001% a vattaggio di picco (EIAJ) Altri terminali Uscita digitale coassiale ..................................... Presa RCA Interf accia di comunicazione ....................... D-SUB a 15 pin Accessori Cavo audio ......................................................................... 1 Cavo video ......................................................................... 1 Cavo di alimentazione ........................................................ 2 T elecomando ...................................................................... 1 Batterie a secco AA (R6P) ................................................. 2 F oglio con codice a barre al laser ...................................... 1 Instruzioni per l â uso ............................................................ 1 Note ÷ T utti i valori elencati in questi dati tecnici sono v alori stand- ard. ÷ Il design ed i dati tecnici di questo prodotto sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso. Deutsch Italiano
94 Sp Especificaciones Generalidades Sistema .................................................... Sistema de D VD y sistema de audio digital de disco compacto Alimentaci ó n ................................... CA 220-240 V , 50/60 Hz Consumo ....................................................................... 15 W Consumo en el modo de espera .................................. 0,8 W Peso ............................................................................ 4,5 kg Dimensiones ................ 210 (An) x 412 (Prof) x 119 (Al) mm (Sin incluir cables que sobresalgan, etc.) T emperatura de funcionamiento ................... 5 ð C a 35ð C Humedad de funcionamiento ..................... No m á s del 85% (sin condensaci ó n) Salida de vÃÂdeo Nivel de salida .......... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠, sincronizaci ó n negativ a) T omas .................................................................. BNC , RCA Salida de S vÃÂdeo Y (luminancia) - Niv el de salida ....................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Niv el de salida ......................... 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Salida de Component vÃÂdeo Y - Nivel de salida ................................ 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠), BNC P B - Nivel de salida ............................ 0,7 Vp-p (75 ⦠), BNC P R - Nivel de salida ............................ 0,7 Vp-p (75 â¦), BNC Relaci ó n se ñ ala a ruide ...................... m ó s de 60 dB (EIAJ) Definici ó n horizontal ........................................... m á s de 500 Entrada de sincronización e xterna Nivel de se ñal de entrada ............................... R á faga negra 0,3 Vp-p (75 â¦) BNC x 2 (conexi ón derivada) Salida de audio Nivel de salida Durante la salida de audio ....... 200 mVr ms (1 kHz, â 20 dB) N ú mero de canales ............................................................. 2 Respuesta de frecuencia .... 4 Hz a 22 kHz (D VD fs: 48 kHz) 4 Hz a 20 kHz (CD) Relaci ó n se ñ ala a ruido ................................. 115 dB (EIAJ) Gama din á mica ................................................ 98 dB (EIAJ) Fluctuaci ó n y tr é molo ....... ñ0,001% W . PEAK menos (EIAJ) Otros terminales Salida digital coaxial ........................................... T oma RCA Interf az de comunicaci ó n .................... D-SUB, 15 contactos Accesorios Cable de audio ................................................................... 1 Cable de v àdeo ................................................................... 1 Cable de alimentaci ó n ....................................................... 2 Mando a distancia .............................................................. 1 Pilas secas AA (R6P) ......................................................... 2 Hoja de c ódigo de barra l á ser ............................................ 1 Manual de instrucciones .................................................... 1 ÷ T odos los valores listados en estas especificaciones son valores est á ndar . ÷ Las especificaciones y el dise ño de este producto est á n sujetos a cambios sin pre vio aviso con motiv os de mejoras. Español
95 En Connection/etc.
<99K00JF0G00> Printed in Japan/ Impr imé au Japon <DRB1268-A> Information about this product ÷ The German, French, Itarian and Spanish v ersions of this Operating Instructions are in PDF format at the web site below . ÷ Les versions allemande , française, italienne et espagnole de ce mode dâÂÂemploi sont disponib les en f or mat PDF sur le site Internet ci-dessous. ÷ V ersionen dieser Bedienungsanleitung in deutscher, fr anzösischer , italienischer und spanischer Sprache stehen im PDF- Format beim unten angegebenen W eb Site zur V erfügung. ÷ Le versioni in tedesco , francese, italiano e spagnolo di queste istruzioni per lâÂÂuso sono disponibili nel formato PDF al sito web sotto . ÷ Las v ersiones española, alemana, francesa e italiana de estas instrucciones de utilización se encuentran disponibles en formato PDF en el sitio de la telaraña mostr ado a continuación. http://www .pioneer -eur . com PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153 -8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONIC [EUROPE] N.V. Multimedia Division: PIONEER House, Hollybush Hill STOKE POGES, SLOUGH SL2 4QP UK TEL: 44-1-753-789-789 FAX: 44-1-753-789-880 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA Pty Ltd: www.pioneeraus.com.au